Who (says) What (to) Whom (in) What Channel (with) What Effect: Media Communication's Mind Control Through Technique

Physio-Techne: Merging Man And Machine

Artificial Human Beings - Technological Technique Fusing With the Human Body And Mind.  the merging of man and machine is much closer than the average person is willing to believe.
Artificial Human Beings - Technological Technique Fusing With the Human Body And Mind. the merging of man and machine is much closer than the average person is willing to believe.
TV Looking and Watching Us; We watching and looking at TV - Al the while we are obeying to being subliminally seduced by TV
TV Looking and Watching Us; We watching and looking at TV - Al the while we are obeying to being subliminally seduced by TV
Your Behavior Will Be Controlled By A Brain Chip. "Smart phone will be implanted"
Your Behavior Will Be Controlled By A Brain Chip. "Smart phone will be implanted"
Marshall McLuhan Has offered frequently brilliant and baffling theories about the impact of media on man. His observations  are riddled with such flambouyancy and undecipherable aphorisms:  "The electirc light is pure information", etc.
Marshall McLuhan Has offered frequently brilliant and baffling theories about the impact of media on man. His observations are riddled with such flambouyancy and undecipherable aphorisms: "The electirc light is pure information", etc.
Jacques Ellul: During World Wr II he was the leader of the French resistance Movement against the Nazis. He warned that Technique was having drastic effects on all aspects of modern life
Jacques Ellul: During World Wr II he was the leader of the French resistance Movement against the Nazis. He warned that Technique was having drastic effects on all aspects of modern life
Neil Postman, the Media Ecologist
Neil Postman, the Media Ecologist
Aldous Huxley and a Fabian Socialist talked about a coming Social Dictatorship
Aldous Huxley and a Fabian Socialist talked about a coming Social Dictatorship
Erich Fromm believed that freedom was a aspect of human nature that we either embrace or escape. Among many of his writing, "The Sane Society" was one of his great works
Erich Fromm believed that freedom was an aspect of human nature that we either embrace or escape. Among many of his writing, "The Sane Society" was one of his great works
Ludwig Wittgenstein extended Russel's notion of logical analysis by describing a world composed of facts, pictured by thoughts which turn expressed by the proposition of a logically structured language
Ludwig Wittgenstein extended Russel's notion of logical analysis by describing a world composed of facts, pictured by thoughts which turn expressed by the proposition of a logically structured language
Walter Lippmann
Walter Lippmann
Edward Bernays
Edward Bernays
Carl Jung
Carl Jung
Harold Lasswell
Harold Lasswell
Eric Havelock
Eric Havelock
Waalter Ong
Waalter Ong
Bertrand Russel
Bertrand Russel
AOL/Timewarner Logo
AOL/Timewarner Logo
The Walt Disney Company Logo
The Walt Disney Company Logo
Vivendi Universal Logo
Vivendi Universal Logo
Goebbels, minister of propaganda in the Nazi regime
Goebbels, minister of propaganda in the Nazi regime
McLuhan: The new electric galaxy of events has already moved into the Gutenberg Galaxy. Even without collision, such coexistence of technologies brings trauma/tension to all living beings
McLuhan: The new electric galaxy of events has already moved into the Gutenberg Galaxy. Even without collision, such coexistence of technologies brings trauma/tension to all living beings
Grammar of words within language can be applied from one word used in various meanings: but meaning is the same meaning many
Grammar of words within language can be applied from one word used in various meanings: but meaning is the same meaning many
Eschew Obfuscation in the English Language and what to do about vocabulary intimidation: "eschew obfuscation" means "avoid confusion".
Eschew Obfuscation in the English Language and what to do about vocabulary intimidation: "eschew obfuscation" means "avoid confusion".
Communication process is circular and linear; Provided the additional notion of a "field of experience"; Included feedback; included culture; included context- Wilbur Schramm's Model, 1954
Communication process is circular and linear; Provided the additional notion of a "field of experience"; Included feedback; included culture; included context- Wilbur Schramm's Model, 1954
Kincaid's Convergence model: this is when communication is defined as a process in which participants create and share information with one another in order to reach a mutual understanding; communication is viewed as proces rather than a single event
Kincaid's Convergence model: this is when communication is defined as a process in which participants create and share information with one another in order to reach a mutual understanding; communication is viewed as proces rather than a single event
The information processing model has been dominant in cognitive science and communication studies; it question as to whether is there communication without cognition?
The information processing model has been dominant in cognitive science and communication studies; it question as to whether is there communication without cognition?
Source included oral, written, electronic or any symbolic generator-of-messages; stresses transmission of ideas; recognized that receivers important to communicate; helps us dicipher words and symbols of other so we can understand
Source included oral, written, electronic or any symbolic generator-of-messages; stresses transmission of ideas; recognized that receivers important to communicate; helps us dicipher words and symbols of other so we can understand
Scientists are studying complex wiring of the brain to build  the computer of the future, one that combines the brain's ability for sensation, perception, action, interaction, cognition, consumption, compact size creating computational theory
Scientists are studying complex wiring of the brain to build the computer of the future, one that combines the brain's ability for sensation, perception, action, interaction, cognition, consumption, compact size creating computational theory
Scientists are studying the wiring of the human brain. Circuit tracing method allows studying of incoming and outgoing signals from any two brain centers; they can look aat up to four links in a circuit. They see that as their technological innovatio
Scientists are studying the wiring of the human brain. Circuit tracing method allows studying of incoming and outgoing signals from any two brain centers; they can look aat up to four links in a circuit. They see that as their technological innovatio

Subliminal Seduction and Mass Mind Control and Techniques

Communications Thinkers On Mass Media

The most important dividing points in the history of civilization were each accompanied by an invention that caused an information explosion. Such information explosions have a tendency to propel civilization to the next level. Robertson writes: "... civilization can generate information at a rate that far exceeds anyone's ability to make use of it. Electronic computers, however, are capable of creating a totally domineering entity since the invention of the printing press and the publication of books." Robertson discusses a new dimension in an information explosion.

Computers can multiply our ability to find, analyze, and make use of vast quantities of extant information, thereby circumventing the information limits that limits the invention of the printing press and the publication of books. Robertson breaks civilizations into four categories, and Level 1 being the emergence of Language; Level 2 is the development of writing systems; Level 3 is the invention of the printing press and the publication of books; and Level 4 is the computer age. It is from these four aspects that we can see the evolving and evolution of media in its multi formed and multifold manifestations we are now dealing with in this Technological society.

In the same vein, on the other hand, Dobbs took this information of Robertson far beyond analysis. Dobbs describes how the technological advances of the 'Computer Age' have actually changed the nature of the human being. Dobbs believes that humanity itself has become a technological extension: a "holeopathic retrieval," and that it is possible to return to our own "anthromorphic " (First Nature) bodies with complete awareness of how the body was lost in the first place.

He believes that under the present "electric conditions," the "Second Nature body [technological Extension) is over-stimulated to the point of constant awareness. And maintains "nobody sleeps" because nobody has a real body. According to Dobbs, Second Nature(we'll begin calling it what he says it is - Technological Extension - oral and mechanical technological extension of the human being, which he sees as an artifact of the First Nature embodied condition.

A person who awakens to this condition is then free to "flip out of the body" and become discarnate and then return to the First nature(anthromorphic state), and flip back and forth between First Nature [Original nature] and Second Nature[virtual reality]. This is how human beings have been channeling, and having other out of body experiences. (Dobbs)

It is this oscillation from nature to technique that is exploited by those who wish to controlled in order to make them obey the new technologies and their emergent techniques and protocol-that one has to put trust and operational reality fully onto the technological sphere that obeying is partly being enslaved to these techniques and gizmos.

We cannot divorce our First nature from existence from what we are, yet we have an undeniable Second nature extension. Our current technological level has the propensity to extend the Second Nature to the 'nth' degree. This is most obvious in the present "urgency" to move human beings off the planet into a home far away deep in space. As Dobbs explains, 'what we have in our attempts to get off planet is the first simultaneous extension of both First and Second Nature [moving the physical body with the aid of technology into space].

There is an inescapable trend leading toward ultimate implosion from the Telegraph phase to the Satellite phase. The Satellite is an important marker in this evolution towards fusion. If you consider every technological environment an extension of the human crowd, or entropic social Nature, rather than of biological Nature(First Nature), then because the satellite is alone of all technologies a complete extension of the plane, or First Nature, by being the first man-made inhabitable simulation of our 'natural' environment,' it follows that the satellite is the first simultaneous extension of both First and Second Natures,(It is both the extension of Man and Technology), thus in this case, something unique and unprecedented has occurred.

This merging of the two Natures 'anticipates' and prefigures symbolically the bridging of the gap ("friction") between humanity and the environment[technological technique]. Also this frictionless condition is anticipated by the satellite as a symbol of individual attachment from the historical prison of the crowd dynamic. We are literally 'out of town,' and not jiust on another town, but 'off the planet.' This means, were we to achieve this feat, we would be in a position of trusting and obeying these extension, which we are still finding out if it is to our benefit or not.

As Robertson explains, each of the three information explosions which occurred in the past produced a society that was largely unrecognizable to an individual from an earlier civilization. The current level 4 information explosion(the computer age) is proceeding at a much quicker pace than the previous three. The difference between 20th and the 21st centuries may well be greater than the difference between the 290th and the 13th (AD or BC).

The same peculiarity of Level 4(computer age) was that the extension of civilization into outer space environments. And one way to appreciate the full capability of the 'computer age civilization is to recognize that the Apollo moon landings were among the first [and perhaps the simplest] examples of accomplishment that are possible only in a Level 4[computer Age] civilization.

Dobbs claims to be the leader of "The Secret Council of Ten," a secret group that controls the world with "techniques" which he calls "synchronistic-linguistics" and Tetrad management." The "Tretrad" is a four step process that analyzes he projected evolution of man-made artifacts, and is a means of predicting the future of humanity by predicting the future of its technology. Dobbs claims that as 'tetrad's manager" his goal is to help humanity to retrieve their lost human scale identity.

Dobbs includes technology as part of "synchronistic Linguistics"He says that Tetrad Management is management of the Global Theater by the shadow government through synchronistic linguistics, which numbs and entrances its viewers using the "audience participation mystique." The media works to make you think you're part of something. But you're not, because it's all a big hologram. One then begins obeying ma-made illusion and delusion of grandeur in a viral reality and still believes that he/she is obeying man made rules and created thoughts and mind-set-They could not be farther from the truth.

As P.D. Ouspensky has noted, the 'appearance' of 3-D material world is a property of human perception and cognition, and not a property of the world per se. Many have noted that this 'appearance' is much like a hologram. In addition, studies have corroborated the hypothesis that the mind works "holographically."

For instance Carl Pribram hypothesized a holographic model to explain how the brain convinces us that inner processes are actually located outside the body. David Bhom was well known for for using quantum physics theories to suggest that the universe operates as a kind of giant, flowing hologram.One radio caller once pointed out that they strive for total control, but the thing they can't control is the real natural phenomenon of "synchronicity."

This is because synchronicity is the real world(First Nature) leaking or [morphing — my insertion] through the second Nature sleeper. Synchronicity has been described as the "flaw" in the fabric of space-time. You might even see it leak in the Dobbsian perspective. Dobbs once stated that:

"They can't control your private citadel of consciousness, and that means they can't control you, but they can control our synthetic crowd behavior. That is what you've got to realize ... they are controlling us through synchronistic-linguistics. They call it audience participation mystique. Dobbs declares that war is 'synthetic' crowd behavior."

It is thought control through synchronistic linguistics("be all that you can be, get an edge on life in the Army." War on television allows us to vicariously participate in heinous crimes against our fellow man and to revel in our nationalistic victories. Television needs wars as much as armies and governments need wars in order to effectuate the audience participation mystique through linguistic flips. These linguistic flips facilitate for man's consciousness to be patterned to obey and be numbed from being conscious of this linguistic synthesized synchronistic-linguistics.

The technological noise is certainly getting louder[and more confusing] by the day. The Dobbsian "Tetrad Flip" might be orchestrated by the ancient notion of the "archetype." As Jung has noted, the archetypes are the images or symbols by which the psyche is attached to nature, or, by which "its link with the earth and the world appears at its most tangible." Jung noted that the archetypes are a sort of "connecting link between the psyche and earth," or a bridge between mind and matter.

Rupert Shledrake believes these forms constitute an "intelligent" matrix, while the archetype is part of the brain structure, it is that part of the brain structure which is constantly building and maintaining the bridge between psyche and matter, keeping the familiar territory familiar. If the brain is a hologram, this means that the intelligent energy fields that maintain this holograms are, perhaps, the archetypes, an intelligent holographic energy matrix which constantly maintains the bridge between the individual psyche and the world we project 'out there.'

This projection of the archetypes and the intelligent energy fields are in the control of the monied potentate or media moguls and it is what they seek to control and gain from it. It is here that mass media is utilized to, mold opinions, attitudes and defines what normal and acceptable by exploiting the duality of the physical world along with that of the hologprahic energy matrix which constantly maintains the bridge between the individual and they world humans project out there and which is made to manifest itself as being out there too, through monied deposition for mass consumption, and exploiting these mass media channels and myriad mass media apparels to control and gain from them-to make the mass consuming public to obey-to make the mass consumers be under their control.

Subliminal Perceptions

Mass media is the most powerful tool used by the ruling lass to manipulate the masses. It shapes and molds opinions and attitudes and defines what is normal an acceptable. So that, up to this point we now know how the mass media are media forms designed to reach the largest audience possible. They include television, movies, radio, newspapers, magazines, books, records, rapes, CDs, video games and the internet.

From those studies emerged the science of Human Communications, Communications Theory, and this is used in marketing, public Relations and Politics os Mass Communications as a necessary tool to insure the functionality of a large democracy; it is also a necessary too for a dictatorships. The collective unconscious transpires through the existence of similar symbols and mythological figure in different civilizations and Archetypal symbols seem to be embedded in our collective subconscious, and when exposed to them, Man demonstrates natural attraction and fascination.

Western countries did extract wealth from their colonies, but that's only part of the story. Today, these countries, especially the United states, invest large sums of capital which help advance the technology and productivity of so-called 'backward societies'. True they rake out more than they put in, since they must make something of their investment, but they also create wealth that benefits the recipient country.

It is not a simple zero-sum situation; both parties benefit. And since these poor nations do not produce enough of their own needs, then foreign investments are very much welcomed by them. This is the case of South Africa, and African countries, and ll the African and other people in the Diaspora. (Parenti). This even creates a dependency on their part towards the emerging mass media technologies and gizmos brought forth by these rich countries.

Parenti continues to add and clarify this point of how big capital investments subjugates poor countries and their peoples through economic means and through technology. Such investments may increase production and profits, but they seldom benefit the ordinary people.

The "trickle-down" means theory works even less in the Third World than in the United States. Investments are usually welcomed by the small upper class of the recipient nation, the people who benefit directly from favorable contracts, payoffs, and kickbacks. Investments do not go into a country, as such, but into a particular set of activities that are beneficial to the investor and to those who service investor interests, such as strong-arm rulers who keep the workforce in line.

Left out of this arrangement, and often victimized by it, are the bulk of the populace. These despots, whenever they are given access to the new communications technologies, they use them against their people and for their own wants and needs.

Mass media are media forms designed to reach the largest audience possible. They include Television, movies, radio, newspapers, magazines, books, records, CDs, DVD's, video games(those online too) the Internet and its offshoots, Social media gismos and the applications.

Many studies have been conducted in the past century to measure the effects of media on the population in order to discover the best techniques to influence it. From those studies emerged the science of Communications, which is used in marketing, public relations and politics(as a propaganda tool) Mass communication is a necessary tool to insure the functionality of a large democracy; it is also a necessary tool for a dictatorship. It all depends on its usage.

Harold Lasswell, a leading American Political scientist and communication theorist, specializing in the analysis of propaganda, was of the opinion that a democracy, a government ruled by the people, could not sustain itself without 'specialized elite' shaping and moulding public opinion through propaganda. Lasswell explained that, "When elites lack the requisite force to compel obedience, social managers/engineers always turn to a whole new technique of control, largely through propaganda. We must recognize the "ignorance and stupidity [of] ... the masses and(should) not succumb to democratic dogmatism about men being the best judges of their own interests."

Identifying Media Controllers, Players(Financiers) and Mass Consumers

Exploiting Herd Mentality

Lasswell was famous for his media analysis model based on "Who [says] What [to] Who [in] What Channel [with] What Effect. By this mode, Lasswell indicates that in order to properly analyze a media product, one must look at Who produced the product (the people who ordered its creation), Who was it aimed at (the target audience) and What were the desired effects of this product (to inform, to persuade, to sell, etc) on the audience.

This act of media communication to control our minds and habits is addressed by Edward Bernay, the father of public relations, and he used concepts discovered by Sigmund Freud to manipulate the public using the subconscious. He shared Lippmann's view of the general population by considering it irrational and subject to "herd instinct". In his opinion, the masses need to be manipulated by an invisible government to insure the survival of democracy.

We need to understand that the exploitation of the physical beingness of the mass body and the newly and efficient techniques embedded within the new technologies are exploited and used by different people in various power occupations. This is used in many formats and techniques by the Large and the Rich media systems of the richest countries in the world.

The corporate domination and hypercommercialization of the US Media system is encased in several myths and half truths, such as the notion of the free market "giving the people what they want" and the idea that "technologies will set us free" is their modus operandi.

To a large extent, this absence of informed radical media politics reflects the power of the US media corporation to control and dominate not only mainstream debate of media issues but also the debate for what purpose these media should be used for. After all, why pick a fight with these guys when the chances for success seem so slim, and when there seems to be little vocal public recognition of structural media issues and/or opposition to the status quo and its communications systems and media?

The Corporate Media may well be the most powerful adversary in the ranks of Capital, and they are in the enviable position of owning the very media that would provide any coverage of media politics to the general public-and also sell their wares and inflating their profits.

In general, that means that the news media avoid any discussion of media structure/function and social roles, leaving analysis of media ownership and advertising to the business pages and the trade press, where they are covered as issue that concerns investors, not workers, consumers, citizens or any public or social interest groups. If this not a "no lose" situation, it is certainly one where the corporate media enjoy a favorably sloped playing field.(Elizabeth Lesly).

In a world, the corporate media has all it wants at its exposure and whims.

Media and Race

For us to better understand as to what type of power is displayed by these media corporations, we read what Ben H. Bagdikian points out to when he writes:

"Yet, as a Capitalist enterprise, the main purpose of the White controlled Media - media created by and reflecting the worldview of people of European descent - is to create and maintain consumers of all ages. And this European centered media is experiencing steady growth and rapid consolidation.

"The top media corporations that have 'dominant' power over American [and world] culture, have shrunk to only ten. For example, AOL Time Warner, is now headed by Richard Parsons, a Black man, this top echelon is almost completely White. Not Surprisingly, the product - whether packaged in magazines or television shows — is orientated toward a White audience."

This is what I call one way street media which expects outcomes and no feeedback from the intended audinence, especially if it is not White.

Aldous Huxley believed society is controlled by an impersonal force, a ruling elite, which manipulates the population using personal methods. Some of these methods are hidden in plain sight. One needs only to look back at any time there is an election, more especially in America, the Ad media jumps into action. The media, in this case is used to highlight the 'good things of one candidate' and the worst and terrible things about another candidate.

The thrust and technique here is simply 'to manipulate the population using various techniques in forms of TV Ads.' Huxley writes:

"Impersonal forces which we have almost no control seem to be pushing us all in the direction of the Brave New Worldian Nightmare; and this impersonal pushing is being consciously accelerated by representatives of commercial and political organizations who have developed a number of new techniques for manipulating, in the interest of some monied minority, the thoughts and feelings of the masses."

Access to controlling the minds, thoughts and behaviors through various mediums and media is the stock in trade of those who control media and the people.

If we interrogate a bit of the history of the struggles worth noting wherein the bulk of the population was perceived as being more or less akin to a mob, who would be better served were they to take orders from than those above them. The only question is from "Whom". C.B. informs us thus: Prior to the Twentieth century the class basis of societies was dealt with candidly, and the need to "keep the rabble in line" was understood to be a major concern of politics.

As Eric Hobsbawm notes regarding the European upper class's concerns about popular sovereignty, "The growing democratization made it impossible to debate them publicly with any degree of frankness." In the United States, too, in the twentieth century such open contempt for the ability of the mass of humanity to govern itself remained illusive — as discussed in the seminal books and essays of Edward Bernays, Walter Lippmann, and Harold Lasswell - and in the process, it assumed new forms, subtle and less covert of mass mind, habits and attitudes control.

It is written in the "Vigilant Citizen that: 'Mass media is the most powerful tool used by the ruling class to manipulate the masses. It shapes and molds opinions and attitudes and defines what is normal and acceptable." How this tool of media communications is used against the masses has been attempted to be captured by Chuck D, founder of the Public Enemy rap group as follows:

"We don't control our economics or education, our enforcement or our environment. Then there's the tendency of not having control over the realities, and that means the fantasy world can be dealt and sold to us very easily. So, people become what they see, and when people become what they see, a reflection or a limited reflection can end up as a direct interpretation."

Approximately 100 percent of Americans own televisions, 70 percent of whom subscribe to cable; 100 percent own radios; and 77 percent subscribe to newspapers. In most homes, the television set is on at least seven hours per day, though studies find that children watch about eight hours per day. Americans listen to the radio 25 hours a day and spend 45 minutes reading their daily newspapers. In addition, Americans receive most of their news from television and often believe what they see and hear on the news Keller.

African americans watch and listen to more broadcast media than these averages. For example, African Americans spend more than 70 hours per week watching television — 20-35 percent more than Whits(Not Just A Moral Imperative, 1994) Americans are deeply steeped into a technological society more than many countries or peoples of the world.

It is the emergence of Mass Media which makes possible the use of propaganda techniques on a societal scale. The orchestration of Press, Radio and television to create a continuous, lasting and total environment renders the influence of propaganda virtual unnoticed precisely because it creates a constant environment. Mass media provides the essential link between the individual and the demands of the technological society (Jacques ?) This is what Jacques Ellul has to say about Technique:

"Technique has taken over the whole civilization. Earth, procreation, birth all submit to technical efficiency and systemization. In a sense, man is becoming submerged by technology and it techniques and this is controlled and manipulated by the Rich elite-which in the final analysis, this enable the controllers of these systems to make the mass consuming public into obedient entities."

The Society Based On Technology

Technique: Techne/Episteme[Epistemology]

By "technique" Ellul meant not just technology but the larger, impersonal methods and "systems" by which our family, social, and political lives are ordered. Ellul states that: "The problem is to know in which direction things are moving: the Political or the Technological? The answer seems clear to me. And my entire analysis flows from this perspective: it is not that political problems are disappearing, but rather that the free play of traditional political forms is an illusion." From what I can tell as a Hubris that, in answering Ellul's query, things are moving in the direction of Technology.

From the geographical point of view, it is easy to see that the technological technique is constantly gaining ground, country by country, and that its area of action is the whole world. In all countries, whatever their degree of "civilization," there is a tendency to apply the same technical procedures. Even when the population of a given country is not completely assimilated technically, it is nevertheless able to use the instruments which technique put into its hands.

The people of these countries have no need to be Westernized. Technique, whatever it is to be used for, does not require a 'civilized' man. Technique, whatever hand uses it, produces its effect more or less totally in proportion to the individual's more or less total absorption to it. This is because its mode of interaction fits and benefits man's mode and ways of dual communication, as discussed earlier on in this Hub above.

Ellul continues: "In the course of history, there have always been different principles of civilization according to regions, nations, and continents. But today everything tends to align itself on technical principles. In the past, different civilizations took different "paths"; today, all peoples follow the same road and the same impulse…

"…All the business of life, from work and amusement to love and death, is seen from the technical point of view. The number of "technical slaves" is growing [exponentially], and rapidly and the ideal of all governments is to push as fast as possible toward industrialization and technical enslavement." R.P. Lynton writes:

"The industrialization of a community in Europe or America, on the one hand, or of Siam, Nigeria, Turkey, or Uruguay, on the other, poses the same problems."

Ellul adds:

"If the technical movement had its inception in one of these 'backward' countries, it would have had aborted. But these societies are presented with a technical movement full of vigor and in all its expansive power. No longer is there any question as to whether circumstances are favorable to its flowering existence. The technical movement is strong enough to impose itself and to break down all barriers to its progress.

"For example, the conquering nations exported their machines and the organization through their armies [making easy to take over their set objectives in foreign lands]. The vanquished people, in a state of mind compounded of admiration and fear, adopted the machines , which came to replace their gods. Not only were the machines the means their conquerors had used to subdue them, but the machines represented the possible means for liberation from these conquerors.

"At first, rebellion was incoherent, but to the degree that these peoples became better organized and technicized, rebellion became a national affair." Today, as technological gizmos with their imbedded flood the collective space of different people around the world, there is some sobering realization by these recipients as to the alienating nature of the new technologies as they obliterate their cultures and imposes on them a foreboding sense that they shall have to obey the deep pocketed owners of the rich countries.

"The technicized revolutions were as a result of having first been colonized, using machines, and in the process, the subjugated learned how to apply technique among their ranks in opposition to their conquerors But this was fraught with obstacles that are still being figured-out by the conquered to this day. Ellul further instructs us about the second factor governing technical invasion being commerce:

"It was mandatory for the Western powers to conquer the markets necessary for western industry and technical life. No barrier could oppose the necessity for the development of commerce. War provokes the sudden and stupefying adaptation of pre-colonial people to an army on machine and with their kind of discipline, and their resistance necessarily yielded to technical adaptation, and very rapidly. "

The excessive and infusion of technique broke down all traditional and individual desires [McLuhan's Tribal man(early man)]. In terms of today, all poor and dominated countries had to subordinate themselves to the highly technicized countries simply because of their technical superiority and technical invasion was not exclusively colonial invasion but assumed other forms as well.

The Western Colonizers not only colonized information of commerce and the like, they also colonized information about the world. They control, today, all intellectual information as their property and its dissemination and progress in order to still maintain power

'Ours is a progressively technical civilization'; and by technique, Ellul meant more than machine technology.Technique referred to complex of standardized means for attaining predetermined result. Thus, it converts spontaneous and unreflective behavior into that which is deliberate. But for the vanquished not only were machines the means their conquerors had used to subdue them, but the machines represented the possible means for liberation from these conquerors.

"The pace of science forces the pace of technique. Theoretical physics forces atomic energy on us; the successful production of the fission bomb forces upon us the manufacture of the hydrogen bomb. We do not choose our problems, we do not choose our products; we are pushed, we are forced — by what? By a system which has no purpose and goal transcending it, which makes man its appendix." (Erich Fromm).

Technique is used to make man obedient to it and its owners. If then man becomes a small part of the power of technique to change him/her because the 'pace of science forces the pace of 'technique' as Fromm informs us, we find Marshall McLuhan contending that media — in of themselves - "exerts a compelling influence on man. If electricity is information, the telegraph a forerunner of modern electronics, it behooves man to understand the media and its technique as being the message: that means that which says what it says to whom through what type of a channel and to what effect does it do that."

This is the How, Where, When and Why-of controlled obedience and how it takes form and manifests itself in the lives, attitudes, behaviors and beliefs of the mass consuming man to the extent that he becomes enslaved and obedient, if you get my drift...

Understanding the Media and its Technique

Amongst the conquest of modern man and all he craves for and dreams of acquiring, and the other many forms this morphed into, it is what McLuhan contends that "all media - in of themselves and regardless of the messages they communicate - "exert a compelling influence on man and society. Prehistoric, or 'tribal'[early man], man existed in a harmonious balance of the sense, perceiving the world equally through hearing, smell, touch, sight and taste.

"But technological innovations are extensions of human abilities and senses that alter this sensory balance — an alteration that, in turn, inexorably reshapes the society created by technology."

According to McLuhan, "There have been three basic technological innovations: the invention of the phonetic alphabet, which jolted 'tribal' [early man] out of his sensory balance and gave him dominance to the eye; the introduction of movable type in the 16th century, which accelerated the process; and the invention of the telegraph in 1844, which heralded an electronics revolution that will ultimately retrabilize [reverse modern man to early man by restoring his sensory balance]."

McLuhan has made it his business to explain and extrapolate the repercussions of this electronic revolution. He was able to discern significance where others see only data, or nothing: he informs us how to measure phenomena previously unmeasurable. Therefore, the introduction of technological technique extended the sensory patterns of 'early man' and launched him into the modern technological society with all its concomitants.

McLuhan informs us further about this progression, thus:

"Because all media, from the phonetic alphabet to the computer, are extensions of man that cause deep and lasting changes in him and transform his environment. Such an extension is an intensification, and amplification of an organ, sense or function, and whenever it takes place, the central nervous system appears to institute a self-protective numbing of the affected area, insulating and anesthetizing it from conscious awareness of what's happening to it.

"It's a process rather like Freudian conception of repression. I can call this peculiar form of self-hypnosis Narcissus narcosis, a syndrome whereby 'man remains as unaware of the psychic and social effects of his new technology as a fish out of water it swims in. As a result, this is precisely at the point where a new media-induced environment becomes all pervasive and transmogrifies our sensory balance.

"The problem is doubly acute today because man must, as a simple survival strategy, become aware of what is happening to him, despite the attendant pain of such comprehension. The fact that he has not done so in this age of electronics is what has made this also the age of anxiety, which in turn has transformed into its Doppelganger - the therapeutically reactive age of anomie and apathy.

"—But despite our self-protective escape mechanisms, the total-field awareness engendered by electronic media is enabling us — indeed compelling us - to grope toward a consciousness of the unconscious, toward a realization that technology is an extension on of our bodies. We live in the first age when change occurs sufficiently rapidly to make such pattern recognition possible for society at large.

"—Until the present era, this awareness has always been reflected first by the artist, who has had the power - - and courage — of the seer to read the language of the outer world and relate it to the inner world."

McLuhan addresses how this "numbing" effect protects man from the psychic pain caused by the extension of the man's nervous system which he attributes to the media and dispels this notion by alerting man about the changes in his environment. McLuhan explains:

"In the past, the effects of media were experienced more gradually, allowing the individual and society to absorb and cushion their impact to some degree. Today, in the electronic age of instantaneous communication, I believe that our survival, and at the very least our comfort and happiness, is predicated on understanding the nature of our environment, because unlike previous environmental changes, the electric media constitute a total and near-instantaneous transformation of culture, values and attitudes.

"This upheaval generates great pain and identity loss, which can be ameliorated only through a conscious awareness of its dynamics. If we understand the revolutionary transformation caused by new media, we can anticipate and control them; but if we continue in our self-induced subliminal trance, we will be slaves."

Because the introduction of technological technique which extended the sensory patterns of non-technological man, man has but succumbed to its directives and become an absolute slave who obeys all that is desired by the owners of the technology and the dictates of technique.

To this point I would like to add that, today, we see this technological gadgets are proliferating throughout the world. The emergence on these new gadgets and the more "user-friendly" they have become, has begun to enslave us to these gadgets and the techniques embedded within the core of the functions of these technologies.

The behavior of people has changed, and most people are now nestled to, and preoccupied with their cell phones, iTunes, [now the new] iCloud From Apple, Notepads, NoteBooks iPods, PlayStations 1, 2 and 3, Wii's, XBox360, Nintendo DS, PSP(Play Station Portable, Tablet, Smart phones, Nintendo Gametube, XBox, Nintendo DS, Nintendo D Lite, all types of APPS and the like.

With this plethora of gizmos and their technical wizardly which leaves the consumers and users 'numbed and agog," and these systems so permanently engorged into the very fiber and nervous system, soul and psyche of man, and these machines were patterned and were imaged after man's anatomy and being-ness-as mimicking man's nervous system in its manifestation as the Web.

No wonder there is not even time to learn about these machinery and how our love-life with them has been affecting and is continually affecting and effecting us in perpetuity and very "deeply" Man has become incapable of noticing these effects and affects because the overwhelming reproductions of the new technologies and techniques have enveloped all his sensory patterns and existential realities.

Man is immersed body and soul, within and onto these toys, gadgets and gizmos that they never get to settle on, or be satisfied with nor fully know and learn about. But alas! Another is produced which outdoes the one which was the best until then. So that, I concur with McLuhan that we need to understand these new media so that we might be able to 'anticipate them and control' them.

But at this point and time we've been thoroughly enslaved by technology's technique, and made to self-iincacerate ourselves with, onto and within these techniques and technologies from what these companies offering these invisible Technologies and Techniques that they use to make people obey and then controlling them for gainful ends which we will be discussing specifically below, and generally throughout this hub.

Understanding the Hub thus far, we begin to get the picture "Who" is "Saying" "What" to "Who" "Through"/['In'] "What" "Channel" and to "What Effect": i.e., learning to learn about the new ways of communications and media disseminating techniques as effected by those who finance and own them. It is at this point we take a brief look at some of these Media entities.

Media Corporate Colossuses

A glimpse on some of the modern corporation will inform us as to how these companies are set up. The graph, which can be seen in the picture gallery, shows that the majority of US media outlets went from 50 to 5 in less than 20 years. Below are some of the top corporations evolving around the world and the assets they own, and by now most readers are familiar with the role the play in the Communications environments we are all part of today.

AOL(America On Line) and TimeWarner

A list of the properties controlled by AOLTimeWarner lists 292 separate companies and subsidiaries. Of these, twenty-two are joint ventures with other major corporations involved in varying degrees with media operations. These partners include 3Com, eBay, Hewlett-Packard, Citigroup, Ticketmaster, American Express, Homestore, Sony, Viva, Bertelsmann, Polygram, and Amazon.com. some more familiar fully owned properties of Time Warner include Book-of-the-Month Club; Little, Brown publishers; HBO, with its seven channels; CNN; seven specialized and foreign-language channels; Road Runner; Warner Bothers Studios; Weight Watchers; Popular Science; and fifty different record labels. Ben Bagdikan, The New Media Monopoly.

- Also, Time Warner owns:

"Publicity is the deliberate attempt to manage the public's perception of a Subject. The Subjects of publicity include:

  • 64 magazines, including Time, Life, People, MAD Magazine and DC Comics
  • Warner Brother, New Line and Fine Line Features in cinema
  • More than 40 music labels including Warner Brothers, Atlantic and Elektra
  • Many television networks such as WB Networks, HBO, Cinemax, TNT, Cartoon Network and CNN
  • Madonna, Sean Paul, The White Stripes.

VIACOM

Viacom owns:

  • CBS, MTV, MTV2, UPN, VH1, Showtime, Nickelodeon, Comedy Central, TNN, CMT and BET
  • Paramount Pictures, Nickelodeon Movie, MTV Films
  • Blockbuster Videos
  • 1800 screens in theaters through Famous Players

The Walt Disney Company

"Disney ownership of a hockey team called 'The Mighty Ducks' of Anaheim does not begin to describe the vastness of the kingdom. Hollywood is still its symbolic heart, with eight movie production studios and distributors: Walt Disney Pictures, Touchstone Pictures, Miramax, Buena Vista Home Video, Buena vista Home Entertainment, Buena Vista International, Hollywood Pictures and Caravan Pictures.

The Walt Disney Company controls eight book house imprints under Walt Disney Company Book Publishing and ABC Publishing Group; seventeen magazines; The ABC Television Network, with ten owned and operated stations of its own including in the five top markets; thirty radio stations, including all major markets, eleven cable channels, including Disney, ESPN(jointly), A&E, and the History Channel; thirteen international broadcast channels stretching from Australia to Brazil; seven production and sports units around the world; and seventeen Internet sites, including the ABC group, ESPN.sportszone, Lyric Street,NFL.com, NBAZ.com, and NASCAR.com. Its five music groups include the Buena Vista, Lyric Street, and Walt Disney labels, and live theater productions growing our of the movies The Lion King, Beauty and the Beast and King David.

The Walt Disney Company owns:

  • ABC, Disney Channel, ESPN, A&E, History Channel
  • Walt Disney Pictures, Touchstone Pictures, Hollywood Pictures, Miramax Film Corp., Dimension and Buena Vista International
  • Miley Cyrus/ Hannah Montana, Selena Gomez, Jonas Brothers

Vivendi Universal

Vivendi Universal owns:

  • 27% of US music sales, labels include: Interscope, Geffen, A&M, Island, Def Jam, MCA, Mercury, Motown and Universal
  • Universal Studios, Studio Canal, Polygram Films, Canal+
  • Numerous internet and cell phone companies
  • Lady Gaga, The Black Eyed Peas, Lil Wayne, Rihanna, Maria Carey, Jay-Z

SONY

Sony owns:

  • Columbia Pictures, Screen Gems, sony Pictures Classics
  • 15% of US Music sales, labels include Columbia, Epic, Sony, Arista, Jive and RCA Records
  • Beyonce, Shakira, Michael Jackson, Alicia Keys, Christina Aguilera
  • These entities are listed above to begin to give a much more concrete picture of who controls all what we read, see, hear and write about. It is merely an effort that should give the reader that whenever one cites the masters of media ecology, one needs to make or concretely list the giant Media Conglomerates and who owns what, and that we get to know who controls and makes us conform to whatever we consume as the collective mass media/communications consumers and agents.

The Internet will Set Us Free: Mind-At-Large and Language

The media is largely controlled by billionaires and big corporations who, as shown with the companies above, control the content and rest of the information dissemination to the mass media consuming public. McChesney writes that the present media system are antidemocratic:

"Dominated by a handful of massive firms, advertises, and the firms' billionaires owners, the system is spinning in a hypercommercial frenzy with little trace of public service. ...In the 1990s a new argument emerged, the effect of which is to suggest that we have no reason to be concerned about concentrated corporate control and hypercommercialization of media.

"This is the notion that the Internet, or, more broadly, digital communication networks, will set us free. This is hardly an unprecedented argument; every major new electronic media technology this century, from film, AM radio, shortwave radio, and facsimile broadcasting to FM radio, terrestrial television broadcasting, cable TV, and satellite broadcasting, has spawned similar utopian notions. The claims for what the Internet will do to media and communication are no less sweeping."

The Internet is wildly underestimated, according to Negroponte. "It will grow to be the enabling technology of all media - TV, radio, magazines, and soon."

The Internet, the argument goes, holds the potential to undermine corporate and commercial control of media. If everything is in the process of becoming digital, if anyone can produce a website at minimal cost, and if it can be accessed world wide via the World Wide Web, it is only a matter of time [e.g., expansion of bandwidth, improvement of software] before the media giants(as pointed out above-my addition), find themselves swamped by countless high-quality competitors. Their monopolies will be crushed. But this has not yet happened all the way, but the big companies have taken some form of control and that is very disconcerting, to say the least[this is another topic for some other Hub]

McChesney continues to add that: "On the one hand, the Internet is a quite remarkable and complex phenomenon that cannot be categorized by any previous medium's experience. It is a two-way mass communication, it uses the soon-to-be-universal digital binary code, it is global, and it is quite unclear how, exactly. It is to be regulated. On the other hand, the Internet is changing the historical warp speed.

Any attempt at prediction during such tumultuous time is nearly impossible. As the consumers of mass media we need to look at the various aspects of the evolution and Nature of the Internet policy-making in the Internet, and locate the Internet in the historical tradition of communication policymaking. One of the striking features of the Internet is that for something roundly proclaimed to be so millennial, it has enjoyed virtually no public debate over how it should be organized and deployed. This is noteworthy because the Internet is a public sector creation. (McChesney)

At this juncture, we take note of the warning that Ellul opined on that:

"Modern communications technologies have opened a gateway for special interests to saturate people's lives with propaganda and spur them into action — without them ever realizing it. Naturally, the educated man does not believe in propaganda; he shrugs and is convinced that propaganda has no effect on him.

"This, in fact, is one of his great weaknesses, and propagandists are well aware that in order to reach someone, one must first convince him that propaganda is ineffectual and not very clever. Because he is convinced of his own superiority, the intellectual is much more vulnerable than anybody else to this maneuver.

"Propaganda is like a drug. People under its influence will stop thinking critically, will only seek information that supports their beliefs, and will spread their ideology to others who will in turn reinforce their beliefs. They'll begin to believe most people share — or should share — their viewpoint, and if people don't, its' because propaganda duped them.

"Propaganda also eliminates anxieties stemming from irrational and disproportionate fears . The point is to excite them, to arouse their sense of power, their desire to assert themselves, and to arm them psychologically so that they can feel superior to the threat." (Ellul)

Ellul believed that propaganda distributed through the mass media will one day destroy democracy and freedom, no matter what the good intentions or the good will may be of those who manipulate it. Adolph Hitler and Joseph Goebbels made famous the "Big Lie" technique, which Hitler wrote in his 1925 autobiography Mein Kampf:

"[I]n the big lie there is always a certain force of credibility; because the broad masses of a nation are always more easily corrupted in the deeper strata of their emotional nature than consciously or voluntarily [note: Ellul said effective propaganda reflects current sentiments, opinions, tendencies, and stereotypes whole playing on people's needs and desires];

"And thus in the primitive simplicity of their minds they more readily fall victims to the 'big lie' than the small lie, since they themselves often tell small lies in little matters but would be ashamed to resort to large-scale falsehoods. For the grossly impudent lie always leaves traces behind it, even after it has been nailed down, a fact which is known to all expert liars in this world and all who conspire together in the art of lying."

These snippets of 'big lies' eventually become true, even if they remain lies in the minds of those they are intended for-in the final analysis, this leads people to be obedient to lies which they have internalized as truth- though still remaining lies.

It is also worth note the different spin put on by Goebbels in the following manner:

"If you tell a lie big enough and deep repeating it, people will eventually come to believe it. The lie can be maintained only for such time as the State can shield the people from the political, economic and/or military consequences of the lie. It thus becomes vitally important for the state to use all of its powers to repress dissent, for the truth is mortal enemy of the lie, and thus by extension, the lie is the greatest enemy of the truth."

The truth in this case is that we still have our minds and we will see further down the role they will play in helping us cope with our changing Media Ecology, siphon through the web of untruths and begin to use the modern technologies and techniques we can cull from that within out collective mass consuming throng to do good for man. This will enable man to avoid falling into a collective herd mentality virally induced and set up viral dungeons and numbed sensory existence.

Understanding and Seeing Knowing/New Media Technique

Knowing Your Grammar

We see and understand the media the way our technologies and their embedded techniques dictate. McLuhan makes this point even much more clearer. In his book 'The Medium Is The Message,' McLuhan considers the effects and affects of the electronic revolution on the individual, culture and global society by reflecting on the effects of previous technological advances in communication tools and media. He argues that, "Societies have always been shaped more by the nature of the media by which men communicate than by the content of the communication," that, "the media work over us over completely and are pervasive, ... that they leave no part of us untouched, unaffected, unaltered."

McLuhan sees the views of fixed relationships in pictorial space as a galaxy or constellation of events upon which it concentrates is itself a mosaic of perpetually interacting forms that have undergone kaleidoscopic transformation — particularly in our own time. [I have discussed this dislocation and consolidation of the physical and technological change.]

McLuhan has this to say about these interacting forms and the transformations they have undergone: "There might have been some advantage in substituting for the word 'galaxy' the word 'environment'. Any technology tends to create a new human environment. Script and papyrus created the social environment we think of in connection with the empires of ancient world. The stirrup and the wheel created unique environments of enormous scope.

Technological environments are not merely passive containers of people by they are active processes that reshape people ad other technologies alike. In our time the sudden shift from the mechanical technology of the wheel to the technology of electric circuitry represents one of the major shifts of all historical time and human evolution. Printing from movable types created a quite unexpected environment — it created the PUBLIC. Manuscript technology did not have the intensity or power of extension necessary to create publics on a national scale.

To reiterate a bit what has already been partly stated above about the views of McLuhan I submit that McLuhan speaks of the media (and he understands media as any sort of technological form) as being "extensions of man" which by their introduction modify the rhythm and scale of human affairs and relationships. That is, they structure and re-structure our social lives by our using them to control them and gain from such an enterprise. And finally, Mass consuming media who use human communication, become indolent to think, submissive and obedient to the way these moguls and corporations restructured their social lives, which we will explore a bit below.

This runs contrary to the more familiar notion of technologies and media as mere tools or vessels of our will. According to traditional account and understanding the role of media and technology in our lives, these represent and equally interchangeable array of tools with which we can exteriorize the content of our minds. The only thing that changes according to this account, is the reach of my ideas: speech has a limited, immediate reach, whereas writing on the on the other hand, can take those same ideas much further.

Print increases the capacity of writing by making it into a broader scale, and therefore that same idea-content can reach more people, further away, quicker. It's a linear understanding of technological development and new technologies allow us to do the same things and think the same ideas, but do so harder, better, faster and stronger. This is completely determined and dictated by technique embedded within the virally emerging and submerging gizmos and streams facilitated by the World Wide Web.

But, McLuhan thinks this is nonsense, "which is an understanding typical of someone understanding things from the vantage point of the industrial age and its mechanical processes. At the core of this misunderstanding is the fundamental divorce between form and content, going all the way back to Socratic times and Plato himself with all credit given to the content while form was secondary and misleading.

"This is, of course, and oversimplification, but the main point remained for two thousand years, picked up again over and over: appearances are misleading, and our senses can sometimes trick us [as Descartes would have it], so the form, the container within incomplete information, and at worse, outright error. Truth on the other hand, was hidden beneath, and we should look for ways to get it. In other words, we are to look beyond media for truth, which hides somewhere beyond. It is also, conversely, true that the media are effectively interchangeable as what matters lies beneath."

McLuhan's response is that by paying no attention to the importance of form, we've made ourselves blind to the effect media have in our lives. 'We wanted so hard for it not to matter, that we turned a blind eye on it.' But McLuhan's point is precisely that no matter how badly we want it, 'we cannot make ourselves immune to the effects of technology on ourselves' (at least not by wanting it badly). "Even more so, turning a blind eye on these effects is a dangerous proposition, as it is only to the background a series of intense and complex transformations of our cultures and societies upon which we get to have no say."

His reaction is then to push for a deeper look into the effects of media by saying that effectively, "it is the medium that is the message this is not to say that content is irrelevant (though that is ambiguous with McLuhan), but rather that if we want to understand how various forms of media have shaped culture, we must look at the media itself, not its contents (Eduardo Marisca)

Media become, in this way, "Extensions of man" not by allowing running faster of jumping higher, but because they enable people to do new things, things they couldn't do before. They open up possibilities for the mind. But there's a downside to it, because these extensions are, at the same time, amputations(early man) just as they open up a new doors(Technological society) for human action,they also close others, by making them inaccessibly, uninteresting or just plain obsolete.

The trade-off does not happen immediately, peacefully or even willfully. It happens over time, and through a process ripe with conflict and resistance. (McLuhan) It is this dreary picture and outlook that dissuades man from interrogating these new techniques and technologies and technological gadgets and their hold on mass consuming man.

Complex Vocabulary in Technical Disciplines

Neil Postman writes that,

"The American Technopoly has now embraced the computer in the same hurried and mindless way it embraced medical technology, which was inevitable and most unfortunate. This is not to say that the computer is blight on the symbolic landscape; only that, like medical technology, it has usurped powers and enforced mindsets that a fully attentive culture might have wished to deny it. Thus, the examination of the ideas embedded in computer technology is worth attempting.

"Others, of course, especially Joseph Weizenbaum, ran into some difficulties, as everyone else had, because of the "universality" of computers, meaning (a) that their uses are infinitely various, and (b) that computers are commonly integrated into the structure of other machines. It is, therefore, hard to isolate specific ideas promoted by computer technology. The computer, for example, is quite unlike the stethoscope,which has a limited function in a limited context.

Except for safecrackers, who, I am told, use stethoscopes to hear the tumblers of locks click into place, stethoscopes are used only by doctors. But everyone uses of is used by computers,and for purposes that seem to know no boundaries."

Postman is describing how the computer takes over that although was receiving slow acceptance, was nonetheless taking over by those who controlled Technopoly.

Computer Edges Humans

Postman continues to give us the crucial background needed for us to understand the computer and what it is today and how it is affecting and effecting us. It is those extensions of the man that we are beginning to see made more concrete, and is very essential to the functioning and understanding our technological beginnings, maybe enabling us to take control of this technological avalanche we are experiencing today. Our using the computers means that we have to make a 'trade-off of something' as noted by McLuhan above.

Postman informs us that: "The computer as we know it today had to await a variety of further discoveries and inventions, including the telegraph, the telephone, and the application of Boolean algebra to relay-based circuitry, resulting in the Claude Shannon's creation of digital circuitry[See the Models in the picture gallery]. Today, when the word "computer" is used without a modifier before it, it normally refers to some version of the machine invented by John von Neumann in the 1940s.

Before that, the word "computer" referred to a person (similarly to the early use of the word "typewriter") who performed some kind of mechanical calculation. As calculation shifted from people to machines, so did the word, especially because of the power of von Neumann's machine." Postman says that according to Bolter, whose main "practical interest in the computer was in its function as a new kind of book, argued that it was the dominant metaphor of our age; it defined our age by suggesting a new relationship to information, to work, to power, and to nature itself.

That relationship could best be described by saying that the 'computer redefines humans as Information processors' and nature itself as information to be processed. The fundamental metaphorical message of the computer, in short, is that we are machines — thinking machines to be sure, but machines nonetheless. It is for this reason that the computer is the quintessential, incomparable, near perfect machine for Technopoly.

Postman warns and teaches us that:

"It is meaning, not utterance, that makes the mind unique. As I understand it, "Meaning" also includes those things we call feelings, experiences, and sensations that do not have to be, and sometimes cannot be, put into symbols. They 'mean' nonetheless. Without concrete symbols, a computer is merely a pile of junk. Although the quest for a machine that duplicates the mind has ancient roots, and although digital intelligence does not and cannot lead to a meaning-making, understanding, and feeling creature, which is what a human being is."

For us to understand the Media Ecology we now exist within and depend on, we need to trace it from how it came to being and what are its effects and affects on us human being in their myriad and various manifestations. Neil Postman reveals to us how our language absorbs

"Machine as humans" metaphor instead morphs with in the machine and when we are one with the machine become the machine, or of the machine, or, as McLuhan will say, become extended in a nervous-system-like selves with a numbness which might end up making us slaves to and of the computers."

Postman elucidates this point as follows: "All of this may seem obvious enough, but the metaphor of the machine as human [or the human machine] is sufficiently powerful to have made serious inroads in every language. People now commonly speak of "programming" or "deprogramming" themselves. They speak of their brains as a piece of "hard wiring," capable of 'retrieving data,' and it has become common to think about thinking as a mere matter of processing and decoding.

We loose our pre-computer way of speaking and imbibe and regurgitate the new ways of talking-making us disappear and appear and machine-like humans who obey everything acquired from our new language and extended and becoming the incoming technologies and their , machine-embedded techniques... meaning, ourselves becoming mechanized, techicized and computerized-like. We use the grammar acquired from these new machines to conduct and create lives from ourselves…

McLuhan explains understanding specific media in terms of being able to grasp its grammar: "Cardinal Newman said of Napoleon, He understood the grammar of gunpowder." Napoleon had paid some attention to other media as well, especially the semaphore telegraph that gave him a great advantage over his enemies. He is on record for saying that, "Three hostile newspapers are more to be feared than a thousand bayonets."

Alexis de Tocqueville was the first to master the grammar of print and typography. He was thus able to read off the message of coming change in France and America as if he were reading aloud from a text that had been handed to him. In fact, the nineteenth century in France and America was just such an open book to de Tocqueville because he had learned the grammar of print. So he, also, knew when that grammar did not apply." We seem to know what grammar to use, but have still have to fully understand and appreciate its meanings, affects and effects.

Making Sense of It All

How Meaning is Transmitted and Becomes Virtual and Meme-fied

In his sub topic on "Media Versus Human Communication," Walter Ong pinpoints as to Who says what to Whom in What Channel with What Effect in this way:

"Human communication, verbal and other, differs from the 'medium' model, in that the message is moved from sender -position to 'receiver' position. In real human communication, the sender has to be not only in the sender position but also in the receiver position before he or she can send anything. To speak, you have to address another or others. People in their right minds do not stray through the woods just talking at random to nobody.

"Even to talk to ourself you have to pretend that you are two people. The reason is that what I say depends on what reality or fancy I feel I am talking into, that is, on what possible responses I might anticipate. Hence I avoid sending quite the same message to an adult and to a small child. To speak, I have to be somehow be ready already to speak, I have be somehow already in communication with the mind I am to address before I start speaking.

"I can be in touch perhaps through past relationships, by an exchange of glances, by an understanding with a third person who has brought me and my interlocutor together, or the countless other ways. (words are modifications of a more-than-verbal situation). I have to sense something in the other's mind to which my own utterance can relate. Human communication is never one way. Always, it not only calls for response but is shaped in its very form and content by anticipated response."

Words also carry 'meaning' and they facilitate for a binary interlocution between speakers and society as a whole.

Ong further informs us that:

"This is not to say that I am sure how the other will respond to what I say. But I have to conjecture a possible range of responses at least in some vague way.. I have to be somehow inside the mind of the other in advance in other to enter with my message, and he or she must be inside my mind. To formulate anything I must have the another person or other persons already 'in mind'. This is the paradox of human communication.

"Communication is intersubjective. The media model used is not. There is no adequate model in the physical universe for this operation of consciousness, which is distinctively human and which signals the capacity of human beings to form true communities wherein person share with person interiorly, inter-subjectivity. Willingness to live with the 'media' model' of communication shows chirographic conditioning.

"First, chirographic cultures regard speech as more specifically informational than do oral cultures, where speech is more performance-orientated, more a way of doing something to someone.

"Second, the written text appears prima facie to be a one- way informational street, for no real recipient (reader, hearer), or a bianry sort of communications is present when the texts come into being. But in speaking as in writing, some recipient must be present, or there can be no text produced: somewhat isolated from real persons, the writer conjures up a fictional person or persons.

"[Therefore], modern studies in the shift from orality to literacy and the sequels of literacy, print and electronic processing of verbalization, make more and more apparent some of the ways in which this evolution has depended on writing.

The interaction between the orality that all human beings are born into and the technology of writing, which no one is born into, touches the depths of the psyche. Writing introduces division and alienation, but a higher unity as well. It intensifies the sense of self and fosters ore conscious interaction between persons. Writing is consciousness-raising. Orality-literacy dynamics enter integrally into the modern evolution of consciousness toward both greater 'interiorization and greater openness.'

As to who is saying what to whom, in what channel to what effect, can be recognized that it has be a binary communication, that in the end, ideally, both people, in talking to one another, are the ones who exchange information for various purposes and to meet a certain end and meaning.

For everything to make sense, it is important to note that communication is in us or is 'us' because, what we have imbibed over the years as mass consumers of knowledge, information or other products, is what manifests as communication following the media model and human communication, although we need not forget how this particular way of communication originated from, as explained above by Walter Ong above;

... i.e., where our consciousness has been inflated for us to consciously be able to apply and mediate or meditate on these new emergent ways of communication, that, in the final analysis, it is how we have been communicating, made easier by the new technological gadgets, with their embedded techniques-mimicking our communication mannerisms and patterns and adding new other ways humans communicate using verbalized communication and in the process extending our means and ways of communicating: Facebook, Twitters, ad infinitum.

We stand a better chance of mastering these new ways of communication if we know, clearly, Who we are talking to , and in Which channel or gadget, and to What effect, if any, this has on us. A whole hub will be written in the future as to What are the Effects and Affects of Communication and the emerging, submerging, merging technologies and techniques to today's media savvy, and prolific mass communication consumers, who are virally suave, and are faced with an avalanche of new ones each day, which helps upgrade the old technology, communication, information sharing and streaming that is now the real and fast growing means of communication media data and information: the Virtual World and Reality, ad-nauseum.

So long as we do not lose our knowledge of the past as it relates to human communication, and human interaction with the new technologies, that we are still the ones who need the other in order to communicate; the point being that we will get to know what the modes of communication we are acquiring and are affecting us as a result of the new emerging interactive/interconnected and virtual surfing are doing and what we are doing with them and to them, and finally what it all means to us.

As long we now Who says What to Whom and in What channel and to What effect in terms of today's new-interactive-merging-merging-interconnected and viral communication forums and formats, we should always remember that it is a mere mirror of human communication extended(as in our nervous system-like-tendrils and fiber-optic synapsis) — we will always be in a position to understand and in some remote sense, control our newly still merging-emerging technologies, gizmos and techniques, might in the end be under our own tight scrutiny and purview... The memes of the future are the ones which will enable us to draw and make sense of human communication in the age of fiber-optic-virtual world and reality and throughout our Communications Media Ecological Landscape.

Ten Methods of Modern Mind Control

Nicholas West gives us the following account:

The more one researches "mind control", the more one will come to the conclusion that there is a coordinated script that has been in place for a very long time with the goal to turn the human race into non-thinking automatons. for as long as man has pursued power over the masses, mind control has been orchestrated by those who study human behavior in order to bend large populations to the will of a small 'elite' group.

Today, we have entered a phase where mind control has taken on a physical, scientific dimension that threatens to become a permanent state if we do not become aware of the tools at the disposal of the technocratic dictatorship unfolding on a worldwide scale. Modern mind control is both technological and physiological. Tests show that simply by exposing the methods of mind control, the effects can be reduced or eliminated, at least for mind control advertising and propaganda. More difficult to counter are the physical intrusions, which the military-industrial complex continues to develop and improve upon.

  1. Education - This is the most obvious, yet still remains the most insidious. It has always been a would-be dictator's ultimate fantasy to "educate" naturally impressionable children, thus it has been a central component to Communist and Fascist tyrannies throughout history. No one has been more instrumental in exposing the agenda of modern education than Charlotte Iserbyt - one can begin research into tis area by downloading a free PDF of her book, "The Deliberate Dumbing down Of America," which lays bare the role of Globalist foundations in shaping the future to produce servile drones lorded over by a fully educated, aware elite class.
  2. Advertising and Propaganda - Edward Bernays has been cited as the inventor of the consumerist culture(Public Relations), that was designed primarily to target people's self-image (or lack thereof) in order to turn a want into a need. This was initially envisioned for products such as cigarettes, for example. However, Bernays also noted in hi s 1928 book, Propaganda, that, "Propaganda is the executive arm of the invisible government." This can be seen most clearly in the modern police state and the growing citizen snitch culture, wrapped up in pseudo-patriotic War on terror. The increasing consolidation of media has enabled the entire corporate structure to merge with government, which now utilizes the concept of propaganda placement. Media, print, movies, television, and cable news can now work seamlessly to integrate an overall message which seems to have the ring of truth because it comes from so many sources, simultaneously. When one becomes attuned to identifying the main "message," one will see tis imprinting everywhere. And this is not even to mention subliminal messaging.
  3. Predictive Programming - Many still deny that predictive programming is real. I would invite anyone to examine the range of documentation put together by Alan Watt and come to any other conclusion. Predictive programming has its origins in predominately elitist Hollywood, where the big screen can offer a big vision of where society is headed. Just look back at the books and movies which you thought were far-fetched, or 'science fiction': and take a close look around at society today. For a detailed breakdown of specific examples, Vigilant Citizen is a great resource that will probably make you look at "entertainment" in a completely different light.
  4. Sports, Politics, Religion - Some might take offense at seeing religion, or even politics, put alongside sports as a method of mind control. The central theme is the same throughout: divide and conquer. The techniques are quite simple: short circuit the natural tendency of people to co-operate for their survival, and teach them to form teams bent on domination and winning. Sports has always had a role as a key distraction that corrals tribal tendencies (a la Postman), into a non-important event, which in Modern America has reached ridiculous proportions where protests will break over a sport celebrity leaving their city, but essential human issues such as liberty are giggled away as inconsequential. Political discourse is strictly in a left-right paradigm of easily controlled opposition, while religion is the backdrop of nearly every war throughout history.
  5. Food, Water, and Air - Additives, toxins, and other food poisons literally alter our brains chemistry to create docility and apathy. Fluoride in drinking water has been proven to lower IQ; Aspartame and MSG are excitotoxins which excite the brain cells until they die; and easy access to the fast food that contains these poisons generally has created a population that lacks focus and motivation for any type of active life-style. Most of the modern world is perfectly groomed for passive receptiveness — and acceptance — of the dictatorial elite. And if you choose diligently watch your diet, they are fully prepared to spray the population from the above. [This I must admit makes no sense…]
  6. Drugs - This can be any addictive substance, but the mission of mind controllers is to be sure you are addicted to something. One major arm of the modern mind control agenda is psychiatry, which aims to define all people by their disorders, as opposed to their human potential. This was foreshadowed in books such as "Brave New World." Today, it has been taken to even further extremes as a medical tyranny that has taken hold where nearly everyone has some sort of disorder — particularly those who question authority. The use of nerve drugs in the military has led to record numbers of suicides. Worst of all, the modern drug state now has over 25% of US children on mind-numbing medication.
  7. Military testing - The military has a long history as the testing ground for mind control. The military mind is perhaps the most malleable, as those who pursue life in the military generally resonate to the structures of hierarchy, control, and the need for unchallenged obedience to a mission. For the increasing number of military personal questioning their indoctrination, a recent story highlighted DARPA's plans for transcranial mind control helmets that will keep them focused.
  8. Electromagnetic Spectrum - An electromagnetic spectrum soup envelopes us all, charged by modern devices of convenience which have been shown to have a direct impact on brain function. In a tacit admission of what is possible, one researcher has been working with a "god helmet" to induce visions by altering the electromagnetic field of the brain. Our modern soup has us passively bathed by potentially mind-altering waves, while a wide range of possibilities such as cell phone towers[and electric wires that dangle from the poles in major cities), now available to the would-be mind controller for more direct intervention.
  9. Television, Computer, and "flicker rate" - It's bad enough that what is "programmed" on your TV (accessed via remote "control') is engineered; it is all made easier by literally lulling you to sleep, making it a psycho-social weapon. flicker rate tests show that alpha brain waves are altered, producing a type of hypnosis — which doesn't portend well for the latest revelation that lights can transmit coded internet data by "flickering faster than the eye can see." TheComputer's flicker rate is less, but through video games , social networks, and a basic structure which overloads the brain with information, the rapid pace of modern communication induces an ADHD state. A study of video games revealed that extended play can result in lower blood flow to the brain, sapping emotional control. Furthermore, role playing-games of life-like war and police state scenarios serve to desensitize a connection to reality. One look at WikiLeaks video Collateral Murder should be familiar to anyone who has seen a game like Call of Duty.
  10. Nanobots - From science fiction horror, directly to the modern brain; the nanobots are on the way. Direct brain modification already has been packaged as "neuroengineering." A Wired article from early 2009 highlighted that direct brain manipulation via fiber optics is a bit messy, but once install it could make someone happy with the press of a button." Nanobots tale the process to an automated level, rewiring the brain, molecule by molecule. Worse, these mini droids can self-replicate, forcing one to wonder to wonder how this genie would ever get back to the in the bottle once unleashed. Expected date of arrival? Early 2020s.

Nicholas West concludes by writing: "A concerted effort is underway to manage and predict human behavior so that the social scientists and the dictatorial elites can control the masses and protect themselves rom the fallout of a fully awake free humanity. Only by waking up to their attempts to us to sleep do we stand a chance of preserving our free will."

Technological Control Through Technique

On what has been discussed above, Winner informs us thus:

"The common element in notions of this kind is not so much a feeling of ambivalence about modern technics(techniques) or even loss of faith in the link between technological development and human progress. It is, rather, a sense that many of our most fundamental expectations about the technical sphere no longer hold. Common sense and the traditional view of technics do no always provide a reliable guide to our everyday experience with technological phenomenon. In this sense, reports of autonomous technology can be interpreted as sings of a disorder of the mind at the collapse of an ordinary point of view.

"The conclusion that something is 'out of control' is interesting to us only insofar as we expect that it out to be in control in the first place… No all cultures, for example, share our insistence that the ability to control things is necessary prerequisite of human survival. There are peoples who have lived and prospered under the belief that an inherent harmony of beneficence in nature would provide for their needs.

"Western culture, however, has long believed that its continued existence and advancement depend upon the ability to manipulate the circumstances of the material world. In a spirit that may have called Faustian, we believe that control is possible and the we must strive for it. As a both necessary and noble aspect of western self-identity, we strive to isolate the variable conditions of the environment and manipulate the for our own advantage.

"The concern of science and technology with the possibilities of control have often found expression in terms which parallel the language of politics. This is perhaps not surprising if one recalls that both politics and technics have as their central focus the sources and exercise of power. Our thinking about technology, however, seems inextricably bound to a single conception of the manner in which power is used-the style of absolute mastery, the despotic, one-way control of the master over the slave.

Other notions central to the historical discussion of political power-membership, participation, and authority founded on consent-seem to have no relevance in this sphere. In our traditional ways of thinking, the concept of mastery and the master-slave metaphor are predominant ways of describing man's relationship to nature, as well as to the implement of technology.

Mass Media Is The Only Reality We Have And The Only Reality We can Conceive

The Chicago School of Media Theory doled out this piece which I will selectively cull from it in order to make the point that the new and emerging media today, how we are immersed in them and imbibe the ceaselessly and we never turn the present gadgets and they media they relay to us off. Because millions of people around the world are on the Web, I took it that giving a background as to what is mass media before the advent of the Internet, would be in order here.

This would help out in the future for one to add up on the Hub Mass media in the Age of the Internet. So, below I will cite from an article from the Chicago School Of Media Theory and their explaining what Mass media was(which I say was before the Internet), and later on will give up the research as to what mass media is like and is in the age of the Internet

"Mass media is loosely defined as 'represent[ing]' the most economical way of getting the story over the new and wider market in the least time.”1 The etymology of the concept is crucial in understanding 'mass media' as it is composed of two, highly nuanced words. Media generally defined, is, “The main means of mass communication, esp. newspapers, radio and television regarded collectively; the reporters, journalists, etc., working for organizations engaged in such communication.”

Mass can be defined as, “A large number of human beings, collected closely together or viewed as forming an aggregate in which their individuality is lost.” Important to note is the social bonus on “the masses,” as a congregation, they are more than neutral “populace, the ordinary people, esp. as viewed in an economic or political context.”

Yet Nickolas Luhmann elaborates on the concept, mass media are “those institutions which make use of copying technologies to disseminate communication.” Luhmann captures the “efficient” or “economical” aspect of mass media. Media are anything, “Provided that they generate large quantities of products whose target groups are yet undetermined.”

Mass media itself, and the information it conveys, even in a multimedia setting, must be widely accessible. Peters identifies three key dimensions that transition a medium to a form of mass media, “Address, availability and access.” Furthermore, “Mass media do not traffic only in mass address: they may destine messages to all, some, few or no one in particular.”

"The concept of mass media itself was not codified in writing until the early 20 century, the significance of the timing provides support for arguments that mass media helps to define the modern period in the West. As technology progressed, displacing, complementing and augmenting new forms, McLuhan and others cite the expansive quality of media advancements, such as movable type, into other forms of larger-scale communication such as newspaper, the radio which rose to fame in the 1920s, disseminating information through transmissions, and the Television which was commercially available in 1930 and became ubiquitous by the 1950s spreading information by broadcast.

"Mass media is seen by and as a direct output of a capitalist democracy, and an essential component in the maintaining of a centralized government. An era of “democratization” of a media itself is taking place on the new frontier of mass communication: the Internet. Anyone who has access to the technology and the skills to operate a computer can provide content. There is an increasing “mass” use of the internet for information dissemination. It is an avenue not considered by many of the main media theorists simply because the internet was not yet a reality in their time.

"Grassroots campaigns, blogs and YouTube appear to creating not only a national, but an international forum. An icon and great-thinker in the realm of Pop Culture, Andy Warhol has said, “In the future, everyone will be famous for 15 minutes,” and there is great validity to this concept when applied to the Internet today. Even amateurs with an opinion can provide content, and many do: 44% of US Internet users have contributed information to the Internet.

"Whether McLuhan predicted the coming of the Internet as part of some 'global village,' or if technological advance is simply a vast manipulation, driven by the commercial as Adorno would attest, this much is clear: the Internet is changing everything—from methods of mass media, to Media theory, to our culture, and to the self. Foucault writes that history is a “wave like succession of worlds.” This technological wave of the internet is opening up a brave new one and the character of mass media is changing daily."

With this background on top, it will be wise to begin to do much more research on the "Brave New World" and its new character of mass media much more closely. Mind control in the present future we are living in, has become even more pervasive and a slippery sloe. We need to come to grip with it very soon.

Internet Friend: Who Is Saying What To Who(m)?

Social Media Pretend Friends on the Social Media
Social Media Pretend Friends on the Social Media

Social Media, Pretend Friends, and the Lie of False Intimacy

One of the problems that social media present is that it makes obsolete the notion as to Who says What to who(m) and in what context. I present here the paradox and conundrum of how one gets to know if one's friends on the social media are real or fake. This is important because we are not here talking about one-to-one interpersonal relationship and contact, but connecting virally through the Internet using social media. Jay Baer, in his article below gives us some new ideas in think about who are we talking to, and saying what, and in what context to what end.

'Social Media, Pretend Friends, and the Lie of False Intimacy'

It’s not an illusion. We really are doing more with each 24 hours, as technology enables (or forces) us to interact and intersect and do and consume with unprecedented volume and vigor. We live our lives at breakneck speed because we can, because we feel we have to keep up, and because every macro and micro breeze blows in that direction.

I remember the days before social media when I would get 20 phone calls per day and 50 or 60 emails, and felt exhausted by the pace of communication. Now we’ve traded the telephone for other connection points (I only get 2-3 calls per day), but the overall number of people ringing our doorbell through some mechanism has ballooned like Charles Barkley.

The number of “inboxes” we possess is staggering: Email (3 accounts for me), public Twitter, Twitter DM, public Facebook, Facebook messages, Facebook chat, Linkedin messages, public Google +, Google + messages, blog comments, Skype, text messages, Instagram, phone, voice mail, and several topically or geographically specific forums, groups and social networks. That’s a lot of relationship bait in the water.

The Lie of Opportunity

How do we justify this? How do we convince ourselves that slicing our attention so thin the turkey becomes translucent is a good idea?

We do it because we believe that more relationships provides more opportunity.

All of these chestnuts are passed around like a flu strain because they make intuitive sense. But common among them is the underlying premise that interacting with more people is inherently better than interacting with fewer people. I have always believed this to be true, and in fact have delivered the lines above in presentations and on this blog. But today, I’m no longer convinced.

Instead I wonder, what if we have it ALL wrong?

You Don’t Know Jack

In addition to despair and shock and surprise, what I felt most about the death of TreyPennington was confusion. I found myself saying over and over “Geez, you think you know someone…” I had a similar reaction when another colleague committed suicide a couple years ago and very few people saw it coming.

The reality is, we don’t KNOW hardly anyone.

I interacted with Trey quite a bit online, and twice spent time with him in three dimensions. Trey was one of the kindest, most interesting, generous people I’ve ever met. He was truly one of the good guys in social media, and his background in theology and storytelling gave him a refreshingly different outlook on all of this. He will be missed, and if the outpouring from the social media community is any barometer, his impact on others was perhaps far greater than he knew.

I considered Trey Pennington a friend. I suspect many of his 100,000+ Twitter followers considered him a friend. Clearly, most of us were not his friends, as his death came as a complete surprise despite the fact that he had a prior suicide attempt earlier this summer, and had been discussing his problems with confidants.

But if you’d asked me yesterday morning, I would have said Trey was a friend. Social media forces upon us a feeling of intimacy and closeness that doesn’t actually exist.

I met Amber Naslund on Twitter and we wrote a book together. But, I’ve never met her daughter.

Jason falls is one of my closest colleagues in social media, but he’s never been to my home.

Mark Steizner and I have collaborated on many projects, but we’ve never had a private meal.

I consider these people (and many, many others) to be friends, and I’m thankful that social media has brought them into my life. But in comparison to my pre-social media friends (many of whom I’ve known for 30+ years), I know almost nothing about them.

Is that what we want — spending considerable time building large networks of shallow connections, potentially at the expense of deepening a few cherished friendships upon which we can truly rely?

I recognize this is not purely an either/or scenario, and relationships that began with a Twitter exchange or series of blog comments can flourish into treasured real-world ties. Mark W. Schaefer was a real friend to Trey, and had tried to help him through this difficult period. Mark and Trey met on Twitter, and Mark describes the impact of this connection in his excellent book The Tao of Twitter. (Mark also has a tremendous post about Trey's death, and Olivier Blanchard’stribute to Trey is moving and important.)

But those situations where we “meet” someone through social media, have the opportunity to interact in real life, and then develop a relationship that creates true friendship are few and far between. And as social media gets bigger and more pervasive, this chasm becomes even more difficult to cross. As my own networks in social media have gotten larger, I’ve ended up talking about my personal life less, because a large percentage of that group don’t know me, or my wife, or my kids, or my town, or my interests. I don’t want to bore people with the inanities of the everyday. (Facebook is the one exception, as I’ve always kept my personal account relatively small.)

To some degree, I think this explains the popularity of Google + among people with very large followings on Twitter and/or Facebook. Google + provides a chance for a do-over, to create a new group of connections that are more carefully cultivated.

But that’s just medicating the symptoms, not curing the disease. Fundamentally, technology and our use of it isn’t — as we’ve all hoped — bringing us closer together. In fact, it may be driving us farther apart, as we know more and more people, but know less and less about each of them.

How to Know if Your Social Media Friends are Fake

A Snippet Look Into the NSA Tentacle

A computer workstation showing the National Security Agency (NSA) logo inside the Threat Operations Center in the Washington suburb of   Fort Meade, Maryland
A computer workstation showing the National Security Agency (NSA) logo inside the Threat Operations Center in the Washington suburb of Fort Meade, Maryland | Source

Glenn Greenwald: The NSA Can "Literally Watch Every Keystroke You Make."

The German publication Der Spiegel has revealed new details about a secretive hacking unit inside the National Security Agency called the Office of Tailored Access Operations, or TAO. The unit was created in 1997 to hack into global communications traffic. Hackers inside the TAO have developed a way to break into computers running Microsoft Windows by gaining passive access to machines when users report program crashes to Microsoft.

In addition, with help from the CIA and FBI, the NSAhas the ability to intercept computers and other electronic accessories purchased online in order to secretly insert spyware and components that can provide backdoor access for the intelligence agencies. American Civil Liberties Union Deputy Legal Director Jameel Jaffer and journalist Glenn Greenwald join us to discuss the latest revelations, along with the future of Edward Snowden.

Transcript

This is a rush transcript. Copy may not be in its final form.

AMY GOODMAN: This is Democracy Now! democracynow.org, The War and Peace Report. I’m Amy Goodman, as we continue our conversation about the National Security Agency. On Sunday, the German publication Der Spiegel revealed new details about secretive hacking—a secretive hacking unit inside the NSA called the Office of Tailored Access Operations, or TAO. The unit was created in 1997 to hack into global communications traffic. Still with us, Jameel Jaffer, deputy legal director of the ACLU, director of the ACLU’s Center for Democracy, and Glenn Greenwald, the journalist who first broke the story about Edward Snowden. Glenn, can you just talk about the revelations in Der Spiegel?

GLENN GREENWALD: Sure. I think everybody knows by now, or at least I hope they do after the last seven months reporting, that the goal of the NSA really is the elimination of privacy worldwide—not hyperbole, not metaphor, that’s literally their goal, is to make sure that all human communications that take place electronically are collected and then stored by the NSA and susceptible to being monitored and analyzed. But the specifics are still really important to illustrate just the scope and invasiveness and the dangers presented by this secret surveillance system.

And what the Der Spiegel article details is that one of the things that the NSA is really adept at doing is implanting in various machines—computers, laptops, even cellphones and the like—malware. And malware is essentially a program that allows theNSA, in the terminology that hackers use, to own the machine. So, no matter how much encryption you use, no matter how much you safeguard your communication with passwords and other things, this malware allows the NSA to literally watch every keystroke that you make, to get screen captures of what it is that you’re doing, to circumvent all forms of encryption and other barriers to your communications.

And one of the ways that they’re doing it is that they intercept products in transit, such as if you order a laptop or other forms of Internet routers or servers and the like, they intercept it in transit, open the box, implant the malware, factory-seal it and then send it back to the user. They also exploit weaknesses in Google and YouTube and Yahoo and other services, as well, in order to implant these devices. It’s unclear to what extent, if at all, the companies even know about it, let alone cooperate in it. But what is clear is that they’ve been able to compromise the physical machines themselves, so that it makes no difference what precautions you take in terms of safeguarding the sanctity of your online activity.

AMY GOODMAN: So, I mean, just to be really specific, you order a computer, and it’s coming UPS, or it’s coming FedEx, and they have it redirected to their own—you know, to the NSA, and they put in the malware, the spyware, and then send it on to you?

GLENN GREENWALD: Correct. That’s what the Der Spiegel report indicates, based on the documents that they’ve published. But we’ve actually been working, ourselves, on certain stories that should be published soon regarding similar interdiction efforts. And one of the things that I think is so amazing about this, Amy, is that the US government has spent the last three or four years shrilly, vehemently warning the world that Chinese technology companies are unsafe to purchase products from, because they claim the Chinese government interdicts these products and installs surveillance, backdoors and other forms of malware onto the machinery so that when you get them, immediately your privacy is compromised.

And they’ve actually driven Chinese firms out of the US market and elsewhere with these kinds of accusations. Congress has convened committees to issue reports making these kind of accusations about Chinese companies. And yet, at the same time, theNSA is doing exactly that which they accuse these Chinese companies of doing. And there’s a real question, which is: Are these warnings designed to steer people away from purchasing Chinese products into the arms of the American industry so that the NSA’s ability to implant these devices becomes even greater, since now everybody is buying American products out of fear that they can no longer buy Chinese products because this will happen to them?

AMY GOODMAN: The story is reported by Jacob Appelbaum, Laura Poitras and a group of Der Spiegel reporters. Is this based, Glenn, on Edward Snowden’s revelations, the documents that he got out and shared with you and Laura Poitras?

GLENN GREENWALD: Der Spiegel doesn’t actually indicate the origin of the documents, so I’m going to go ahead and let them speak to that themselves. What I can tell you is that there are documents in the archive that was provided to us by Edward Snowden that detail similar programs. Whether these specific documents that Der Spiegel published come from them or from a different source is something I’m going to go ahead and let them address.

AMY GOODMAN: Talk about the beginning of this piece. "In January 2010, numerous homeowners in San Antonio, Texas, stood baffled in front of their closed garage doors." Take it from there, Glenn. Glenn, are you still with us? We may have just lost Glenn. I’ll just read a little more, until we reconnect with Glenn.

“In January 2010, numerous homeowners in San Antonio, Texas, stood baffled in front of their closed garage doors. They wanted to drive to work or head off to do their grocery shopping, but their garage door openers had gone dead, leaving them stranded. No matter how many times they pressed the buttons, the doors didn’t budge. The problem primarily affected residents in the western part of the city, around Military Drive and the interstate highway known as Loop 410.

“In the United States, a country of cars and commuters, the mysterious garage door problem quickly became an issue for local politicians. Ultimately, the municipal government solved the riddle. Fault for the error lay with the United States’ foreign intelligence service, the National Security Agency, which has offices in San Antonio. Officials at the agency were forced to admit that one of the NSA’s radio antennas was broadcasting at the same frequency as the garage door openers. Embarrassed officials at the intelligence agency promised to resolve the issue as quickly as possible, and soon the doors began opening again.

"It was thanks to the garage door opener episode that Texans learned just how far the NSA’s work had encroached upon their daily lives. For quite some time now, the intelligence agency has maintained a branch with around 2,000 employees at Lackland Air Force Base, also in San Antonio."

Jameel Jaffer, the significance of this, and the legality of what is happening here?

JAMEEL JAFFER: You know, I think that what bothers me most about these programs is the bulk aspect of it or the dragnet aspect of it. When the NSA has good reason to believe probable cause that a specific person is engaged in terrorism or something like that, it doesn’t bother me that much that the NSA is surveilling that person. I think that’s the NSA’s job. The problem with a lot of these programs is that they are not directed at people thought to be doing something wrong. They’re not directed at suspected terrorists or even suspected criminals. These programs are directed at everybody. Or, to say that a different way, they’re not directed at all. They’re indiscriminate.

And if you think about what the Fourth Amendment was meant to do, what the Constitution was meant to do, it was meant to ensure that the government couldn’t engage in surveillance without some reason. And all of this, all of this surveillance that the NSA is engaged in, essentially flips that on its head. It collects information about everybody in the hope that the surveillance will lead to suspicion about somebody. It’s supposed to be doing it the other way around, starting with the suspicion and then going to the search. It’s starting with the search and going to suspicion. And I think that that’s really, really dangerous, and it’s exactly what the Fourth Amendment was meant to prohibit.

AMY GOODMAN: You know, when it came to the judge’s decision recently, you have the judge that says that this is constitutional, but it followed the judge saying this is Orwellian and likely unconstitutional. Why the difference of opinion between these two judges?

JAMEEL JAFFER: Well, I think one judge got it right, and the other one got it wrong. I mean, I think that, you know, Judge Pauley—Judge Pauley was not very skeptical towards the government’s claims. The government made claims about the effectiveness of the program, about the necessity of the program, claims that were contradicted by information already in the public record, information put into the public record by government officials. And Judge Pauley nonetheless deferred to the government’s claims in court, which is a disappointment to us.

AMY GOODMAN: Let’s get back to Glenn Greenwald. Glenn, I just read the first couple of paragraphs of the piece in Der Spiegel about the garage doors that wouldn’t open because the garage door openers were actually operating on the same frequency of the NSA, which was really vastly expanding in San Antonio at the time. But could you take it from there? The significance of this and this Tailored Access Operations, this particular unit, and how significant it is?

GLENN GREENWALD: Yeah, one thing I think that it underscores, this was in a community that had no idea that there was this gargantuan NSA hacking unit that had sprawled up in its community, and it shows just the power of how much they’re doing, that they just simply shut down the electric devices of an entire community that didn’t know that they were even there.

But the TAO, the Tailored Access Operations unit, is really remarkable because the government, the US government, has been warning for many years now about the dangers of hackers, both stateless hackers as well as state-sponsored hackers from China and from Iran and from elsewhere. And the reality is that nobody is as advanced or as prolific when it comes into hacking into computer networks, into computer systems, than the NSA. And TAO is basically a unit that is designed to cultivate the most advanced hacking operations and skills of any unit, any entity on the Earth. And so, yet again, what we find is that exactly the dangers about which the US government is shrilly warning when it comes to other people, they’re actually doing themselves to a much greater and more menacing degree than anybody else is. And that’s the significance of this particular unit inside of the NSA, is they do all of the most malicious hacking techniques that hackers who have been prosecuted by this very same government do and much, much more.

AMY GOODMAN: Talk about White Tamale, Glenn Greenwald.

GLENN GREENWALD: Well, I mean, I think that—you know, a lot of the—one of the good things about this particular story is that it was—the lead writer on it was Jake Appelbaum, who is, you know, one of the world’s leading experts when it comes to computer program. He’s the developer of the Tor Project, one of the developers of the Tor Project, which is designed to safeguard anonymity on online browsing, to make it impossible for hostile states to be able to trace where people are. And one of the things he did was take some very technical documents and translated it into a way that the public should be able to understand it.

And so, several of these programs, including White Tamale, are about insertions of malware into various forms of electronics. And he actually gave a speech this morning explaining some of this. And what he essentially said is that, with these programs, the government is able to literally control human beings through control of their machines. We hear all of this—these stories about the NSA being very targeted in the kinds of communications that they want to collect and store, and the types of people whom they’re targeting that are very specific and discriminating, and yet what several of these programs are, that are revealed by Der Spiegel, are highly sophisticated means for collecting everything that a user does, and it implicates the people with whom they’re communicating and a whole variety of other types of online activity in which they’re engaging.

AMY GOODMAN: I want to turn to computer security researcher Jacob Appelbaum, who you were just talking about, who co-wrote the piece for Der Spiegel, who was speaking, as you just said, in Hamburg, Germany, at this conference, the Chaos Communication Congress.

JACOB APPELBAUM: Basically, their goal is to have total surveillance of everything that they are interested in. So there really is no boundary to what they want to do. There is only sometimes a boundary of what they are funded to be able to do and to the amount of things they’re able to do at scale. They seem to just do those things without thinking too much about it. And there are specific tactical things where they have to target a group or an individual, and those things seem limited either by budget or simply by their time.

And as we have released today on Der Spiegel's website, which it should be live—I just checked; it should be live for everyone here—we actually show a whole bunch of details about their budgets, as well as the individuals involved with the NSA and the Tailored Access Operations group, in terms of numbers. So it should give you a rough idea, showing that there was a small period of time in which the Internet was really free and we did not have people from the US military that were watching over it and exploiting everyone on it, and now we see, every year, that the number of people who are hired to break into people's computers as part of grand operations, those people are growing day by day.

AMY GOODMAN: Also speaking in Hamburg, Germany, at the Chaos Communication Congress this weekend was WikiLeaks’ Sarah Harrison, who accompanied Edward Snowden to Russia and spent four months with him. She spoke after receiving a long standing ovation.

SARAH HARRISON: My name is Sarah Harrison, as you all appear to know. I’m a journalist working for WikiLeaks. This year I was part, as Jacob just said, of the WikiLeaks team that saved Snowden from a life in prison. This act in my job has meant that our legal advice is that I do not return to my home, the United Kingdom, due to the ongoing terrorism investigation there in relation to the movement of Edward Snowden documents. The UK government has chosen to define disclosing classified documents with an intent to influence government behavior as terrorism.

AMY GOODMAN: That was Sarah Harrison. Glenn Greenwald, talk more about her significance. She isn’t talked about as much, but she said at this conference that after leaving Russia, she’s now in Germany and cannot go back to England, where she lives, for fear of being arrested.

GLENN GREENWALD: Yeah, there’s a lot of people who debate WikiLeaks and the like, but there is no question that WikiLeaks deserves a huge amount of credit for the work they did in saving Edward Snowden from what probably would have been, certainly, ultimate detention by the authorities in Hong Kong, and then extradition or handing over to the United States, which would have put him in prison and silenced him, as Daniel Ellsberg said, pending a trial, and then almost certainly convicted him, given the oppressive laws that prevent whistleblowers who are charged with Espionage Act violations from raising the defense that what they did was justified and they were actually blowing the whistle and not engaged in espionage.

And the person at WikiLeaks who sacrificed the most and who was the most heroic was Sarah Harrison, who flew to Hong Kong, who met Snowden, who traveled with him to Moscow, who stayed with him for several months while first he was in the airport and then he was—he was getting acclimated to his life in Moscow. And not only did she give up those months of her life and put herself at risk, but she’s now in danger of not being able, as she just said in that clip, to return to her own home.

And the terrorism investigation that she was referencing is the one that has arisen and that the UK government is conducting in the context of its detention of my partner, David Miranda, at Heathrow Airport. And we’ve challenged that detention in court. And in response, the UK government has said, number one, they are conducting an investigation, a criminal investigation, under terrorism laws against him, against Laura Poitras and myself, and against anybody at The Guardian involved in the reporting of these stories.

And that means that everybody implicated in the reporting of the story, which has caused a global debate around the world and worldwide reform, is now a suspect in a terrorism investigation. That is how radical and extreme the UK government, working in partnership with the US government, has become. And every lawyer that Laura and I have talked to has said, "You should not, in any way, put yourself at risk of getting apprehended by the UK government."

And obviously, as a British citizen, she is well advised not to return to the UK, for the crime of working in a journalistic capacity to bring these stories to the world. And of all the criminals that we—of all the criminality that we’ve exposed in this case, I think the most egregious is the attempt by the US and the UK government to convert journalism not only into crime and not only into espionage, but into actual terrorism. It’s a real menace to a free press in an ongoing way.

AMY GOODMAN: Glenn, you addressed this congress, the Chaos Congress in Hamburg, but you didn’t go. You did it by Skype or by some form of video communication. Do you feel you can travel to Europe? Do you feel you can travel to the United States?

GLENN GREENWALD: You know, there’s clearly risk for my doing either. I think the big risk—I mean, I would feel completely free to travel to a country like Germany. The problem is, is that Germany is in the EU, along with the UK, and there are all kinds of laws and other conventions that govern the ability of the UK to claim that somebody has engaged in terrorism and then force other EU states to turn them over. And so, I have very good lawyers who are working to resolve all of these various risks, but every lawyer that I’ve spoken with over the past four months has said that, "You would be well advised not to travel until these legal issues are resolved." Laura Poitras has gotten the same advice. Obviously, Sarah Harrison has gotten the same advice.

There are very genuine legal threats that are deliberately being hung over the heads of those of us who have worked on these stories and are continuing to work on these stories, in an attempt to intimidate us and deter us from continuing to report. It’s not going to work. We’re going to report as aggressively as if these threats didn’t exist. But their mere existence does provide all sorts of limitations, not only on us, but other journalists who now and in the future will work on similar stories. It is designed to create a climate of fear to squash a free press.

AMY GOODMAN: Former NSA director, General Michael Hayden, appeared on Face the NationSunday and accused Edward Snowden of being a traitor.

GEN. MICHAEL HAYDEN: I used to say he was a defector, you know, and there’s a history of defection. Actually, there’s a history of defection to Moscow, and that he seems to be part of that stream. I’m now kind of drifting in the direction of perhaps more harsh language.

MAJOR ELLIOTT GARRETT: Such as?

GEN. MICHAEL HAYDEN: Such as "traitor." I mean—

MAJOR ELLIOTT GARRETT: Based on what?

GEN. MICHAEL HAYDEN: Well, in the past two weeks, in open letters to the German and the Brazilian government, he has offered to reveal more American secrets to those governments in return for something. And in return was for asylum. I think there’s an English word that describes selling American secrets to another government, and I do think it’s treason.

AMY GOODMAN: Hayden also responded to questions about the impact of Snowden’s revelations on the NSA. He was being interviewed by Major Garrett.

MAJOR ELLIOTT GARRETT: Is the NSA stronger or weaker as a result of Edward Snowden’s disclosures?

GEN. MICHAEL HAYDEN: It’s infinitely weaker.

MAJOR ELLIOTT GARRETT: Infinitely?

GEN. MICHAEL HAYDEN: Infinitely. This is the most serious hemorrhaging of American secrets in the history of American espionage. Look, we’ve had other spies. We can talk about Hanssen and Aldrich Ames, but their damage, as bad as it was, was fairly limited, even though in those—both of those cases, human beings actually lost their lives. But they were specific sources, all right? There’s a reason we call these leaks, all right? And if you extend the metaphor, Hanssen and Ames, you could argue whether that was a cup of water that was leaked or a bucket of water that was leaked. What Snowden is revealing, Major, is the plumbing. He’s revealing how we acquire this information. It will take years, if not decades, for us to return to the position that we had prior to his disclosures.

AMY GOODMAN: Glenn Greenwald, I wanted you to respond to that and also the latest request by Edward Snowden to get asylum in, well, the country where you now live, in Brazil, and the significance of the debate, at least reported by The New York Times that’s going on within the intelligence community and the White House about whether Edward Snowden should possibly be granted amnesty.

GLENN GREENWALD: First of all, Michael Hayden, in that clip, as he so often does, just told outright lies. Just anyone who has any doubts should go read the letter that Edward Snowden wrote to the people of Brazil, as well as to the people of Germany, and compare it to what Michael Hayden lied and said that he actually did. He never offered to give documents in exchange for asylum or anything like that. He did the opposite. He has been repeatedly pursued by officials of both countries asking him to participate in the criminal investigations that they are conducting about spying on their citizens. And he was essentially writing a letter to say, "Unfortunately, I’m not able to help, even though I would like to help in any legal and appropriate way, because I don’t actually have permanent asylum anywhere, and the US government is still trying to imprison me. And until my situation is more secure, I’m not able to help." He was writing a letter explaining why he can’t and won’t participate in those investigations, not offering anything in return for asylum or anything else like that.

Secondly, just let me make this point about the complete ignorance of Michael Hayden. He said in that clip that Edward Snowden should now be deemed to be a traitor because he’s engaged in treason by virtue of having offered asylum in exchange for documents. Let’s assume he really did do that. Go and look at what the Constitution defines treason as being. It is very clear. It says treason is the giving of aid and comfort to the enemies of the United States—the enemies of the United States. So, even if you want to believe Michael Hayden’s lie that Edward Snowden offered information and documents in exchange for asylum to Germany and Brazil, are Germany and Brazil enemies of the United States? It’s not treason even if you believe the lies of Michael Hayden.

Thirdly, I think the real question here is: Why do we even have to have the discussion of Edward Snowden needing amnesty and asylum from other countries or needing amnesty from the United States? What he did is not like Aldrich Ames or Hanssen or anybody else like that. He didn’t sell these documents to foreign adversary governments, as he could have, and lived the rest of his life extremely rich. He brought them to some of the leading journalistic organizations in the world and asked that they be published only in a way that will inform his fellow citizens and the rest of the world about what is being done to their privacy. It is classic whistleblowing behavior. And the real question is: Why are whistleblowers in the United States either prosecuted vindictively and extremely or forced to flee the country in order to avoid being in a cage for the rest of their life? That’s the real question.

And the final thing I want to say is, you know, all this talk about amnesty for Edward Snowden, and it’s so important that the rule of law be applied to him, it’s really quite amazing. Here’s Michael Hayden. He oversaw the illegal warrantless eavesdropping program implemented under the Bush administration. He oversaw torture and rendition as the head of the CIA. James Clapper lied to the face of Congress. These are felonies at least as bad, and I would say much worse, than anything Edward Snowden is accused of doing, and yet they’re not prosecuted. They’re free to appear on television programs. The United States government in Washington constantly gives amnesty to its highest officials, even when they commit the most egregious crimes. And yet the idea of amnesty for a whistleblower is considered radical and extreme. And that’s why a hardened felon like Michael Hayden is free to walk around on the street and is treated on American media outlets as though he’s some learned, wisdom-drenched elder statesman, rather than what he is, which is a chronic criminal.

AMY GOODMAN: Finally, Jameel Jaffer, the ACLU is the legal adviser for Edward Snowden—Ben Wizner of the ACLU. What is going on behind the scenes right now? Is there a discussion between Snowden and the US government around the issue of amnesty?

JAMEEL JAFFER: Well, I think that Edward Snowden has been very direct and very open about his intentions and what he wants from the US government. He would like to come back to the United States. Obviously, he doesn’t want to come back under the conditions that are being offered right now.

I think that Michael Hayden’s statements were really irresponsible and outrageous. I mean, the idea that Edward Snowden has damaged national security is ludicrous. And it’s not that Edward Snowden has exposed just secrets of the NSA; he has exposed, as Glenn says, the lies of the NSA. James—the director of national intelligence, Mr. Clapper, testified to Congress that the NSA wasn’t collecting information about millions of Americans. It turns out that they were. The solicitor general told the Supreme Court that the NSA was providing notice to criminal defendants who had been surveilled. Turns out they weren’t. So it’s all these misrepresentations about the NSA’s activities that Edward Snowden has exposed, and I think that’s a great public service. I think it’s a travesty that Edward Snowden is in Russia. And we’re hopeful that he’ll be able to return to the United States, not in—not to face criminal charges, but rather with the kind of amnesty that he deserves.

AMY GOODMAN: I want to thank you both for being with us, Jameel Jaffer, deputy legal director of the ACLU, director of the ACLU’s Center for Democracy, and Glenn Greenwald, who broke the story about Edward Snowden, speaking to us from Brazil, now creating a new media venture with Laura Poitras and Jeremy Scahill and eBay’s Pierre Omidyar.

This is Democracy Now!, democracynow.org, The War and Peace Report. Tune in, by the way, to our New Year’s Day show, when we go through the major stories of 2013. Of course, the story about the NSA is top of the list. This is Democracy Now! We’ll be back in a minute.

The Inner Sanctum of Top NSA Hacking Unit

The NSA's TAO hacking unit is considered to be the intelligence agency's top secret weapon. It maintains its own covert network, infiltrates computers around the world and even intercepts shipping deliveries to plant back doors in electronics ordered
The NSA's TAO hacking unit is considered to be the intelligence agency's top secret weapon. It maintains its own covert network, infiltrates computers around the world and even intercepts shipping deliveries to plant back doors in electronics ordered | Source

In January 2010, numerous homeowners in San Antonio, Texas, stood baffled in front of their closed garage doors. They wanted to drive to work or head off to do their grocery shopping, but their garage door openers had gone dead, leaving them stranded. No matter how many times they pressed the buttons, the doors didn't budge. The problem primarily affected residents in the western part of the city, around Military Drive and the interstate highway known as Loop 410.

ANZEIGE

In the United States, a country of cars and commuters, the mysterious garage door problem quickly became an issue for local politicians. Ultimately, the municipal government solved the riddle. Fault for the error lay with the United States' foreign intelligence service, the National Security Agency, which has offices in San Antonio. Officials at the agency were forced to admit that one of the NSA's radio antennas was broadcasting at the same frequency as the garage door openers. Embarrassed officials at the intelligence agency promised to resolve the issue as quickly as possible, and soon the doors began opening again.

It was thanks to the garage door opener episode that Texans learned just how far the NSA's work had encroached upon their daily lives. For quite some time now, the intelligence agency has maintained a branch with around 2,000 employees at Lackland Air Force Base, also in San Antonio. In 2005, the agency took over a former Sony computer chip plant in the western part of the city. A brisk pace of construction commenced inside this enormous compound. The acquisition of the former chip factory at Sony Place was part of a massive expansion the agency began after the events of Sept. 11, 2001.

On-Call Digital Plumbers

One of the two main buildings at the former plant has since housed a sophisticated NSA unit, one that has benefited the most from this expansion and has grown the fastest in recent years -- the Office of Tailored Access Operations, or TAO. This is the NSA's top operative unit -- something like a squad of plumbers that can be called in when normal access to a target is blocked.

According to internal NSA documents viewed by SPIEGEL, these on-call digital plumbers are involved in many sensitive operations conducted by American intelligence agencies. TAO's area of operations ranges from counterterrorism to cyber attacks to traditional espionage. The documents reveal just how diversified the tools at TAO's disposal have become -- and also how it exploits the technical weaknesses of the IT industry, from Microsoft to Cisco and Huawei, to carry out its discreet and efficient attacks.

The unit is "akin to the wunderkind of the US intelligence community," says Matthew Aid, a historian who specializes in the history of the NSA. "Getting the ungettable" is the NSA's own description of its duties. "It is not about the quantity produced but the quality of intelligence that is important," one former TAO chief wrote, describing her work in a document. The paper seen by SPIEGEL quotes the former unit head stating that TAO has contributed "some of the most significant intelligence our country has ever seen." The unit, it goes on, has "access to our very hardest targets."

A Unit Born of the Internet

Defining the future of her unit at the time, she wrote that TAO "needs to continue to grow and must lay the foundation for integrated Computer Network Operations," and that it must "support Computer Network Attacks as an integrated part of military operations." To succeed in this, she wrote, TAO would have to acquire "pervasive, persistent access on the global network." An internal description of TAO's responsibilities makes clear that aggressive attacks are an explicit part of the unit's tasks. In other words, the NSA's hackers have been given a government mandate for their work. During the middle part of the last decade, the special unit succeeded in gaining access to 258 targets in 89 countries -- nearly everywhere in the world. In 2010, it conducted 279 operations worldwide.

Indeed, TAO specialists have directly accessed the protected networks of democratically elected leaders of countries. They infiltrated networks of European telecommunications companies and gained access to and read mails sent over Blackberry's BES email servers, which until then were believed to be securely encrypted. Achieving this last goal required a "sustained TAO operation," one document states.

This TAO unit is born of the Internet -- created in 1997, a time when not even 2 percent of the world's population had Internet access and no one had yet thought of Facebook, YouTube or Twitter. From the time the first TAO employees moved into offices at NSA headquarters in Fort Meade, Maryland, the unit was housed in a separate wing, set apart from the rest of the agency. Their task was clear from the beginning -- to work around the clock to find ways to hack into global communications traffic.

Recruiting the Geeks

To do this, the NSA needed a new kind of employee. The TAO workers authorized to access the special, secure floor on which the unit is located are for the most part considerably younger than the average NSA staff member. Their job is breaking into, manipulating and exploiting computer networks, making them hackers and civil servants in one. Many resemble geeks -- and act the part, too.

Indeed, it is from these very circles that the NSA recruits new hires for its Tailored Access Operations unit. In recent years, NSA Director Keith Alexander has made several appearances at major hacker conferences in the United States. Sometimes, Alexander wears his military uniform, but at others, he even dons jeans and a t-shirt in his effort to court trust and a new generation of employees.

The recruitment strategy seems to have borne fruit. Certainly, few if any other divisions within the agency are growing as quickly as TAO. There are now TAO units in Wahiawa, Hawaii; Fort Gordon, Georgia; at the NSA's outpost at Buckley Air Force Base, near Denver, Colorado; at its headquarters in Fort Meade; and, of course, in San Antonio.

One trail also leads to Germany. According to a document dating from 2010 that lists the "Lead TAO Liaisons" domestically and abroad as well as names, email addresses and the number for their "Secure Phone," a liaison office is located near Frankfurt -- the European Security Operations Center (ESOC) at the so-called "Dagger Complex" at a US military compound in the Griesheim suburb of Darmstadt.

But it is the growth of the unit's Texas branch that has been uniquely impressive, the top secret documents reviewed by SPIEGEL show. These documents reveal that in 2008, the Texas Cryptologic Center employed fewer than 60 TAO specialists. By 2015, the number is projected to grow to 270 employees. In addition, there are another 85 specialists in the "Requirements & Targeting" division (up from 13 specialists in 2008). The number of software developers is expected to increase from the 2008 level of three to 38 in 2015. The San Antonio office handles attacks against targets in the Middle East, Cuba, Venezuela and Colombia, not to mention Mexico, just 200 kilometers (124 miles) away, where the government has fallen into the NSA's crosshairs.

Environmental Ecological Media Environment

 Media Affecting Us And Our children?..
Media Affecting Us And Our children?..
In Edmonton there's the usual high school grad graffiti on the bridges. The neophytic "your mama" graffiti on the pavement. And the unimaginative defacement of signs to no purpose. These are thoroughly uninteresting. There are, however, some examples
In Edmonton there's the usual high school grad graffiti on the bridges. The neophytic "your mama" graffiti on the pavement. And the unimaginative defacement of signs to no purpose. These are thoroughly uninteresting. There are, however, some examples
While we are all likely familiar with the Marshall McLuhan axiom that the “the medium is the message,” an image that was recently posted on Google Images- Specifically the words within the image that made the assertion “There is no more B2B or B2C. I
While we are all likely familiar with the Marshall McLuhan axiom that the “the medium is the message,” an image that was recently posted on Google Images- Specifically the words within the image that made the assertion “There is no more B2B or B2C. I
“The medium is the message,” said media theorist Marshall McLuhan, and it’s as relevant in today’s digital world as it was when he coined the phrase in the ’60s. ..Messaging is the best idea we have so-far arrived at for dealing with the problem of d
“The medium is the message,” said media theorist Marshall McLuhan, and it’s as relevant in today’s digital world as it was when he coined the phrase in the ’60s. ..Messaging is the best idea we have so-far arrived at for dealing with the problem of d
Escher Hands: McLuhan, however, made bold to argue that the form of our technological mediums, like the world of advertising and physical attraction, contain a latent message, a twilight language, which operates below the threshold of our conscious a
Escher Hands: McLuhan, however, made bold to argue that the form of our technological mediums, like the world of advertising and physical attraction, contain a latent message, a twilight language, which operates below the threshold of our conscious a

The Ecological Environmental Mass Media

Human Media Technological Communications

Mass media is the most powerful tool used by the ruling lass to manipulate the masses. It shapes and molds opinions and attitudes and defines what is normal an acceptable. So that, up to this point we now know how the mass media are media forms designed to reach the largest audience possible. They include television, movies, radio, newspapers, magazines, books, records, rapes, CDs, video games and the internet.

From those studies emerged the science of Human Communications, Communications Theory, and this is used in marketing, public Relations and Politics os Mass Communications as a necessary tool to insure the functionality of a large democracy; it is also a necessary too for a dictatorships. The collective unconscious transpires through the existence of similar symbols and mythological figure in different civilizations and Archetypal symbols seem to be embedded in our collective subconscious, and when exposed to them, Man demonstrates natural attraction and fascination.

Western countries did extract wealth from their colonies, but that's only part of the story. Today, these countries, especially the United states, invest large sums of capital which help advance the technology and productivity of so-called 'backward societies'. True they rake out more than they put in, since they must make something of their investment, but they also create wealth that benefits the recipient country.

It is not a simple zero-sum situation; both parties benefit. And since these poor nations do not produce enough of their own needs, then foreign investments are very much welcomed by them. This is the case of South Africa, and African countries, and all the African and other people in the Diaspora.

Mass media are media forms designed to reach the largest audience possible. They include Television, movies, radio, newspapers, magazines, books, records, CDs, DVD's, video games(those online too) the Internet and its offshoots, Social media, mechanical gizmos and the applications. Many studies have been conducted in the past century to measure the effects of media on the population in order to discover the best techniques to influence it. Many are still needed today.

From those studies emerged the science of Communications, which is used in marketing, public relations and politics(as a propaganda tool) Mass communication is a necessary tool to insure the functionality of a large democracy; it is also a necessary tool for a dictatorship. It all depends on its usage.

McLuhan informs us further about this progression, thus: "Because all media, from the phonetic alphabet to the computer, are extensions of man that cause deep and lasting changes in him and transform his environment. Such an extension is an intensification, and amplification of an organ, sense or function, and whenever it takes place, the central nervous system appears to institute a self-protective numbing of the affected area, insulating and anesthetizing it from conscious awareness of what's happening to it. It's a process rather like Freudian conception of repression. I can call this peculiar form of self-hypnosis Narcissus narcosis, a syndrome whereby 'man remains as unaware of the psychic and social effects of his new technology as a fish out of water it swims in.'"

To this point I would like to add that, today, we see this technological gadgets are proliferating throughout the world. The emergence on these new gadgets and the more "user-friendly" they have become, has begun to enslave us to these gadgets and the techniques embedded within the core of the functions of these technologies. The behavior of people has changed, and most people are now nestled to, affected and effected by, and preoccupied with their cell phones, iTunes, [now the new] iCloud From Apple, Notepads, NoteBooks iPods, PlayStations 1, 2 and 3, Wii's, XBox360, Nintendo DS, PSP(Play Station Portable, Tablet, Smart phones, Nintendo Gametube, XBox, Nintendo DS, Nintendo D Lite, all types of APPS and the like.

With this plethora of gizmos and their technical wizardly which leaves the consumers and users 'numbed and agog", and these systems so permanently engorged into the very fiber and nervous system, soul and psyche of man, and these machines were patterned and were imaged after man's anatomy and being-ness-as mimicking man's nervous system in its manifestation as the Web, no wonder there is not even time to learn about these machinery and how our love-life with them has been affecting and is continually affecting and effecting us in perpetuity and very "deeply"; Man has become incapable of noticing these effects and affects because the overwhelming reproductions of the new technologies and techniques have enveloped all his sensory patterns and existential realities.

Merging New Technologies With Human Bodies and Minds

Tech Arm
Tech Arm
Tech Trends Of Merging And Converging Media Technological Gizmos...
Tech Trends Of Merging And Converging Media Technological Gizmos...
TransHuman
TransHuman
AugmentedGlass
AugmentedGlass
Volkswagen(VW) of the future
Volkswagen(VW) of the future

Mainstream Media Lies to the Masses - Media Lies - Media Lies Documentary

The Ecology And Contemporary Media/Communications Reality

Media ownership and 'Thought Control' in UK-A Simple Question-09-26-2011

Propaganda

These people know very well how to control human consciousness. They've been doing it quite a long time. Food, water, energy, clothing, health care, education, marketing, etc. The evidence is all over the place, everything is backwards from progress.
These people know very well how to control human consciousness. They've been doing it quite a long time. Food, water, energy, clothing, health care, education, marketing, etc. The evidence is all over the place, everything is backwards from progress.

Mind Control/Language Patterns

Dantalion Jones informs us that:

"Mind Control Language Patterns are spoken phrases that can act as 'triggers' to the people who hear them. In short. They influence and control how we respond and cause us to be influenced to do things without our knowing . These language patterns are not fantasies but are based on documented uses that come from , psychology, hypnosis.

Neuro Linguistic Programming and studies of human behavior. Mind Control Language Patterns can be used to help and hurt. One can use Mind Control Language Patterns to create positive and lasting change in people . As well as feelings of trust. Love and affections. They can also be used to induce amnesia . Fear . Insecurity and doubt.

These types of patterns are what we call "dark" pattern. I've seen the results of these "dark" and destructive language patterns. They are devious because most people don't even know they've happened. They live life half-heartedly with no purpose because someone meant to hurt them! If you know of anyone using these Mind Control Language Patterns to injure you have every right to act and stop them.

But there is a bright side to all of this. Mind Control Language Patterns like the ones in this book are also there to benefit you and everyone who knows them . Using these skills I've seen people overcome life long phobias and land million dollar contracts . You can use these skills just as easily to land the perfect job. Meet your ideal romantic partner and end what may at times seem like an endless cycle of just trying to pay the bills.

Knowing these persuasion skills and how to apply them can benefit your life and the lives of others. Knowing how to use Mind Control Language Patterns gives you incredible power. Not knowing these Mind Control Language Patterns takes the control out of your hands and places it into the hands of people who know their real power. Mind Control Language Patterns will describe, explain and document the positive and negative uses and application of these Mind Control Language Patterns.


  • Mind Control Language Patterns First Words After writing on persuasion and mind control in my last books (Mind Control 101 and The Forbidden Book ofGetting What You Want) I had considered different to go in my writing. Fiction was one possibility that is still being toyed with in the back of my twisted mind. But the problem was there are still areas of mind control that need to be shared. I decided to go into more depth in the area of persuasion and mind control called "Language Patterns." It's a good time to make clear what will not be in this book. First, this is a book about how to use language to influence people. There will be very little expositions on anchoring or other NLP processes. I want to focus exclusively on how to use language alone to influence people. A good friend and linguistics professor starts his classes by saying, "The amazing thing about language and our ability to communicate isn't how well we can communicate our thoughts. It's that we can communicate using language at all." He's right. There is so much opportunity for misunderstanding and misinterpretation that it's a wonder we can talk for hours on abstract ideas and believe we understand each other. That said, there is a great deal that can be accomplished with language when used precisely. Amid all of language's complexity, there are processes that, when skillfully used, tend to yield very interesting and useful results. These processes, or language patterns, are what we are going to explore. The study and application of these patterns is both a science and an art. It is a science in that much of it can be broken down into basic components and reassembled to create testable and replicable results. It is an art in that there are uncontrollable human variables that cannot always be predicted, but which can easily be managed given the experience and creativity of the user.
  • Mind Control Language Patterns Some think of persuasion through language as akin to witchcraft because the results of study and application can be so dramatic, and in many ways I agree. Let's regress for a moment back to the pre-language world of our infancy. While in that life everything that was experienced could only be communicated through our most primal abilities: laughing and crying. As we learned language we became able to describe, and even alter, our reality by the words we use to describe it. As we grow we continue to alter our reality with words modifying it. We constantly make choices whether or not to use words like "sad," "depressed," and "suicidal," or "satisfied," "joyful," and "elated." Each of these words have a similar meaning but the reality experienced through them is quite different. Like illusionists our words modify our reality and the reality of others, much as if they were ancient alchemical incantations. Homer's tale of the Argonauts describes The Sirens, whose voices can compel any man to act even against his own best interest. But that's only in mythology, right? You're invited to learn these powerfully persuasive language patterns as if they are secret incantations that will magically enchant or curse those who are to hear only your voice.
  • Consider a child's game where someone hides an object and the only clues given are "warmer," when the seeker gets close and "colder," when they move away from the object. The effectiveness of language patterns works much the same way. The user must pay attention to the other's responses. From that information, they know whether they are getting "warmer" or "colder." The difference is in the degree of subtle changes that you will be observing. For many, those subtle changes have never been given proper attention, but the truth is that this information makes all the difference in getting what you want. Your ability to notice how someone is reacting is essential to your effectiveness. When you begin to see the subtle flush of the cheek, for example, it's a sign that something is happening. You may not know immediately what the person is feeling — it could be anger, embarrassment, arousal, or simply a hot flash. It could be good or bad. All you know is that something is happening! To ignore it, as most do, would be a fatal flaw in getting what you want. It would be equally wrong to read too much into it. Don't fall prey to "mind reading," where you make assumptions about what people think. It could be completely untrue. In the late 1960s came a barrage of books on body language that pro­ claimed that someone sitting with crossed arms and legs is closed to learning. The truth is that someone can be talked into bed, a business partnership, or sold a product or service — just with words. If one controls the emotions of others, then they are very likely to follow suggestions. This is because people almost universally make their decisions based on feelings, rather than reason. The skillful manipulation of emotions can drive a nation to war or to build giant monuments and institutions. Individuals in one-on-one encounters are no different, and gaining control is then often easier, because feedback is instant.
  • Have you ever been in conversation with someone who made you feel as if you were the most important person in the world and that they were speaking to the deepest parts of your soul? Being able to create this feeling in others makes delivering language patterns easier and more forceful. The endless debate on how to do it all boils down to one word: charisma. To understand this powerful quality, consider how most people communicate. Often their attention is on two levels. On one level, they are directly communicating their thoughts, insights and information to the other person. On another level, they are indirectly communicating all the other things that are on their minds. Perhaps they had a fight with a spouse that day or are worried about bills. These semi-conscious thoughts act to distract and prevent them from fully focusing on the other person. For you reading this book — focus fully on the other person. When you put aside all distractions, by sheer force of will, if necessary, your awareness opens to more subtle cues from the individual, and your ability to influence them is multiplied. Combine this sense of focus with your own unstoppable conviction, and your words take on a power of their own. The first step is to recognize that these distractions exist. The next step is to vow that, while you are attempting to influence someone, you put your distractions aside in order to focus only on them and how to direct them toward your outcome. See to it that nothing deters your focus.
  • Mind Control Language Patterns fun. To use it, you must take on three perspectives: your perspective and what you will say; the second person's perspective and how you want them to perceive what you are saying; and the third person's perspective and how you want them to perceive what you say.
  • The first level of perception and influence is the most superficial; this is where stimulus meets the senses. This is quite simple and straightforward in theory — people respond to what their senses perceive. On a practical level of influence and mind control this means limiting what the subject perceives with the five senses, so that they can make conclusions and assumptions based only on that information. This is what many cults attempt to do and many of the paranoid conspiracy theorists believe the so-called Illuminati are doing to everybody. The second level is an attempt to define the meaning of the sensory perceptions. In other words, if you introduce someone to people jumping up and down with drums beating, then you can define it as dancing or demon possession, and the definition will be accepted, as long as the subject has no prior reference to the stimuli. If the subject does have some prior associations, then they are likely to bring that in­ formation into the meaning they create. This third level is one in which the subject develops their own meaning and interpretation of the information. This personal interpretation may incorporate level two definitions. Here the individual com­ pares the sensory information and its given meaning to their own preexisting beliefs, perceptions and experiences, in order to draw a conclusion. For example, a beating with a cane may include pain (first level perception) and be prescribed as a punishment (second level perception), but the subject may associate it with an experience in their youth, where they were whipped by an attractive nanny and experienced arousal. Thus, their third level perception would be one of arousal, in­ stead of punishment. At the fourth level of perception, strong emotions and beliefs are associated with the external stimuli and thus ingraining them deeper in the individual psyche. At this level, these beliefs and emotions be.
  • So now you're aware of four levels of perception and four levels of influence that can be used to give you more power and control. A sense of power comes about when you become aware of what other people don't usually consider. Because most people aren't aware of these levels of perception, your power can grow by increasing or decreasing the options that you offer people at these levels. What follows are four types of information. With each level, the information gets more complex. Binary Information (All or Nothing, Good or Bad, Black or White) This is the most limiting of information options. It means the in­ formation will only fall into one category, or it will not. Used in its darkest form, a religious cult will ask its members to divide everything into us/them categories. In terms of language patterns, it means describing something in binary terms — good or bad. BetterlWorse Information There is more flexibility when there are more options. Here, choices are not binary but have a rank — this one is better than that one. What is absent with this information is how much better/worse some­ thing is, compared to its counterpart. There is no gradient or scale. Scaled Information (rating on 1 to 100) Here, the information is provided on a gradient scale that starts at zero, or nothing, and goes to any extreme. With this quality of information you can provide information that is "good enough" or "not bad enough," and thus influence a decision the subject can make. Complex Relationship Information This is the level of information with the greatest degree of variability and therefore, the greatest freedom and flexibility.

J Krishnamurti : Breaking the pattern of conditioning - Mind Control

Mind Control Through Language Pattern Recognition

Mind Control And The Internet

Sue Halpern writes:

Early this April, when researchers at Washington University in St. Louis reported that a woman with a host of electrodes temporarily positioned over the speech center of her brain was able to move a computer cursor on a screen simply by thinking but not pronouncing certain sounds, it seemed like the Singularity—the long-standing science fiction dream of melding man and machine to create a better species—might have arrived.

At Brown University around the same time, scientists successfully tested a different kind of brain–computer interface (BCI) called BrainGate, which allowed a paralyzed woman to move a cursor, again just by thinking. Meanwhile, at USC, a team of biomedical engineers announced that they had successfully used carbon nanotubes to build a functioning synapse—the junction at which signals pass from one nerve cell to another—which marked the first step in their long march to construct a synthetic brain. On the same campus, Dr. Theodore Berger, who has been on his own path to make a neural prosthetic for more than three decades, has begun to implant a device into rats that bypasses a damaged hippocampus in the brain and works in its place.

The hippocampus is crucial to memory formation, and Berger’s invention holds the promise of overcoming problems related to both normal memory loss that comes from aging and pathological memory loss associated with diseases like Alzheimer’s. Similarly, the work being done at Brown and Washington University suggests the possibility of restoring mobility to those who are paralyzed and giving voice to those who have been robbed by illness or injury of the ability to communicate. If this is the Singularity, it looks not just benign but beneficent.

Michael Chorost is a man who has benefited from a brain–computer interface, though the kind of BCI implanted in his head after he went deaf in 2001, a cochlear implant, was not inserted directly into his brain, but into each of his inner ears. The result, after a lifetime of first being hard of hearing and then shut in complete auditory solitude, as he recounted in his memoir, Rebuilt: How Becoming Part Computer Made Me More Human (2005), was dramatic and life-changing. As his new, oddly jejune book, World Wide Mind: The Coming Integration of Humanity, Machines, and the Internet, makes clear, he is now a cheerleader for the rest of us getting kitted out with our own, truly personal, in-brain computers. In Chorost’s ideal world, which he lays out with the unequivocal zeal of a convert, we will all be connected directly to the Internet via a neural implant, so that the Internet “would become seamlessly part of us, as natural and simple to use as our own hands.”

The debate between repair and enhancement is long-standing in medicine (and sports, and education, and genetics), though it gets louder and more complicated as technology advances. Typically, repair, like what those Brown, USC, and Washington University research teams are aiming to do for people who have suffered stroke, spinal cord and other injuries, neurodegeneration, dementia, or mental illness, is upheld as something good and necessary and worthy. Enhancement, on the other hand—as with performance drugs and stem cell line manipulation—is either reviled as a threat to our integrity and meaning as humans or conflated with repair until the distinction becomes meaningless.1

Chorost bounces over this debate altogether. While the computer in his head was put there to fix a deficit, the fact that it is there at all is what seems to convince him that the rest of us should become cyborgs. His assumption—it would be too generous to call it an argument—is that if that worked for him, this will work for us. “My two implants make me irreversibly computational, a living example of the integration of humans and computers,” he writes. “So for me the thought of implanting something like a BlackBerry in my head is not so strange. It would not be so strange for a lot of people, I think.”

More than a quarter-century ago, a science writer named David Ritchie published a book that I’ve kept on my bookshelf as a reminder of what the post-1984 world was supposed to bring. Called The Binary Brain, it extolled “the synthesis of human and artificial intelligence” via something he called a “biochip.” “The possibilities are marvelous to contemplate,” he wrote.

You could plug into a computer’s memory banks almost as easily as you put on your shoes. Suddenly, your mind would be full of all the information stored in the computer. You could instantly make yourself an expert in anything from Spanish literature to particle physics…. With biochips to hold the data, all the information in the MIT and Harvard libraries might be stuffed into a volume no greater than that of a sandwich. All of Shakespeare in a BB-sized module…. You may see devices like this before this century ends.

“Remember,” he says gravely, “we are talking here about a technology that is just around the corner, if not here already. Biochips would lead to the development of all manner of man-machine combinations….”

Twenty-six years later, in the second decade of the new millennium, here is Chorost saying almost the same thing, and for the same reason: our brains are too limited to sufficiently apprehend the world.2 “Some human attributes like IQ appear to have risen in the twentieth century,” he writes, “but the rate of increase is much slower than technology’s. There is no Moore’s Law for human beings.” (Moore’s Law is the much-invoked thesis, now elevated to metaphor, that says that the number of components that can be placed on an integrated circuit doubles every two years.) Leaving aside the flawed equivalences—that information is knowledge and facts are intelligence—Chorost’s “transmog” dream is rooted in a naive, and common, misperception of the Internet search engine, particularly Google’s, which is how most Internet users navigate through the fourteen billion pages of the World Wide Web.

Most of us, I think it’s safe to say, do not give much thought to the algorithm that produces the results of a Google search. Ask a question, get an answer—it’s a straightforward transaction. It seems not much different from consulting an encyclopedia, or a library card catalog, or even an index in a book. Books, those other repositories of facts, information, and ideas, are the template by which we understand the Web, which is like a random, messy, ever-expanding volume of every big and little thing. A search is our way into and through the mess, and when it’s made by using Google, it’s relying on the Google algorithm, a patented and closely guarded piece of intellectual property that the company calls PageRank, composed of “500 million variables and 2 billion terms.”

Those large numbers are comforting. They suggest an impermeable defense against bias, a scientific objectivity that allows the right response to the query to bubble up from the stew of so much stuff. To an extent it’s a self-perpetuating system, since it uses popularity (the number of links) as a proxy for importance, so that the more a particular link is clicked on, the higher its PageRank, and the more likely it is to appear near the top of the search results. (This is why companies have not necessarily minded bad reviews of their products.) Chorost likens this to Hebbian learning—the notion that neurons that fire together, wire together, since

A highly ranked page will garner more page views, thus strengthening its ranking. [In this way]pages that link together “think” together. If many people visit a page over and over again, its PageRank will become so high that it effectively becomes stored in the collective human/electronic long-term memory.

Even if this turns out to be true, the process is anything but unbiased.

A Google search—which Chorost would have us doing in our own technologically modified heads—“curates” the Internet. The algorithm is, in essence, an editor, pulling up what it deems important, based on someone else’s understanding of what is important. This has spawned a whole industry of search engine optimization (SEO) consultants who game the system by reconfiguring a website’s code, content, and keywords to move it up in the rankings. Companies have also been known to pay for links in order to push themselves higher up in the rankings, a practice that Google is against and sometimes cracks down on. Even so, results rise to the top of a search query because an invisible hand is shepherding them there.

It’s not just the large number of search variables, or the intervention of marketers, that shapes the information we’re shown by bringing certain pages to our attention while others fall far enough down in the rankings to be kept out of view. As Eli Pariser documents in his chilling book The Filter Bubble: What the Internet Is Hiding from You, since December 2009, Google has aimed to contour every search to fit the profile of the person making the query. (This contouring applies to all users of Google, though it takes effect only after the user has performed several searches, so that the results can be tailored to the user’s tastes.)

The search process, in other words, has become “personalized,” which is to say that instead of being universal, it is idiosyncratic and oddly peremptory. “Most of us assume that when we google a term, we all see the same results—the ones that the company’s famous Page Rank algorithm suggests are the most authoritative based on other page’s links,” Pariser observes. With personalized search, "Now you get the result that Google’s algorithm suggests is best for you in particular—and someone else may see something entirely different. In other words, there is no standard Google anymore.” It’s as if we looked up the same topic in an encyclopedia and each found different entries—but of course we would not assume they were different since we’d be consulting what we thought to be a standard reference.

Among the many insidious consequences of this individualization is that by tailoring the information you receive to the algorithm’s perception of who you are, a perception that it constructs out of fifty-seven variables, Google directs you to material that is most likely to reinforce your own worldview, ideology, and assumptions. Pariser suggests, for example, that a search for proof about climate change will turn up different results for an environmental activist than it would for an oil company executive and, one assumes, a different result for a person whom the algorithm understands to be a Democrat than for one it supposes to be a Republican. (One need not declare a party affiliation per se—the algorithm will prise this out.) In this way, the Internet, which isn’t the press, but often functions like the press by disseminating news and information, begins to cut us off from dissenting opinion and conflicting points of view, all the while seeming to be neutral and objective and unencumbered by the kind of bias inherent in, and embraced by, say, the The Weekly Standard or The Nation.

Lies, Deception And Coverups: Mind Control through Propaganda

Internet Penetration By Region

Canadians rank first in the world when it comes to Internet usage, spending an average of 45 hours per month online. Canadians also spend more for broadband speed than 19 other internet-using countries. These are just a couple of facts pulled from th
Canadians rank first in the world when it comes to Internet usage, spending an average of 45 hours per month online. Canadians also spend more for broadband speed than 19 other internet-using countries. These are just a couple of facts pulled from th

Countries That Spend Most time Online

India - 11.9 hours/Month
India - 11.9 hours/Month
China - 13.5 Hours/Month
China - 13.5 Hours/Month
Japan - 18.4 Hours/Month
Japan - 18.4 Hours/Month
Russia - 21.8 hours/Month
Russia - 21.8 hours/Month
Germany - 24.1 Hour?Month
Germany - 24.1 Hour?Month
Brazil - 25.8 Hours/Month
Brazil - 25.8 Hours/Month
France - 26.6 Hours/Month
France - 26.6 Hours/Month
South Korea - 27.7
South Korea - 27.7

Jacques Ellul’s The Technological Society Re-Visited John A.

John A. Coleman Addresses this issue in the piece below as follows:

I was asked by the editor of Reflective Practice to pen an essay commenting on Jacques Ellul’s classic book, The Technological Society, originally published as La Technique in 1954.1 The concern of the editor was with how Ellul’s argument holds up nearly 57 years later. There is one slight misnomer in the “re-visited” title that I give to this essay.

In point of fact—and in retrospect, a little surprising to me—I did not read The Technological Society when I was doing my doctoral studies in sociology in the late 1960s and early 1970s— despite the fact that the English edition carried an introduction by the distinguished sociologist, Robert K. Merton.

Various of Ellul’s ideas rattled around some of my sociological classes at that time but, for some reason, I never picked up on his work. I was more taken at that time by two other, somewhat cognate and more hopeful books about technology and modern life: Lewis Mumford’s Techniques and Civilization2 and Ivan Illich’s Tools for Conviviality.

To the question of how does Ellul’s argument stand up, I have one short answer—despite many changes in the last fifty years (surprisingly, Ellul did foresee the information explosion and something like an Internet, as well as biotechnology), Ellul is not particularly dated because of new developments. Again as a summary judgment, any 'flaws' in Ellul’s argument (I will suggest one glaring one) as we read him now were there equally sixty years ago. As it turns out, reading Ellul today is closely with a current intellectual project of mine: How to relate moral thinking with sociological structures and the new forms of a networked society?

For those who have not read The Technological Society, it is an enormously learned and, in places, densely written book and it has a clear and, on the face of it, compelling argument. By technique, Ellul did not mean just machines. Rather, as his translator put it: “Technique is the totality of methods rationally arrived at and having absolute efficiency.”

Another way of looking at technique is to see it as the ensemble of practices by which one uses available resources to achieve values. Ellul seems to refer to technique as the entire pre-determined complex of standardization of means. For Ellul, technique applies not just to the economy or the state, but to leisure activities, bodily regimes, regulations, psychoanalysis, management and organization, human technique, information, and etc. “Nothing at all escapes technique today.”

The Technological Society is, in no way, an optimistic book. It is an almost harrowing inspection of the rise of modern technological society since the industrial revolution, which allows little lee-way for effective agency to control its excesses. It is a book that is almost deterministic and, even, fatalistic. In part, Ellul states that he “deliberately refrained from providing solutions,” even though lurking throughout the book is the question of how to resist and transcend technological determinisms.

To be sure, in his introduction, Ellul does admit that he believes in human agency, but “the individual’s acts or ideas do not here and now exert any influence on social, political, economic mechanisms.” There has been an “application of technique to all spheres of life.” So, “At present, there is no counterbalance to technique.”

In earlier societies, before the industrial revolution, there were built-in limitations to techniques. Techniques remained local and were constrained by what may now be called “the inefficiencies,” which are caused by deep-rooted loyalties to family, religion, culture, public opinion, and a prevailing morality. But once capitalism arose in its industrial forms, technique came to spread from economy to society to all spheres of modern life. The technical mind, Ellul argues, has a built-in totalitarian tendency toward centralizing varying sub-sections of technique. The precise role of the centralized, planning state is to integrate technique. Technique also shows an antidemocratic tendency, in that it “always gives rise to an aristocracy of technicians who guard secrets to which no outsider has access.”

The rise of “economic man” devalued all activities and tendencies other than the economic. The technical mind tends to think of technique as neutral and it eschews moral judgments. The technical mind “tends to create a completely technical morality.” A technological take-over of society inverts means to ends. The most important questions become merely “how to” technical questions—for example, the creation of the atom bomb and biological experiments that exalt artificial forms of procreation. Ellul laments that “technological man” tends to move, inexorably and without much deep thought, from what is technically possible to its actuation. Those who resist the technological mind become isolated or rejected.

The brilliance of the book lies in the way Ellul systematically treats technique and the economy, the state, and the law "where order and security get substituted for justice as the end and foundation of law—such that, 'laws becomes merely a complex of technical norms.' Technique de-natures natural society and various techniques converge. Human techniques, such as propaganda, advertising, and other psychological means, attempt to get humans to do what they do not spontaneously want to do. Education is reduced to an attempt to produce technicians. Ellul ends up calling this technical world “a universal concentration camp.”

Some commentators have mused about what Ellul would do with the elements of a full-blown information revolution. At least some of them suggest that he could include them in his analysis. Media applications that use the Internet, such as Facebook,Twitter, and iPods, and the way they are electronically inter-twined would not surprise him. He would also note that— as entertainment—it is simply not the case that, “The individual, left on his own, will devote himself to the education of his personality or to a spiritual and cultural life.” Moreover, he would likely lift up the ‘unintended consequences’ of information technology: for example, its tendency to make silence or quiet meditation more difficult.

One citation captures well the basic thrust of the book:

The character of technique renders it independent of man himself. Man, practically speaking, no longer possesses any means of bringing action to bear upon technique. He is unable to limit or orient it. The reality is that man no longer has any means with which to subjugate technique, which is not an intellectual, or even, as some would have it, a spiritual phenomenon.

It is above all a sociological phenomenon, and in order to cure or change it, one would have to oppose to it checks and barriers of a sociological character. By such means alone man might possibly bring action to bear on it. But everything of a sociological character has had its character changed by technique. There is, therefore, nothing of a sociological character available to restrain technique, because everything in society is its servant. Technique is essentially independent of the human being who finds himself naked and disarmed before it.

No one, then, so brilliantly unmasks the technological mind and its ability to lure us into a kind of blind acceptance and complacency in its ascendancy as Ellul does. No one so well details the idea that technology is not neutral or that, while made to serve humans, it actually subverts that hierarchy, so that humans serve it—no one so well helps us see that technology is rarely neutral in its effects. Ellul is effective in showing the folly of trying to address technological spheres as totally separate (they are intertwined, as state is with economy, and labor is with leisure time). He does us a service ethically by showing how the technological mind inverts the values of the moral order.

My main complaint against Ellul’s analysis is a fundamentally sociological one. As so many sociologists do, Ellul juxtaposes structure with agency. Correctly, he and other sociologists tend to unmask delusions of individual agency untouched by, unhemmed in, unconstrained by culture and agency. We are less free, agile agents than we delude ourselves into imagining. If there are deep structural constraints—theologians might speak here of ‘structural sin’—then, the address to them must be equally structural.

Yet, sociological structures (even quite constraining ones) are never totally divorced from human agency and there is a kind of “social construction” of reality. Humans who acquiesce in structures—perhaps, because they feel they are constrained by them and not free—can withdraw (as happens in revolutionary moments) their consent from them and, again, basically, unmask their de-humanizing character. Nor is all agency merely individual—there exists a collective agency, a more mass reaction and horror toward the de-humanizing character of the modern technological mind. In a recent, very brilliant, book, What is a Person? Sociologist Christian Smith uncovers some of the mistakes of an overly robust “structuralist” sociological model, such as found in Ellul.

Perhaps, following Lewis Mumford, we will need to distinguish between authoritarian versus democratic techniques. Yet, even there, we may want to maintain a methodical suspicion about the purported claims for democratic techniques. The technological mind exalts freedom as an individual sense of choice. It masks how often the range of choices (if, indeed, there are any) is pre-determined by the regime of technology. So, I take Ellul’s analysis quite seriously about the kind of dilemmas inherent in our technological society and within our minds.

Although, I assume his work would read differently if his sociology were more informed by those who juxtapose structure and agency and know that there are elements of human agency (e.g., acceptance, acquiescence, willful cooperation) in every social structure. Had I read The Technological Society in the late 1960s, I might have missed this point. However, once I read Anthony Giddens’ book, The Constitution of Society: Outline for the Theory of Structuration, I could no longer accept Ellul’s crass view of sociological structures. Having said that, however, I still think anyone who reads The Technological Society will be much more prone to engage in a truly “reflective” (carefully, suspiciously, and cautiously reflective)! practice.

Time Some Countries Spend on The Internet

United Kingdom - 32.3 Hours/Month
United Kingdom - 32.3 Hours/Month
United States - 35.3 Hours/Month
United States - 35.3 Hours/Month
Canada - 43.5 Hours/Month
Canada - 43.5 Hours/Month

The Betrayal of Technology

“A principal characteristic of technique … is its refusal to tolerate moral judgments. It is absolutely independent of them and eliminates them from its domain. Technique never observes the distinction between moral and immoral use. It tends on the contrary, to create a completely independent technical morality” (Ellul, The Technological Society, p.97).

The resonance with modern drone warfare — the alienation, the abstraction, the automation — is really quite profound. Ellul argues that mankind has become dominated by technology — a concept that includes both the physical stuff of technology and machines, but also its underlying logics — of efficiency and order.

Once under our control, technology now controls us.

I think the documentary does a good job of touching on a range of issues that concern Ellul. It has to be said that Ellul has a “grand narrative” — one that some may find off-putting. But there’s something about big thinkers that have always excited me, warts and all. His argument, in a nutshell, is that technology forms a mass of people, and conditions their essential humanity by restricting their freedom and displacing their responsibility.

Indeed, for Ellul, freedom and technology contradict each other.

In “traditional” societies, technology was held back by traditional mores — such as religion and custom. The earth was seen as “mother” and things like iron tools could not even be used upon the soil. In ancient Egypt, for example, wheels were not permitted because they resembled the zodiac. But I also contemned that not to be exactly true because Egyptian began using Chariots long before this was a fact.

But then in the 14th and 15th centuries people began to question tradition. Science discovered a series of what could be thought of as “truths”. This similarly produced the idea that those left “behind” were savages and not human. Such “progress” destroyed traditional ways of life, universes, and existential understandings of humanity’s place in the cosmos.

Technology has thus destroyed whatever was once held sacred, and especially “nature” — as it works through and in spite of it. Moreover, now technology is seen as sacred as an end in itself.

Every technological step forward thus has its price. What price do we pay for the drone? What is the cost for a new order of things?

Ellul, later in the interview, states that:

“Technologists” (and technocrats)? do not approve of people expressing a moral or ethical judgement, and especially a spiritual judgement. This is because a technologist is conditioned by their training and operates on the inside of a techno-efficient logic. But this expression of morality is the highest freedom of mankind[today].

"Living in a technological society likewise has its psychological costs. In many ways, cities are completely dead environments, and city dwellers suffer from depression because of this and because of the pace that they now live, and the loneliness they feel. And for the relief of these psychological maladies — there is technology. Technology thus becomes the cause and panacea of our mental ailments.

"Just as deep-sea divers have all kinds of technology to keep them underwater, so do we, as children of modernity, immunize ourselves against the throes of a technological dead space populated by a range of 'diversions' and technological amusements.

"For Ellul, mankind, living in a technological world, has given up on its independence, its essential 'being-with-other-humans” in exchange for consumer products and a hollow kind of existential security provided by commodities. As Heidegger would perhaps think, from “being-with-others” to “being-with-things”.

The questions to ask are therefore as follows: Are we able to accept that we are dominated by technology? That it oppresses us? That it obliges us? That it conditions us? For Ellul, freedom begins when we realize this — and then refuse the destiny of technology by remaining, above all, people. No more, no less.

With the rise of drone warfare in the distant borderlands of our planet and in the intimate spaces of the American City, Ellul’s thoughts may yet provide a fascinating entry-point into understanding the existential changes (rather than the purely legal, moral, or geopolitical transformations) of life under drones.

The Betrayal by Technology: A Portrait of Jacques Ellul -Full - French w/ Eng Subs

The Betrayal by Technology: Or Is It Our Enslavement By Technique Real

Ellul: One of my best friends is a very competent… was a very competent surgeon. During a discussion in which he participated, about the problems of technology and progress, someone said to him: "You, as a surgeon, surely know everything about the progress in surgery?"

He gave a humorous reply, as always: "I am certainly aware of the progress in the medical field. But just ask yourself the following question: currently, we carry out heart transplants, liver transplant and kidney transplants. But where do those kidneys, that heart and those lungs come from, in fact? They must be healthy organs. Not affected by an illness or the like. Moreover, they must be fresh. In fact, there is just one source: traffic accidents. So, to carry out more operations, we need more traffic accidents. If we make traffic safer, fewer of those wonderful operations will carried out."

Of course, everyone was rather astonished and also somewhat shocked. It was very humorous, but it was also a real question.

"Technology with a ‘T' is not concrete like a machine or electricity. The technology phenomenon has become detached from the machine." — Jacques Ellul

Ellul: One of the illusions which some try to put across to people today is to get them to believe that technology makes them more free. If you just use enough technical aids you will be freer.

Free to do what? Free to eat nice things. That's true, if you have money, that is. Free to buy a car so that you can travel. You can go all the way to the other side of the world. To Tahiti. So you see: technology brings freedom. We can acquire knowledge in the whole world. That's fantastic. So a world of freedom is open to us.

Just to give a small example in connection of the use of cars:

As soon as the holidays begin, three million Parisians decide independently to one another to head for the Mediterranean in their cars. Three million people all decide to do the same thing. So then I ask myself if the car really brings us much freedom. Those people haven't given it a moment's thought that they are, in fact, completely determined by technology and the life they lead. That, in fact, they form a mass. A coherent whole.

In a society such as ours, it is almost impossible for a person to be responsible. A simple example: a dam has been built somewhere, and it bursts. Who is responsible for that? Geologists worked out. They examined the terrain. Engineers drew up the construction plans. Workmen constructed it. And the politicians decided that the dam had to be in that spot. Who is responsible? No one. There is never anyone responsible. Anywhere. In the whole of our technological society the work is so fragmented and broken up into small pieces that no one is responsible. But no one is free either. Everyone has his own, specific task. And that's all he has to do.

Just consider, for example, that atrocious excuse… It was one of the most horrible things I have ever heard. The person in charge of the concentration camp Bergen-Belsen was asked, during the Auschwitz trial… the Nuremberg trials regarding Auschwitz and Bergen-Belsen: "But didn't find you it horrible? All those corpses?" He replied: "What could I do? The capacity of the ovens was too small. I couldn't process all those corpses. It caused me many problems. I had no time to think about those people. I was too busy with that technical problem of my ovens." That was the classic example of an irresponsible person. He carries out his technical task he's not interested in anything else.

In a so-called traditional society such as, for example, Western society in the Middle Ages, technology is controlled by certain rules. Religious rules, for example. In certain civilizations it was, for example, forbidden to work the ground with iron tools. For the earth was considered as mother and you weren't allowed to hurt her in any way with hard tools. That was a rule. For similar reasons the Egyptians didn't used no wheels. The Hyksos had long known about the wheel. So had the Egyptians. But they didn't use it, because it looked like a zodiac. And mortals were not allowed to use zodiac for material purposes.

To be honest, I don't think that the technology of the past is comparable with the technology of the present. In the past technology was a means of achieving a certain aim. Whether that aim was a sculpture or agriculture or hunting, was not important. The technologies used were relatively stabile. They remained more or less the same, and were sometimes very ingenious. The hunting techniques of the Bushmen, for example, were very ingenious. They were incredibly skilled in killing elephants. So their techniques were very clever. But without that element of excessiveness which is a characteristic of technology today.

They were technologies passed on from generation to generation, changing very little. We know, on the basis of the development of technology in Roman times and the Middle Ages that it took a century before technology was changed. Of course, the technology had certain efficiency. But that was fully compensated for by stability.

In the Middle Ages there were religious rules, partly Christian, partly derived from popular belief which related to works and similar matters. And those rules were more important than equipment or tolls. But sometime during the fourteenth or fifteenth century people in the Western world began questioning everything. All the existing certainties and convictions were cast overboard. The concept of tradition was under review.

That's very important. In the past, everything was based on tradition. And suddenly, for example in France in the fifteenth century all traditions were thrown overboard. They were suddenly no longer important. The old values and customs were obsolete. Suddenly, everyone feels free to do what he wants. And at the same time, in the field of science a number of "truths," let's say, were discovered, which undermined the existing convictions. Also dating from that time was the discussion about whether the earth was the centre of the universe. All very typical.

I think that's indeed our greatest tragedy and our greatest sin. We entered those societies with the idea that those people were savages. That they almost weren't human. We didn't realize that there could be well some truth concealed in their concepts. Two examples:

To start with, we gave the impression that we used all the riches of those countries. But then only from our own industrial point of view. So we destroyed the traditional agriculture and replaced it with what we called "industrial" agriculture. That is, peanuts for making oil, coca beans, sugar cane, and so on. And at the same time we forced the members of those societies to obey their conquerors. For contacts were only possible after you had first conquered them. And we always won, because we were much more advanced technologically.

Many fundamental things were destroyed at that time. Things which are necessary in order to be able to live. Where do we come from? What is the point of living? Those people had found an answer to those questions. And we didn't have the right to destroy that answer. We destroyed their social structures and also the whole system of their philosophy of life. Their conceptions of the world and the universe.

What is sacred in one society is not always sacred in another. But people have always respected sacred matters. And if there was a force which destroyed those sacred matters, those elements regarded as sacred in certain society, then this new force was revered and respected by the people. For it was clearly stronger. So there was a new thing that was more sacred than the old one.


What is now so awful in our society is that technology has destroyed everything which people ever considered sacred. For example, nature. People have voluntarily moved to an acceptance of technology as something sacred. That is really awful. In the past, the sacred things always derived from nature. Currently, nature has been completely desecrated and we consider technology as something sacred. Think, for example, on the fuss whenever a demonstration is held. Everyone is then always very shocked if a car is set on fire. For then a sacred object is destroyed.

That is one the basic rules of technology. Without a doubt. Every technological step forward has its price. Human happiness has its price. We must always ask ourselves what price we have to pay for something. We only have to consider the following example. When Hitler came to power everyone considered the Germans mad. Nearly all the Germans supported him. Of course. He brought an end to unemployment. He improved the position of the mark.

He created a surge in economic growth. How can a badly informed population, seeing all these economic miracles, be against him? They only had to ask the question: What will it cost us? What price do we have to pay for this economic progress, for the strong position of the mark and for employment? What will that cost us? Then they would have realized that the cost would be very high. But this is typical for modern society. Yet this question will always be asked in traditional societies. In such societies people ask: If by doing this I disturb the order of things what will be the cost for me?

Wisdom does not come from intellectual reflection. It is achieved in a long process of transfer from generation to generation. (It is) An accumulation of experiences in direct relationship with the natural social climate. Nature served as an example for us. We must divest ourselves of all that. For in a technological society traditional human wisdom is not taken seriously.

Technology also obliges us to live more and more quickly. Inner reflection is replaced by reflex. Reflection means that, after I have undergone an experience, I think about that experience. In the case of a reflex you know immediately what you must do in a certain situation. Without thinking. Technology requires us no longer to think about the things. If you are driving a car at 150 kilometers an hour and you think you'll have an accident. Everything depends on reflexes. The only thing technology requires us is: Don't think about it. Use your reflexes.

Because of its efficiency technology leads to more power. But also to more risks. For efficiency is everything. All else is peripheral. Including risks, therefore. But in the case of more power and greater risks people themselves must change, too. They must be sufficiently independent to control that power and perhaps not to use it fully. And they must try to avoid risks. So it is necessary for people to change quickly so that they can apply the technology in the proper way, not simply efficiently. That is why something must change. As the French philosopher Bergson said long ago, in 1930s: The more power people have the greater strength of mind they need. There must be a kind of refinement. But if people think only of one thing, namely power, and they are given control over means of power they will use that power as quickly as possible without even thinking about it.

Technology will not tolerate any judgment being passed on it. Or rather: technologists do not easily tolerate people expressing an ethical or moral judgment on what they do. But the expression of ethical, moral and spiritual judgments is actually the highest freedom of mankind. So I am robbed of my highest freedom. So whatever I say about technology and the technologists themselves is of no importance to them. It won't deter them from what they are doing. They are now set in their course. They are so conditioned. For a technologist is not free. He is conditioned. By his training, by his experiences and by the objective which he must reach. He is not free in the execution of his task. He does what technology demands of him. That's why I think freedom and technology contradict one another.

Human technology is created from the moment that it is felt that people are unhappy. City dwellers, for example, live in a completely dead environment. Cities consist of brick, cement, concrete, and so on. People cannot be happy in such an environment. So they suffer psychological problems. Mainly as a result of their social climate but also as a result of the speed at which they are forced to live. Yet man is specifically suited for living amidst nature. So man becomes mentally ill. And for the relief of those psychological illnesses there is human technology, just as there is medical technology. But human technology must enable man to live in an unnatural environment. As in the case of deep sea diving. Divers have a deep sea diving suit and oxygen cylinders in order to survive in an abnormal environment. Human technology is just like that.


I know many people who like watching commercials because they're so funny. They provide relaxation and diversion. People come home after a day's work, from which they derive little satisfaction, and feel the need for diversion and amusement. The word diversion itself is already very significant. When Pascal uses the word diversion he means that people who follow the path of God deviate from the path which leads them to God as a result of diversion and amusement. Instead of thinking of God, they amuse themselves. So, instead of thinking about the problems which have been created by technology and our work we want to amuse ourselves. And that amusement is supplied to us by means of technology. But by means of technology which derives from human technology. For example, in a work situation people are offered the diversion which must serve as compensation.

The media era is also the era of loneliness. That's a very important fact. We can also see that in the young. In 1953 you had the so called "rebels without a cause". Students who revolted in Stockholm. That was the first revolt of the young rebels without a cause. They had everything. They were happy. They lived in a nice society. They lacked nothing. And suddenly, on New Year's Eve, they took to the streets and destroyed everything. No one could understand it. But they needed something different from consumption and technology.

If people lose their motive for living two things can happen. It only seldom happens that they can accept that fact. In that case, they develop suicidal tendencies. Usually, either they try to find refuge in diversion. We've already discussed this. Or they become depressed and begin swallowing medicines. So if people become aware of their situation they react to it as usually happens in Western society: they become depressed and discouraged. So they just don't think about their situation and simply carry on. They drive faster and faster. Never mind where, as long as it's fast.

Because of our technology, we now have a world in which the situation of mankind has totally changed. What I mean by that is: mankind in the technological world is prepared to give up his independence in exchange for all kinds of facilities and in exchange for consumer products and a certain security. In short, in exchange for a package of welfare provisions offered to him by society. As I was thinking about that I couldn't help recalling the story in the Bible about Esau and the lentil broth.

Esau, who is hungry, is prepared to give up the blessings and promise of God in exchange for some lentil broth. In the same way, modern people are prepared to give up their independence in exchange for some technological lentils. The point is simply that Esau made an extremely unfavorable exchange and that the person who gives up his position of independence lets himself be badly duped too, by the technological society. It boils down to the fact that he gives up his independence in exchange for a number of lies. He doesn't realize that he is manipulated in his choice. That he is changed internally by advertisements, by the media and so on. And when you think that manipulator, the author of advertisements or propaganda is himself manipulated, then you cannot point to one culprit as being responsible. It is neither the advertiser nor his poor public. We are all responsible, to the same extent.

(In Ellul's library)


These are all books on Karl Marx. Marx, socialism, and so on.

Those are books which I use continually.

Those are mainly poetry books.

And those are my dictionaries and so on.

I always have my poetry books within arm's reach. I read a lot of poetry while I work.

Those are books on the sociology of technology.

And those are books on theology.

When I write a book, I always have a tape recorder handy and a record player which is always on. For virtually every book I select a certain record which I listen to all the time. That's very… A book is associated with certain music, and inspired by it.

Right from the start I have often been sharply criticized in the United States, for example, for allegedly being a Calvinist. And a Calvinist is pessimistic, and so on. But I'm not a Calvinist at all. They haven't understood anything of my theology, but it doesn't matter.


But what does matter is that pessimism in a society such as ours can only lead to suicide. That's why you must be optimistic. You must spend your holiday in Disneyland. Then you are a real optimist. With all that you see there you no longer have to think about anything else. In other words, those who accuse me of pessimism are in fact saying to me: You prevent people from being able to sleep peacefully. So if you let everything to take its course, never interfere, and you just go to sleep peacefully, all will end well.

I would certainly not want my words to be too pessimistic and too inaccessible. And I would like to explain that people are still people a bit — notice I say a bit — and they still have human needs; and they can still feel love and pity, and feelings of friendship.

The question now is whether people are prepared or not to realize that they are dominated by technology. And to realize that technology oppresses them, forces them to undertake certain obligations and conditions them. Their freedom begins when they become conscious of these things. For when we become conscious of that which determines our life we attain the highest degree of freedom.

I must make sure that I can analyze it just as I can analyze a stone or any other object, that I can analyze it and fathom it from all angles. As soon as I can break down this whole technological system into its smallest components my freedom begins. But I also know that, at the same time, I'm dominated by technology. So I don't say, "I'm so strong that technology has no hold on me". Of course technology has hold on me. I know that very well. Just take… a telephone, for example, which I use all the time. I'm continually benefiting from technology.

So we can ask ourselves whether there is really any sense in all this to be investigated. But the search for it cannot be a strictly intellectual activity. The search for sense implies that we must have a radical discussion of modern life. In order to rediscover a sense, we must discuss everything which has no sense. We are surrounded by objects which are, it is true, efficient but are absolutely pointless. A work of art, on the other hand, has sense in various ways or it calls up in me a feeling or an emotion whereby my life acquires sense. That is not the case with a technological product.

And on the other hand we have the obligation to rediscover certain fundamental truths which have disappeared because of technology. We can also call these truths values — important, actual values which ensure that people experience their lives as having sense. In other words, as soon as the moment arrives, when I think that the situation is really dangerous, I can't do anymore with purely technological means. Then I must employ all my human and intellectual capacities and all my relationships with others to create a counterbalance.

That means that when I think that a disaster threatens and that developments threaten to lead to a destiny for mankind, as I wrote concerning the development of technology, I, as a member of mankind, must resist and must refuse to accept that destiny. And at that moment we end up doing what mankind has always done at a moment when destiny threatens. Just think of all those Greek tragedies in which mankind stands up against the destiny and says: No, I want mankind to survive; and I want freedom to survive.

At such a moment, you must continue to cherish hope, but not the hope that you will achieve a quick victory and even less the hope that we face an easy struggle. We must be convinced that we will carry on fulfilling our role as people. In fact, it is not an insuperable situation. There is no destiny that we cannot overcome. You must simply have valid reasons for joining in the struggle. You need a strong conviction. You must really want people to remain, ultimately, people.

This struggle against the destiny of technology has been undertaken by us by means of small scale actions. We must continue with small groups of people who know one another. It will not be any big mass of people or any big unions or big political parties who will manage to stop this development.

What I have just said doesn't sound very efficient, of course. When we oppose things which are too efficient we mustn't try to be even more efficient. For that will not turn out to be the most efficient way.

But we must continue to hope that mankind will not die out and will go on passing on truths from generation to generation.

Mind Control - The Mechanics of Mind Control - Tools for the Awakening

Control Of Our Minds

Our minds control how we think, feel and react to every situation in life. Without training our brains to match how we train our bodies, we won’t be able perform at our best. This week, figure out on scale of 1 to 10 how you feel when you are at your
Our minds control how we think, feel and react to every situation in life. Without training our brains to match how we train our bodies, we won’t be able perform at our best. This week, figure out on scale of 1 to 10 how you feel when you are at your

HAARP, Mind Control technology - Dr. Nick Begich - Technology is Humanity s Double Edged Sword

When Technology Betrays Us..

I would also like to add another perspective on the fallacies and misuse and abuse of and being determined, ourselves, by technology and technique in the present-day environment of 'Techne". We are thus informed by Robert Vamosi that:

A few seconds before the Pembroke-Swansea special came barreling down the railway tracks to crush her car, Paula Ceely sensed something was wrong. Shortly after nightfall, the 20-year-old college student had got out of her car in the pouring rain to open a gate blocking the road ahead. Ceely had used a borrowed TomTom mobile GPS unit to navigate the nearly 240 kilometers of rural road from Redditch, Worcestershire, to her boyfriend's parents' house in Carmarthenshire. It was her first visit.

Judging by the illuminated GPS display on the dashboard device, Ceely was just a few miles shy of her final destination, and the road ahead should have been clear. When Ceely started opening what she thought was a farmer's access gate, she did not realize there were railway tracks underfoot until the train, blowing its whistle, slammed into the tiny Renault Clio behind her. "I could feel the air just pass me," Ceely told the BBC shortly afterwards, "and then my car just did a 360-degree turn on the tracks and was knocked to the other side."

Ceely is not alone. In late 2006 and early 2007, a mini-epidemic of mobile GPS-related mishap... was making headlines worldwide: a 43-year-old man in Bremen, Germany, turned left when instructed and drove his Audi right on to a tramway; another 20-year-old woman in England followed her dashboard GPS and drove her Mercedes SL500 down a closed road outside the village of Sheepy Magna and into the swollen nearby River Sense; and a man in Australia turned off a highway prematurely, driving through a construction site before stopping his SUV on the concrete steps of a new building.

It's not that consumer-grade dashboard GPS systems are, collectively, at fault. Something else was happening when these commercially available GPS-enabled devices started hitting the larger population -- something more fundamental. Instead of lifting our heads, looking around and thinking for ourselves, some of us no longer saw the world as human beings have for thousands of years -- and simply accepted whatever our GPSs showed us.

In order to reach the masses, technology vendors have taken shortcuts. Software wizards whisk us through otherwise complex configuration settings, interfaces have fewer and fewer options for advanced settings, and consumer goods are produced to be magic boxes whose internal components don't involve the end user. Along the way, we've introduced some unintended consequences.

But what if our dashboard GPS systems deliberately misled us? In spring 2007, Andrea Barisani and Daniele Bianco showed a video at the 2007 CanSecWest security conference in Vancouver, British Columbia, in which the GPS unit in Barisani's 2006 Honda Civic displayed a text alert warning of a terrorist threat near his home in Trieste, Italy. Other rogue messages the two Italian researchers had injected into consumer GPS devices included more innocuous notifications such as "Bullfights Ahead".

This alert information doesn't come from satellites locked in geosynchronous orbit; rather, traffic alerts are sent locally via a ten-year-old radio protocol that satellite radio stations use to populate song names and details on dashboard entertainment screens. It didn't take long before someone figured out how to manipulate this protocol. Since roadside GPS alerts are not encrypted, anyone with the right equipment and knowledge of the signal used by the dashboard device could do this. The reverse is also true: someone could block an emergency message in a denial-of-service attack. Thus, anyone with a low-power radio transmitter who knows the frequency used by a GPS unit can broadcast information -- true or false -- to passing travelers.

Not only can people send false information to our devices, they can also obtain personal data from us without our knowledge. Apple uses an iPhone's Wi-Fi internet connection to trace it to a physical location. In 2008, a team of researchers in Zurich, Switzerland, found ways in which the Apple Wi-Fi location network could be compromised. The iPad, iPhone and iPod Touch query the nearest wireless access points and transmit that information to a database, where it is correlated with a physical address (longitude and latitude). The Swiss researchers, however, fed this service incorrect information, telling the Apple service that the iPhone was in New York City when it was still in Zurich.

But what if this vulnerability could be used with a more ominous intent? Two years earlier, security researcher Terry Stenvold published similar findings in 2600, a popular hacker magazine. Stenvold found that he could steal someone else's hardware specifications -- for example, the unique ID of a mobile phone or the unique hardware ID of a laptop -- then upload that information to a location service and have the service tell him that person's current location. Here technology could be used surreptitiously to track, for example, an ex-partner's current location.

Already, third parties can capture our location information and store it for an indefinite period. Have we considered the long-term consequences of this? How might a random trip to a seedy part of town look ten years later? What if it wasn't random? With enough data, what hidden patterns of obsessive behavior might emerge? Or what if we could spoof our current location to make it appear that we are always at work when we are really not? Should we trust such location data?

"I don't trust many hardware devices. It's scary," says Joe Grand, president of San Francisco-based product design and development company Grand Idea Studio. "People using products today don't often think about what the device is actually doing. The product is helping you do whatever it is you want, but it might also be watching you or doing something nefarious."

In the summer of 2009, Grand figured out how to get unlimited free parking in San Francisco. Working with fellow researchers Jacob Appelbaum and Chris Tarnovsky, Grand studied the 23,000 "smart" parking meters being installed around the city as part of a $35 million (£21 million) pilot project. Grand and Appelbaum wandered around San Francisco with a portable oscilloscope and special SIM card that fits into the parking meter's smart card socket.

Their set-up -- essentially a digital form of eavesdropping -- allowed them to monitor and capture all electronic communication between the card and the meter. In just three days, using nothing more than a pen and paper, Grand managed to decipher enough of the communication between the smart card and parking meter to figure out how value was deducted from the card. In the following days, he created his own smart card and programmed it to behave exactly like a legitimate San Francisco card -- the difference was only that Grand was able to set the value to whatever he wanted.

Grand created a counterfeit card worth $999.99. He also found he could freeze that maximum value -- not have it decrease with each use -- and thus make his one-time-use card eternal. This would give him free parking in San Francisco forever. With further research, he says, he could have modified the audit logs, for example. He also could have cleared the coin count. "Say you cut me off and steal my parking space," he says. "Now you go put in your money and walk away, I could clear the meter. That's a denial of service. Then you'll get a ticket. And now you have to pay it." Grand took his concerns to San Francisco's Municipal Transit Authority. It acknowledged that the San Francisco system had such flaws. But the authority told him it wasn't interested in defending against high-tech attacks.

"Once you allow a system to connect to a network," says Grand, "Then it's open to a whole different side of attacks. You don't even need to be a hardware hacker. You could be a network hacker or a software hacker. Now you're in a brand-new world."

The more complex technology becomes, the easier a device is to break. Cybercriminals don't necessarily have to know more than we do about a given technology, they just need to know how to defeat it. A group of young carjackers in Indonesia, for instance, will, out of frustration when confronted with a state-of-the-art biometric-protected luxury auto, simply cut off the victim's index finger and use the severed digit's fingerprint to steal the vehicle. In another take on this criminal realm, a streetwise thug in Prague who today uses a laptop with software downloaded from the internet to steal cars is essentially no smarter than the thief who used a screwdriver and a pair of scissors to hot-wire a car ten years ago.

Thanks to a combination of Moore's Law (it says the number of transistors placed on a chip will double every two years) and the passage of time, the costs of hardware attacks have come down dramatically. For example, an individual with a modern dual core processor in a Dell laptop, loaded with the right software, will be able to defeat a 20-year-old encryption algorithm not in a matter of days, but a matter of minutes.

A cyber-criminal can eavesdrop on a public wireless session by performing a "man-in-the-middle" (MitM) attack. This requires setting up a duplicate public access point (AP) using another computer (typically a laptop or smartphone). The attacker adds an antenna to the laptop, then rebroadcasts the actual settings of the legitimate AP so that an unsuspecting café or airport patron logs on to the stronger fraudulent signal.

Unless your firewall informs you, you won't necessarily know this has happened with a Wi-Fi connection. So although you do connect to the internet, you do so through the cybercriminal's laptop. However, to the end user connecting through a criminal's laptop, the internet experience is no different from normal.

Also dubbed "evil-twin attacks," these MitM attacks allow a cybercriminal to "sniff," or read, any data the victim is sending via the internet, such as the login ID and password for an online banking account or any email sent without encryption.

A few years ago, the end user could protect him or herself by switching to a virtual private network ( VPN), which encrypts the connection. Nowadays, criminal attacks are getting more and more sophisticated; cyber-criminals can grab the data before encryption in what's called a "man-in-the-browser" attack by installing malware on to your computer.

The convenience of public Wi-Fi is possible, in part, because of arguably dangerous defaults. If you're just surfing the web, then you aren't risking too much on a public Wi-Fi access point. But if you log on from a free, public internet café, hotel or airport waiting area, then you're risking a lot. Wireless signals can be captured or sniffed by others with the right equipment. Let's start with a basic wireless internet public system. First, access must be convenient, so the identity of the access point must be clear: it may broadcast "Airport Café" for all to see. Sometimes there is no password to make it easier for random customers to use the network. And when there is a password, often it is obvious or easy to remember. Unfortunately, Windows remembers these commonly used APs. This is convenient if you want your laptop to work instantly with your home network. But there's an obvious dark side to such convenience.

Most people never change their home router's default information, so there are plenty of "Linksys" and "Netgear" service set identifiers. A criminal could broadcast one of these common router names and connect to your wireless laptop. Microsoft patched this flaw, but Windows XP still connects to an ad hoc network if its name agrees with the internal list kept by the laptop.

How might this be prevented? Another unique identifier assigned to each device is the media access control (MAC) address composed of six octets, which contain eight bits each. The first three octets usually identify the manufacturer and the remaining three are specific to the item itself. So an instrument can additionally be fingerprinted using its MAC address. Thus, a router can be configured to connect only with specific MAC addresses; this works for a home router, but not a public router.

Connecting to a wireless network is complex, and router companies would not have much of a market if they did not create shortcuts and simplify the process. In 2006, a report commissioned by the Consumer Electronics Association found that almost one in ten customers had returned a home network router, hub, bridge or modem within the previous year.

Of those returned, only 15 percent were truly defective; the rest had been returned because the average consumer simply could not figure out how to make them work. So what did the router companies do? They created wizards that walk users through the basic steps necessary to connect to their internet service providers. These wizards don't mention all the possible security configurations; manufacturers just want consumers to connect -- and stop calling their customer-service lines.

Beyond Wi-Fi, smartphones offer internet access via standards such as Evolution-Data Optimized, also known as CDMA2000, and EDGE. Additionally, for GSM, there's the GPRS standard, which can bridge different networks (for example, 2.5G and 3G). By default, many mobile devices today support more than radio systems, among them GPRS/EDGE and 802.11 (aka Wi-Fi); this is so that end users receive uninterrupted data and internet service no matter where they roam.

One of the first signs of a possible mobile MitM attack, says Paul Henry, a security and forensic analyst at IT security firm Lumension, is a pop-up certificate for a website or portal you regularly visit. "That you're prompted to accept a new certificate on a familiar site should be a red flag," he says. Because we're using a mobile phone, adds Henry, we simply accept the new certificate and carry on with our business, unwittingly allowing messages to be intercepted from that point on.

Wi-Fi-enabled smartphones create some interesting attack vectors. If you're conducting mobile banking, having someone eavesdrop on an unencrypted banking session could be a real problem. Even a MitM attack within a GPRS network is a credible real risk, says Henry. In another scenario, he adds, someone could be connected via Wi-Fi to a local AP inside a corporate campus and also use the GPRS connection to the outside world, effectively mining the corporate network from afar.

Digital Cameras that store the date and time and even the original image can betray us. Unlike their film counterparts, they automatically imprint a lot of extra data in what's called exchangeable image file format (EXIF) embedded within each image file. Some camera manufacturers also use a similar format called raw image format, which includes a variety of data from the camera. Either way, data is collected that you often don't see or think about.

If you never crop or otherwise alter the photo, EXIF poses minimal risk and numerous benefits. But if you crop an ex-partner out of the picture, the preview image with partner will sometimes remain within the digital file itself. This is like exposing redacted information in a Word document stored on a government website.

Photos uploaded online today, especially those taken with mobile devices, have the ability to identify the date and time, as well as the exact spot where the photographer stood, as GPS data is incorporated into the image file. Years from now, that information might be valuable, say, in recreating a classic photo. But consider the unintended ways this information might be used. What if you tell your boss you're taking a couple of sick days, when photos online reveal that you were actually attending a festival?

iPhone, BlackBerry and Android devices automatically take images with geolocation-enabled EXIF. Ben Jackson of independent US security research firm Mayhemic Labs noticed this. Although their primary goal is to "do cool stuff " in vulnerability and malware research, the staff at Mayhemic Labs may be best known for creating a site called ICanStalkU.com. Random tweets that contain images are reposted along with links to a map location, the original tweet, the tweet image and the ability to send a reply to the person.

For his presentation at Next HOPE (Hackers on Planet Earth), a security conference in New York City, Jackson used the information learned from adult-themed images from SexyPeek.com to illustrate what he could learn about anyone posting almost any image online. Through public records, he was able to find a name associated with the house at the latitude and longitude a photo was taken. The owner, however, produced no online presence.

Using Google, Jackson discovered more geotagged images that could be traced back to the same BlackBerry 9000 that had posted the original image, some at the same longitude and latitude as the house, but posted under a different name. Using that different name, Jackson found a Facebook account with a birth date, marital status and friends. The man even had a second Facebook account under another name. That this man was keeping secrets was a fact his wife had herself discovered, writing on her Twitter account that her husband "has more secrets than I've ever guessed, guess that's why he thinks I'm always hiding something, cuz he's hiding stuff" (sic).

All of this Jackson learned from just one photo. He has collected thousands of such pictures. At Next HOPE, Jackson made public his database of information gleaned from TwitPic. He admits not knowing what can be done with the information, other than showing just how much information is being leaked by one single image on a public site.

In the physical world, we're adept at sensing danger. Our ears prick up at strange sounds; our skin tingles when something doesn't feel right; we notice subtle body language in a stranger that makes us suspicious. We are hardwired to recognize the authenticity of another human being by a look in the eye or a firm handshake; yet most of our authentication today occurs digitally, by voice, text or email. We don't know when someone tries to extract personal information from us or eavesdrop using our mobile phone. And whenever we do use technology to authenticate a person, too often we invest in simplistic filters or imperfect biometrics that result in many false positives.

With technology we haven't evolved our survival instincts. We make leaps of faith with new technologies based on very few criteria. Devices today are so complex that often we're just happy to get a new product working. We're too intimidated to change any default settings -- but we should.

Manufacturers that simplify their complex technologies only give us the illusion of control, and this in turn opens the door to greater risk.

We believe that a new technology, such as anti-theft circuitry in our cars, somehow trumps all the real-world experience we've gained over the years. Instead, we should be layering our defenses, such as parking in well-lit spaces or using a physical lock on the steering wheel or brake pedal. But human nature is such that we prefer convenience over effort. We lock only the outermost doors on our houses, because 90 percent of the threat exists there. We may have sensors that tell us whether our windows have been opened, but they won't tell us whether they have been broken. Similarly, we entrust the security of our cars to a single beep-beep. With keyless entry and remote-ignition cars, physical keys have morphed into a single item that both unlocks and starts the car with a touch of a button. But does this one device make the car any safer from theft?

As a result of misplaced trust in our devices, we're leaving behind a trail of electronic breadcrumbs that, when viewed in the aggregate, may suggest patterns others can exploit. Photocopiers remember our sensitive documents and photos posted to the internet reveal our location at the moment they were taken. The consequences of having a tollbooth transponder monitor our daily comings and goings escapes most of us -- until a divorce lawyer uses that rather bland data to construct a rich narrative about how we were, on certain afternoons between 4 and 6pm, having an affair.

By adding contactless broadcast systems to our worker-access badges, driver's licenses and passports, we're speeding up the authentication process -- but we're also creating new kinds of identity theft. Cloning wireless signals is easy. With no authentication and often with little or no encryption, or with trivial encryption, I can become you without ever coming into physical contact with you or your papers or effects. Additionally, retailers are embedding RFID tags in the products we buy. While no personal information is revealed and the tags themselves have only serial numbers, collectively these product tags create a unique electronic proxy that becomes a de facto consumer, and this can now be tracked from store to store.

There is a dark side, a secret life, to smartphones, MP3 players, digital cameras and new wireless laptops that most of us never glimpse; that is, until something goes awry.

We no longer read the manual before powering on; we demand intuitive interfaces that appear up and running right away, while often masking important security settings. Studies show we want complexity, perceiving devices with more capabilities as having more value, even if we don't understand how they work. But how we use devices is only half of the problem; the other half is the hardware itself. We fail to recognize that these same devices can fail. Or that they can be made to lie. Or track our every move.

Be virtually pollution free

Advanced Clean Technology Pvt Ltd is an environmentally conscious industrial energy company focused on providing renewable energy, resource-recovery and recycling solutions for commodities which otherwise end up in landfills. Especially waste tyres i
Advanced Clean Technology Pvt Ltd is an environmentally conscious industrial energy company focused on providing renewable energy, resource-recovery and recycling solutions for commodities which otherwise end up in landfills. Especially waste tyres i

Technology, Technique And Protecting Nature

Technology has now reached the point at which it is a law unto itself, "Depends only on itself," and "maps its own route." Fifty years ago one might have spoken of the interdependence of technology and nature; now technology has the upper hand. In fact, it takes more technology to save nature from technology, and so its power spreads."(Ellul)

In a similar fashion, we speak of saving ourselves from governmental centralization by devolution towards the peripheries. Yet to enact this process and keep it functioning requires more technique, so that the system grows apace. "Inside the technical circle, the choice among methods, mechanisms, organizations, and formulas is carried out automatically."(Ellul)

Individuals still play a role, they invent the various tools, they make new bureaucratic protocols, etc., but what counts is the "anonymous accretion of conditions for the leap ahead." Generally speaking, only "minimal human intervention" is needed to create or improve something; "literally anyone can do the job, provided he is trained to it" (a point that would be supported by Heisenberg). The entire system should be understood as an "‘organism’ tending towards closure and self-determination."

Soon supercomputers will alone be able to create programs for other supercomputers. The main issue is that, in its evolution towards an advanced state, technology tends more and more to dominate humanity itself. "Man," sums up Ellul, "is reduced to the level of a catalyst."(Ellul) The sense of helplessness can be overwhelming.

No one doubts that technology saves lives and cuts down on drudgery, though not on work. The real moral problem of the system is that everything is situated in relation to it, so that ultimately all choices become technological ones. "Technological advance will move faster and faster and can never be stopped," writes Heidegger: "In all areas of his existence, man will be encircled ever more tightly by the forces of technology. These forces, which everywhere and every minute claim, enchain, drag along, press and impose upon man under the form of some technical contrivance or other—these forces . . . have moved long since beyond his will and have outgrown his capacity for decision."(Winner) Mumford and René Dubos have arrived at similar conclusions.

Left to itself, technology so thoroughly subordinates human ends to technical means that those ends are lost. Tools were formerly moulded by the rhythms of the body, which conferred the primacy of the human over the artificial. When the tool was replaced by the clock, comments Franco Piperno, the human body had the bewildering experience of being synchronized with the rhythm of the machine; the time of the machine builds a nest in the body of the worker—think for instance of Charlie Chaplin’s film Modern Times.

The advent of the computer, finally, introduces a time that escapes the very possibility of experience. In computer time a second is a "gigantic dilation" of the present; concepts of time and memory are transformed on mathematical lines. We no longer become caricatures of ourselves, as in Chaplin; we cease resembling ourselves.

"The central aim of information knowledge is not the completeness and coherence of facts and judgments on the world, but rather the optimization of procedures, be they for decisions, diagnosis, management, or planning. Information knowledge incessantly transforms procedures so that the action may be more effective and, above all, faster."(Franco Piperno)

Other graphic symptoms of this apparently unstoppable growth of technology are the global ecological crisis, intellectual devastation by the media and advertisement, bureaucratism, the strangulating and labyrinthine transportation system, architectural gigantism, and what Mumford calls "the suppression of personal, communal, and regional individuality by a kind of tasteless, homogenized universalism."(Lewis Mumford)

One of the most effective ways that technique communicates is by images. Marshall McLuhan, Guy Debord, and Neil Postman have long since informed on our spectacle-oriented, audio-visual culture.Terrence Gordon. An avalanche of images from morning to night, via television, film, computer, and the rest of the mass media, has smothered the humanities, not to mention literary culture. Voracious consumers of images, we use them even where they are not strictly necessary. We blame the growth of visual culture for the surfeit of classroom miseries as students struggle to arrive at the meaning of not especially cryptic poems.

But we fail to connect this failure with the underlying technological imperatives that we embrace elsewhere. What goes unexamined is how, at a deeper level, technology and visual culture share a common basis, have evolved alongside each other, and have drastically shrunk the domain of literary language. "Contemporary culture in its now global communications context," writes Don Ihde, "is increasingly embodied through its instrumentarium . . . image technologies."(Don Ihde)

To begin with, the continuous parade of images would be impossible without technology; this alone accounts for the nonstop invasion and multiplication of images within every corner of daily life. Like technology, images—still or moving, speaking images—operate on the principle of least effort. Useful, fast, and efficient, they enable us to grasp the total gist of something at a glance: "sight saves us the trouble of thinking and having to remember."

Because of their association with vision, images pack a high degree of realism, currentness, and objectivity, even when on other grounds we are convinced of their falsehood (for example, in advertising). Images are "accepted as reality and identified with it," says Ellul; "we think we are reflecting on facts, but they are only representations."(Ellul)

Critical responses to Gulf War news broadcasts revealed "the simultaneous immediate awareness of the viewers that the news was being ‘cooked’ and yet its planned effect was accepted and even celebrated." Image-mediated sight frames and detaches an object, diminishes depth, alters contrast; it is non-isomorphic with objects ("virtual reality" is more virtual than real); and it is constructive (time reversals, flashbacks, special effects, discontinuities).(Ihde) We are hurried along by the multiplicity of images and ride on their gleaming surfaces; like technology, they have no insides, no interiority. Images move us from stimulus to response in a flash, programmatically, without the discourse of reason, involving "a kind of direct communication of knowledge, as if it did not pass through the brain," like pressing a button or buying a product ("impulse buying").(Ellul)

Instead of reading a book, children and teenagers prefer to play video games because it is easier, more immediate, "more fun"; the whole mind does not have to work as hard to think up and imagine forth: the principle of least effort. Video games, so full of rules and operative procedures, and so relatively contentless, adapt the young not only to the physical apparatus, but to the formalisms and methods of technological society (one game rule book runs to forty pages). It is said that current college students are the Nintendo generation, having grown up with the computer as entertainment.

The computer’s real triumph arrives with the next generation, now ages twelve through fifteen, for whom the computer is primarily a "learning tool" and "extension of the faculties," though what has happened is an introjection of the principles of technique into young minds, and narrowed sensibilities.

Let it be granted that images can convey certain forms of knowledge quickly and easily—chiefly scientific knowledge, which is today the model of knowledge. Ellul concedes that in some fields a picture is worth a thousand words; science and social science require sketches and diagrams since many of their propositions cannot be expressed in words. The issue is the dominance of image-based culture as a whole, not only the deluge of images, but their quality: basic, ideographic, exaggerated, coarse by the standards of high art.

Think of the computer-created Disney feature films. The content of these simplified cartoon images was determined by the forms of technology—efficiency, speed, economy, segmentation, conformity, etc. Compare the industrial colors and standardized faces of these cartoon persons or animals with the real thing, or, say, with an engraving of a rabbit by Albrecht Dürer. A rabbit by Dürer is beautiful and has much in common with a real rabbit. Yet people prefer a Disney rabbit to a Dürer rabbit or the real thing. Disney World in Orlando is the single most "touristed" spot in the world, with over thirty-million visitors a year. All of Italy with its thirty splendid cities has only twenty-four million visitors a year.(Susan Schneider, et al)

Currently, one of the most popular tourist spots in France is Cluny: not the real abbey of Cluny, which was destroyed in the early nineteenth century; rather, a vast computer-simulated reconstruction of it in a museum adjoining the original grounds. If people were genuinely interested in the history of Cluny or the monks of the Middle Ages, they could have read half a dozen books in half the time it took them to get there.

They could have gone to see a realabbey. Instead they chose to "experience" a visual stunt. As one advocate remarks on this new direction in entertainment: "the ‘virtuality’ machine involves a full immersion in computerized programs that will provide contact in real time [i.e. the answers of the operator will interact with the human ‘proprioceptor system’]. The machine, which for all intents and purposes is a journey in itself, offers a wide range of getaway places and tourist settings.

This type of anticipatory experience with its plausible interactive relationship could reinforce the déjà vufeeling even further and perhaps condition the psychology of perception in a way which one cannot yet foresee."(Giuli Parrinello) One may recall the decadent Des Esseintes in Huysman’s À rebours: to save himself the trouble of traveling to London, he simulates the feelings of being there, at a railway pub, listening to a few Englishmen, on a drizzly day, in Paris.

Ihde argues that image technologies overcome the conflict between high and popular culture, delivering a "pluriculture" or "multiple otherness." News broadcasts comprise bits and pieces of information, countries, products; MTV transmits a "multicultural mix of musics, fashions, ethnic traditions, human races." The non-linear, jumpy, novel content resembles the form, its technique; this has become the model for many kinds of programming. "Ordinary space-time is here technologically deconstructed and reconstructed in a bricolage image of space-time." The model both mirrors current experience and promotes it everywhere. "One may pick and choose culture fragments, multiply choices, and in the process reflectively find one’s own standards often provincial or arbitrary." (Given the superficiality of much programming, these choices are more often illusory than real.) The image technologies, concludes Ihde, diffuse a relativizing spirit that is "non-neutrally acidic to all traditional cultures."(Ihde) Since we live less and less in ordinary space-time and more and more in technologically mediated space-time, we may discern the lineaments of a wholly new type, the young man or woman of our time.

More than simply fabricating the hyper-real environment, technology constructs the technicized individuals that navigate through it. Here its image investment pays off enormously: a functional, simplified imagery, as on a computer screen, is the one best means to adapt people to the efficient, streamlined technological environment, which needs visually oriented people to expand and reticulate, if only for the sheer amount of information to be processed and disseminated.

Technicization begins in earliest childhood (hence the power of Disney and the like) and then permeates all levels of the educational system. First, the goal was a television in every classroom, now it is a computer on every desk. Pictures in textbooks used to be ornamental and subservient to the content; "now the text has become the explanation of the images." Who could say that students are learning more? In current guidebooks, pictures and cutaways have seized the lion’s share of the page. One series (significantly entitledEyewitness) announces itself, "The Guides that Show You What Others Only Tell You" (one glossy cutaway glides down the Grand Canal in Venice).

The audio-visual method, Deweyesque learning-as-doing, the denigration of memory as mere rote, all have set a premium on speaking a foreign language rather than reading it, though for most people speaking the language will be exceedingly rare, and meanwhile sacrificed is a reading of Leopardi, Baudelaire, and Rilke. What one receives from school is minimal by comparison to captivating home video and the computer screen. Without realizing it, those who have grown up in a technological society "have a need to live through images." Ellul underscores the evenness of the exchange: "technique requires visually oriented people. And people living in a technical milieu require that everything be visualized."(Ellul) In this way the system makes the very product it feeds upon.

Today's African Media And Media In Africa...

The Media Should Be Known and Understood: Our People-Centered Culture Is Compatible with The Techne Zeitgeist...

Extension of Africans

When we begin to acknowledge and Understand the Media and its mediums, we may be able to decipher the gap between Media and its mediums and the shaping of our perceptions of images and mass consumed media experience, that affects and effects our reality, through the created "false media reality'.That, it is incumbent on us to UNDERSTAND THE MEDIA"!

The existence of the media in its present formats means that we are willing and unwilling participants in a media environment that is not of our liking,making and neither under our control. This is one aspect and facet of our struggles we are not addressing clearly, definitively and clearly.

We need to recall, at least that much we know, that the present state, existence, manifestation and the real form and format all these media rake-in and take are shaped by the researched history of public relations, media manipulation and dissemination designed to meet the aims, needs and goals of these Media Mogul and Western powerful Conglomerates and their government's national and International interests.

As Noam Chomsky once pointed out that that the present media systems "engineer consent" in the process forging and conditioning 'public attitudes'. What this means is as once put by one leading practitioner that, "This is an intellectual tradition that shed light not only on the emergence of public relations, but on the proliferation of images as tools of persuasion over the past century."

As Africans, when we study these techniques and ways and means of media and how these impact on us, we get a different image, reality and distorted media not in our service, but as an additional tool of our oppression, confusion and dysfunction.

We shall have to begin working on Understanding the Media and its Mediums and its effects and affects on us. That is, we have to begin to know and master the ways of knowing and learning about how the "Media Engineers Consent" from us and within our polity. In order to understand the history significance of visual communication, "The Crowd" remains a required reading.

McLuhan writes: "As our proliferating technologies have created a whole series of new environments, men have become aware of the arts as 'anti-environments' or "counter-environments" that provide us with the means of perceiving the environment itself. According to Hall, 'men are never aware of the ground rules of their environmental systems and cultures. Today technologies and their consequent environments succeed each other so rapidly that one environment makes us aware of the social consequences of technology.'

McLuhan continues:

"Art as anti environment becomes more than ever a means of training perception and judgement. Art offered as a consumer commodity rather than as a means of training perception is as ludicrous and snobbish as always. We are entering the new age of education that is programmed for discovery rather than instruction. ... TV has provided a new environment of low visual orientation and high involvement that makes accommodation to our older educational establishment quite different. ...

"But TV is only one component of the electric environment of instant circuitry that has succeeded the old world of the wheel and nuts and bolts"...
We learn much more further from McLuhan that Today, after more than a century of electric technology, we have extended our central nervous system itself in a global embrace, abolishing both space and time as far as our planet is concerned. Am talking about the World Wide Web, here...

"Rapidly, we approach the final phase of the extensions of man-the technological simulation of consciousness, when the creative process of knowing will be collectively and corporately extended to the whole of human society, much as we have already extended our senses and our nerves by various media … Any extension, whether of skin,hand, or foot, affects the whole psychic and social complex."

So that, Le Bon saw the "crowd as a temperamental monster impelled by dark and irrational forces. Among crowds, the conscious life of the mind is of small importance in comparison with its unconscious life. The "crowd" was driven by impulsiveness, irritability, incapacity to reason, absence of judgement. It is not driven by its mind, but by its spinal cord."

If we begin to understand some of these media theories, we begin to see ourselves in the mix of things with ease. Understanding the media is a prerequisite for us to dealing with our present conditions. The media and its apparatuses collates us as a collective mass or crowd and deal with us from the "crowd" mentality and psyche perspective in hawking its products/wares, or misdirecting us according to its whims and interests and techniques

In short, we also have style today which is an incongruous cacophony of images, strewn across the social landscape. Style may be borrowed from any source and turn up in a place where it is least expected. The stylish person may look like a duchess one week, a murder victim next. Style can hijack the visual idiom of astronauts, or poach from the ancient peagantry of Guatemala peasants costumes or those from the Brazilian Carnival, or the Zulu, Xhosa, etc., dress traditions and so forth…

My point in introducing such a complex subjects as "Understanding The Media" is that, there are various techniques and effects and affects embedded within the automation and electrification of Media and its intention to control the consuming mass populace, and maximize its profits and existence. To effect its maximum application, Jacques informs us that, "Any invention or technology is an extension or self-amputation of our physical bodies, and such extension also demands new ratios or new equilibriums among other organs and extensions of the body". ...

So that, "To behold, use or perceive any extension of ourselves in technological form is necessarily to embrace it. To listen to radio or to read the printed page is to accept these extensions of ourselves into our personal system and undergo the "closure" or displacement of perception that follows automatically." This really means that we have no choice in this matter but become extension of our emerging and burgeoning technologies and techniques.

We are extended by our cell phones and are sold to its brands without having no time to understand the present ones in our hands and lives. The technologies we use and are addictive, and displace our reality and replace it with a promise of a "packaged" commodity that will enhance, not satisfy our technologically compromised manifestations and existences.

McLuhan adds that: "It is this continuous embrace of our own technology in our daily use that puts us in the Narcissus role of subliminal awareness and numbmness in relation to these images of ourselves. By continuously embracing technologies, we relate ourselves to them as servomechanisms. That is why we must, to use them at all, serve these objects, these extensions of ourselves, as gods or minor religions....

Physiologically, man in the normal use of technology )or his variously extended body) is perpetually modified by it and in turn finds ever new ways of modifying his technology. Man becomes, as it were, the sex organs of the machine world. As the bee of the plant world, enabling it to fecundate and to evolve ever new forms, the machine world reciprocates man's love by expediting his wishes and desires, namely in providing him with wealth.

One of the merits of motivation research has been the revelation of man's sex relation to the motorcar[Will talk to this point made here by McLuhan in some other time and post]. (McLuhan)

We get a better heads-up when McLuhan concludes for us that: "The principle of numbness comes into play with electric technology, as with any other. We have to numb our central nervous system when it is extended and exposed, or we will die (Just like we have to suspend disbelief when watching a movie, or else we might walk out and never watch it-my addition). Thus the age of anxiety and of electric media is also the age of the unconscious and apathy . But it is strikingly the age of consciousness of the unconscious, in addition.

"With our central nervous system strategically numbed, the tasks of conscious awareness and order are transferred to the physical life of man, so that for the first time he has become aware of technology as an extension of his physical body. Apparently the means of instant, total field-awareness. With such awareness, the subliminal life, private and social, has been hoicked up into full view, with the results that we have "social consciousness" presented to us as a cause of guilt-feelings.

"Existentialism offers a philosophy of structures, rather than categories, and of total social involvement instead of the bourgeois spirit of individual separateness or points of view. In the electric age we wear mankind as our skin." (McLuhan)

"In approaching and dealing with the emerging and submerging technologies, we cannot overlook the fact the effect they have on our human information and interaction realities. We cannot use the outmoded ways of communication dealing with the present state of communication, media and their mediums. Adjustments will have to be made and Understanding the media become imperative".

As in the case of South Africa and elsewhere in the world, the gizmos and gadgets we depend on and use for our mere existence have packaged in them techniques that modify our beingness and reality. If we choose to discard and ignore these effects, we do so to our own peril. So that McLuhan intones that, "The aspiration of our time for wholeness, empathy and depth of awareness is a natural adjunct of electric technology… The age of mechanical industry preceded us found vehement assertion of private outlook the natural mode of expression."

Every culture and every age has its favorite model of perception and knowledge that it is inclined to prescribe for everybody and everything. The mark of our rime is its revulsion against imposed patterns. Robert Theobald said of economic depressions: "There is one additional factor that has helped to control depressions, and that is a better understanding of their development."

So that, examination of the origin and development of the individual extensions of man should be preceded by a look at some general aspects of the media, extensions of man, beginning with the never explained numbness that each extension brings about in the individual and society. (McLuhan)

As Africans, the world over, we sometimes do not really dig deeper into the meanings and realities brought about by these new technologies which we use as leaders of our people, and our people, en-masse, use them too. Studying the effects and affects these new emerging and merging technologies should be studied as to what their intentions are, what their techniques are, what it is that they do to us and what can we do about that from becoming aware of them.

We have to begin understand that these new technologies and techniques(for a given stage of development) in every field of human activity. Its characteristics are new; the technique of the present has no common measure with that of the past; and new technologies bring along with them Techniques. According to Jacques, "Technique is a 'blind' force, but one which unfortunately seems to be more perspicacious than the best discernible human intelligences."

The term technique," Jacques writes, as he uses it, "does not mean machines, technology, or this or that procedure for attaining an end. In our technological society [technique is the totality of methods rationally arrived at and having absolute efficiency-for a given stage of development) in every field of human activity. Its characteristics are new; the technique of the present has no common measure with that of the past."

Understanding the media then is understanding the definition of terms that apply and operate within the present technological societies in a global mosaic and extending man in all directions, shapes, form, existences and realities-within multiple environments. In the case of South Africa and elsewhere Africans, barely surviving from domination, colonization and Imperialism, these technologies come into their thriving and resuscitates long established cultures.

Wilson informs us that, "Fundamentally, a people's culture is a mental behavioral system used by them to rationalize and justify, organize and regulate, give meaning and purpose to the individual group behavior, social relations, lives and existence. Culture is essentially a way of thinking, perceiving, evaluating, and interpreting the world; a way of relating to others and to the physical-metaphysical world, and involves an explicit and implicit set of rules of conduct which orders the overall social relations, arrangements and attitudes of a society.

"The power generated buy such social relations, arrangements [alignments] and attitudes is utilized for maintaining and enhancing the well-being and integrity of the society; for procuring, processing and producing the material and non-material products characteristic of the society; and for substantiating its abilities to defend and advance its interests in cooperation with or in opposition to other societies or groups."

The media as we know has had the ability to destroy the African family in many direct and indirect ways. So that, Wilson informs us that, "Dominant groups, in seeking to achieve and maintain their power over subordinate groups, are for this reason compelled in some ways to constrain, restrict, reduce, destabilize, misdirect, or destroy the family systems, and along with those, the communal and cultural systems of the groups they subordinate."

The oppression, distortion and destabilization of the African Families in Africa and the diaspora by White Colonial/Imperial/Corporate white power began with enslavement, colonization followed and is still being run by Imperialism and Corporations, and continues unabated to this day.

The use of the media and its systems is controlled by the former enslavers, colonialists and present Imperialists to maximize profits and re-enslave and control their former slaves, colonized and imperial side-kicks and quislings today.

Once we can link this disparate events and cobble them cohesively from a multi-disciplinary context and stand-point, which will enable to begin to come to terms with the present-day media, and from our cultural and historic perspective, deal with them decisively, and with a finality of a people who have awakened to the glitz and blitz of media and its gizmos. Also, begin to use these new technological societies and knowledge about the media and its gizmos to upgrade Africans, inform Africans and empower all African people-would be a goal worth achieving. This is one topic that is still ongoing and needs to be interrogated more extensively and intensely as it affects, effects and related to African people globally... Understanding The Media...…

Computer Art

 Eyal Gever creates sculptures on a 3D printer, having digitally modeled them on a computer
Eyal Gever creates sculptures on a 3D printer, having digitally modeled them on a computer

Technology and Art: Engineering The Future

Think art. What comes to mind? Maybe Picasso, Rodin, Dali.

Now think technology — and you'll probably imagine a smartphone or a computer.

Throughout history, technology has provided artists with new tools for expression.

Today, these two seemingly distinct disciplines are interlinked more than ever, with technology being a fundamental force in the development and evolution of art.

All over the world, people are engineering our future. The internet, digital fabrication, nano tech, biotech, self-modification, augmented reality, virtual reality, "The singularity" — you name it, all of this is altering our lives and our view of the world and ourselves.

Scientists, software developers, inventors, entrepreneurs — but also musicians, visual artists, film-makers and designers — are busy creating new human experiences.

Thanks to them, not only is original art being made everywhere, but entirely new art forms are evolving as well.

More and more artists are pushing the boundaries of art, looking outside of what's perceived as "traditional" to incorporate other aspects into their work.

Art is becoming less and less static, taking up many new different shapes, from printing digitally created sculptures in 3D to flash-mobs to photographers lining up hundreds of naked volunteers on the beach.

Tare Digi-Art...

Artist Ollie Palmer has created a machine to control the way synthetic pheromone directs ants - hoping this way to stage an 'ant ballet'
Artist Ollie Palmer has created a machine to control the way synthetic pheromone directs ants - hoping this way to stage an 'ant ballet'

New Wave Digital Art... Power of the web

And the rules of the game are changing, too.

Since the beginning of the postmodern art era, roughly from the 1860s, the most influential players — renowned artists, museum curators, art critics, art fair promoters and, especially, powerful gallery owners — have been dictating the behavior of the whole art world.

But modern ways in which art is created, produced, distributed, marketed, preserved and supported have shifted as a direct reaction of the world's transition to a socially connected, digital society — to the age of the internet.

Traditionally, artists have been going to a gallery with their portfolio, and the gallery decides whether the work is good enough to expose.

Now, they turn to the web — to exhibit their work and to sell it, too.

With new services such as crowdfunding, for the first time artists are able to raise money online to pursue their ideas.

In 2011 alone, crowdfunding website Kickstarter raised almost $100m in pledges with more than 27,000 art-related projects.

Artists use social media as a powerful tool to change the relationship between collectors and the public, effectively spotting people looking for specific artworks.

Possibly, the traditional art market — collectors, gallery owners, critics, curators and even other artists — may question whether the artist who uses the web for promotion is a true professional.

But whatever the reaction may be, the change is already happening, and it is too important. The art market will grow on it and get used to it — it always does.

3D Digi Art...

 Sculptures created on a 3D printer look very different from what is known as "traditional" art..
Sculptures created on a 3D printer look very different from what is known as "traditional" art..

Art In The Digital Age..

True art?

Throughout history and up until very recently, mostly the elite participated in the development and creation of art, while the rest of the society was left to enjoy viewing masterpieces.

The public was merely a passive observer.

Today, in our connected world, almost everyone creates. Almost everyone participates.

With the internet and new technologies of fabrication, remixing, editing, manipulating and distributing, it is becoming easier to create things — and share them with the world.

What is changing and probably — arguably — for the worse is that it is now easier to create "art," and we see a lot of "bad" art being created and exposed.

A huge concern is that, as a result of so many new tools and techniques, we may lose our sense and ability to evaluate what is great art.

Digi-Car-Customized-Upgrade...

Every year, tinkerers, engineers and tech enthusiasts display their home-brewed art and technology projects at the World Maker Faire
Every year, tinkerers, engineers and tech enthusiasts display their home-brewed art and technology projects at the World Maker Faire

Link Between Digitalia, Technology and Art

In art, what becomes popular is not necessarily great, and vice-versa. Many new art ideas and artworks were hard to digest when they first came out.

I do see a challenge for artists to be simultaneously more open to new technologies that lead to novel forms of expression, and also staying truly creative and imaginative.

But still, the boundaries are limitless. And as technology, and especially computer technology, continues to progress, there will always be those who will experiment, pushing the envelope of what has been done before — and who will excel at it.

Curator Hans Ulrich Obrist, co-director of the Serpentine Gallery, once said: "I don't think we can predict nor prescribe the future of art. It is the famous 'etonnez-moi' [astonish me] of Diaghilev and Cocteau'-great art always surprises us, takes us where we expect it least."

Bold directions
So what do artists focused on creating new art by using technology really need to think about?

One graphic software developer, Rama Hoetzlein, says that "new media" artists of today have to think not merely about the tools of the present, but also to engage in a dialogue with the artists of the past, who both haunt us and challenge us to rise above the mundane.

I believe that any modern artist needs to remember about pushing the art forward, inventing, defining new paradigms of expression with powerful meanings.

Digital Technology Merging with Art

From The Present Now Technological Society Into The Future

From The Present Now Technological Society Into The Future..

In his essay Benjamin Pope is trying to peer into the human future over the long term, by looking at the types of institutions that survive across centuries and even millennia: Universities, “Churches," economic systems-such as capitalism- and potentially multi-millennial, species — wide projects, namely space colonization.

I liked Pope’s essay a lot, but there are parts of it I disagreed with. For one, I wish he would have included cities. These are the oldest lived of human institutions, and unlike Pope’s other choices are political, and yet manage to far out live other political forms-namely states or empires. Rome far outlived the Roman Empire and my guess is that many American cities, as long as they are not underwater, will outlive the United States.

Pope’s read on religion might be music to the ears of some.

Even the very far future will have a history, and this future history may have strong, path-dependent consequences. Once we are at the threshold of a post-human society the pace of change is expected to slow down only in the event of collapse, and there is a danger that any locked-in system not able to adapt appropriately will prevent a full spectrum of human flourishing that might otherwise occur.

Pope seems to lean toward the negative take on the role of religion to promote “a full spectrum of human flourishing” and , “as a worst-case scenario, may lock out humanity from futures in which peace and freedom will be more achievable.”

The image mankind call ‘the present’ has been written in the light but the material future has not been built. Now it is the mission of people like Grace, and the human species, to build a future. Success will be measured by the contentment, health, altruism, high culture, and creativity of its people. As a species, Homo sapiens-sapiens are hackers of nature’s solutions presented by the tree of life, that has evolved over millions of years.

We can’t help seeing the future of technology as nearly synonymous with the future of our own civilization, and a civilization, when boiled down to its essence, amounts to a set of questions a particular group of human beings keeps asking, and their answer to these questions. The questions in the West and Globally are things like what is the right balance between social order and individual freedom? What is the relationship between the external and internal (mental/spiritual) worlds, including the question of the meaning of Truth? How might the most fragile thing in existence, and for us the most precious-the individual-survive across time? What is the relationship between the man-made world- and culture-visa-vi nature, and which is most important to the identity and authenticity of the individual?

The progress of science and technology intersect with all of these questions, but what we often forget is that we have sown the seeds of science and technology elsewhere and the environment in which they will grow can be very different and hence their application and understanding different based as they will be on a whole different set of questions and answers encountered by a distinct civilization.

. . . And as for how Humanity is steered . . .

Searle wrote; “… one of the ways we might succeed in facing these hurdles is by recovering the ability to imagine what an ideal society, Utopia, might look like.”

I totally agree.

Except for manipulative commercial and propaganda purposes, society has ignored most the jewels of insight that the understanding of human psychology has provided since the 1930s. Humanity is swept along by ongoing competition among the obsolete and demented Ur-myths that various of our world cultures have heretofore childishly, habitually imprinted.

Once suitably harnessed, most citizens reflexively accept, and if goaded and spurred, will hysterically strain with the 'tribe' to propagate and justify their accepted biases. Humanity has wounded itself; been crippled & burdened with self-inflicted misdeeds and character flaws.

Seen in the latest lights of rationality, has the climb toward “progress” merely positioned us at a higher ledge to consider falling from? Whether based upon bible, koran, techno-computer-logic, paleo-archaic retreats, USA exceptionalism, DMT invoked conversations with “machine elves," , etc., neither our traditional, nor trendy, cultural maps appear accurate or attractive enough to be intelligently applied to various species-incriminating trials.

Individually secured, for what it’s worth, I mention the autobiographical myth of Olaf Stapledon, “Star Maker," and its closest derivative documents, as the best map likely to be available to this, or any other, species.

The Present Future In The Future...

Technological Connectivity Merging And Submerging-Linking, Interlinking and Embedding... Will It Betray Us?

The Betrayal Of Technology: Our Use And Abuse/Being Abused And Determined By Technology And Its Technique- The Ellulian Perspective And View..

The Betrayal Of Technology: Our Use And Abuse/Being Abused And Determined By Technology And Its Technique- The Ellulian Perspective And View..

Ellul: One of my best friends is a very competent… was a very competent surgeon. During a discussion in which he participated, about the problems of technology and progress, someone said to him: "You, as a surgeon, surely know everything about the progress in surgery?"

He gave a humorous reply, as always: "I am certainly aware of the progress in the medical field. But just ask yourself the following question: currently, we carry out heart transplants, liver transplant and kidney transplants. But where do those kidneys, that heart and those lungs come from, in fact? They must be healthy organs. Not affected by an illness or the like. Moreover, they must be fresh. In fact, there is just one source: traffic accidents. So, to carry out more operations, we need more traffic accidents. If we make traffic safer, fewer of those wonderful operations will carried out."

Of course, everyone was rather astonished and also somewhat shocked. It was very humorous, but it was also a real question.

"Technology with a ‘T' is not concrete like a machine or electricity. The technology phenomenon has become detached from the machine." — Jacques Ellul

Ellul: One of the illusions which some try to put across to people today is to get them to believe that technology makes them more free. If you just use enough technical aids you will be freer.

Free to do what? Free to eat nice things. That's true, if you have money, that is. Free to buy a car so that you can travel. You can go all the way to the other side of the world. To Tahiti. So you see: technology brings freedom. We can acquire knowledge in the whole world. That's fantastic. So a world of freedom is open to us.

Just to give a small example in connection of the use of cars:

As soon as the holidays begin, three million Parisians decide independently to one another to head for the Mediterranean in their cars. Three million people all decide to do the same thing. So then I ask myself if the car really brings us much freedom. Those people haven't given it a moment's thought that they are, in fact, completely determined by technology and the life they lead. That, in fact, they form a mass. A coherent whole.

In a society such as ours, it is almost impossible for a person to be responsible. A simple example: a dam has been built somewhere, and it bursts. Who is responsible for that? Geologists worked out. They examined the terrain. Engineers drew up the construction plans. Workmen constructed it. And the politicians decided that the dam had to be in that spot. Who is responsible? No one. There is never anyone responsible. Anywhere. In the whole of our technological society the work is so fragmented and broken up into small pieces that no one is responsible. But no one is free either. Everyone has his own, specific task. And that's all he has to do.

Just consider, for example, that atrocious excuse… It was one of the most horrible things I have ever heard. The person in charge of the concentration camp Bergen-Belsen was asked, during the Auschwitz trial… the Nuremberg trials regarding Auschwitz and Bergen-Belsen: "But didn't find you it horrible? All those corpses?" He replied: "What could I do? The capacity of the ovens was too small. I couldn't process all those corpses. It caused me many problems. I had no time to think about those people. I was too busy with that technical problem of my ovens." That was the classic example of an irresponsible person. He carries out his technical task he's not interested in anything else.

In a so-called traditional society such as, for example, Western society in the Middle Ages, technology is controlled by certain rules. Religious rules, for example. In certain civilizations it was, for example, forbidden to work the ground with iron tools. For the earth was considered as mother and you weren't allowed to hurt her in any way with hard tools. That was a rule. For similar reasons the Egyptians didn't used no wheels. The Hyksos had long known about the wheel. So had the Egyptians. But they didn't use it, because it looked like a zodiac. And mortals were not allowed to use zodiac for material purposes.

To be honest, I don't think that the technology of the past is comparable with the technology of the present. In the past technology was a means of achieving a certain aim. Whether that aim was a sculpture or agriculture or hunting, was not important. The technologies used were relatively stabile. They remained more or less the same, and were sometimes very ingenious. The hunting techniques of the Bushmen, for example, were very ingenious. They were incredibly skilled in killing elephants. So their techniques were very clever. But without that element of excessiveness which is a characteristic of technology today.

They were technologies passed on from generation to generation, changing very little. We know, on the basis of the development of technology in Roman times and the Middle Ages that it took a century before technology was changed. Of course, the technology had certain efficiency. But that was fully compensated for by stability.

In the Middle Ages there were religious rules, partly Christian, partly derived from popular belief which related to works and similar matters. And those rules were more important than equipment or tolls. But sometime during the fourteenth or fifteenth century people in the Western world began questioning everything. All the existing certainties and convictions were cast overboard. The concept of tradition was under review.

That's very important. In the past, everything was based on tradition. And suddenly, for example in France in the fifteenth century all traditions were thrown overboard. They were suddenly no longer important. The old values and customs were obsolete. Suddenly, everyone feels free to do what he wants. And at the same time, in the field of science a number of "truths," let's say, were discovered, which undermined the existing convictions. Also dating from that time was the discussion about whether the earth was the centre of the universe. All very typical.

I think that's indeed our greatest tragedy and our greatest sin. We entered those societies with the idea that those people were savages. That they almost weren't human. We didn't realize that there could be well some truth concealed in their concepts. Two examples:

To start with, we gave the impression that we used all the riches of those countries. But then only from our own industrial point of view. So we destroyed the traditional agriculture and replaced it with what we called "industrial" agriculture. That is, peanuts for making oil, coca beans, sugar cane, and so on. And at the same time we forced the members of those societies to obey their conquerors. For contacts were only possible after you had first conquered them. And we always won, because we were much more advanced technologically.

Many fundamental things were destroyed at that time. Things which are necessary in order to be able to live. Where do we come from? What is the point of living? Those people had found an answer to those questions. And we didn't have the right to destroy that answer. We destroyed their social structures and also the whole system of their philosophy of life. Their conceptions of the world and the universe.

What is sacred in one society is not always sacred in another. But people have always respected sacred matters. And if there was a force which destroyed those sacred matters, those elements regarded as sacred in certain society, then this new force was revered and respected by the people. For it was clearly stronger. So there was a new thing that was more sacred than the old one.

What is now so awful in our society is that technology has destroyed everything which people ever considered sacred. For example, nature. People have voluntarily moved to an acceptance of technology as something sacred. That is really awful. In the past, the sacred things always derived from nature. Currently, nature has been completely desecrated and we consider technology as something sacred. Think, for example, on the fuss whenever a demonstration is held. Everyone is then always very shocked if a car is set on fire. For then a sacred object is destroyed.

That is one the basic rules of technology. Without a doubt. Every technological step forward has its price. Human happiness has its price. We must always ask ourselves what price we have to pay for something. We only have to consider the following example. When Hitler came to power everyone considered the Germans mad. Nearly all the Germans supported him. Of course. He brought an end to unemployment. He improved the position of the mark.

He created a surge in economic growth. How can a badly informed population, seeing all these economic miracles, be against him? They only had to ask the question: What will it cost us? What price do we have to pay for this economic progress, for the strong position of the mark and for employment? What will that cost us? Then they would have realized that the cost would be very high. But this is typical for modern society. Yet this question will always be asked in traditional societies. In such societies people ask: If by doing this I disturb the order of things what will be the cost for me?

Wisdom does not come from intellectual reflection. It is achieved in a long process of transfer from generation to generation. (It is) An accumulation of experiences in direct relationship with the natural social climate. Nature served as an example for us. We must divest ourselves of all that. For in a technological society traditional human wisdom is not taken seriously.

Technology also obliges us to live more and more quickly. Inner reflection is replaced by reflex. Reflection means that, after I have undergone an experience, I think about that experience. In the case of a reflex you know immediately what you must do in a certain situation. Without thinking. Technology requires us no longer to think about the things. If you are driving a car at 150 kilometers an hour and you think you'll have an accident. Everything depends on reflexes. The only thing technology requires us is: Don't think about it. Use your reflexes.

Because of its efficiency technology leads to more power. But also to more risks. For efficiency is everything. All else is peripheral. Including risks, therefore. But in the case of more power and greater risks people themselves must change, too. They must be sufficiently independent to control that power and perhaps not to use it fully. And they must try to avoid risks. So it is necessary for people to change quickly so that they can apply the technology in the proper way, not simply efficiently. That is why something must change. As the French philosopher Bergson said long ago, in 1930s: The more power people have the greater strength of mind they need. There must be a kind of refinement. But if people think only of one thing, namely power, and they are given control over means of power they will use that power as quickly as possible without even thinking about it.

Technology will not tolerate any judgment being passed on it. Or rather: technologists do not easily tolerate people expressing an ethical or moral judgment on what they do. But the expression of ethical, moral and spiritual judgments is actually the highest freedom of mankind. So I am robbed of my highest freedom. So whatever I say about technology and the technologists themselves is of no importance to them. It won't deter them from what they are doing. They are now set in their course. They are so conditioned. For a technologist is not free. He is conditioned. By his training, by his experiences and by the objective which he must reach. He is not free in the execution of his task. He does what technology demands of him. That's why I think freedom and technology contradict one another.

Human technology is created from the moment that it is felt that people are unhappy. City dwellers, for example, live in a completely dead environment. Cities consist of brick, cement, concrete, and so on. People cannot be happy in such an environment. So they suffer psychological problems. Mainly as a result of their social climate but also as a result of the speed at which they are forced to live. Yet man is specifically suited for living amidst nature. So man becomes mentally ill. And for the relief of those psychological illnesses there is human technology, just as there is medical technology. But human technology must enable man to live in an unnatural environment. As in the case of deep sea diving. Divers have a deep sea diving suit and oxygen cylinders in order to survive in an abnormal environment. Human technology is just like that.

I know many people who like watching commercials because they're so funny. They provide relaxation and diversion. People come home after a day's work, from which they derive little satisfaction, and feel the need for diversion and amusement. The word diversion itself is already very significant. When Pascal uses the word diversion he means that people who follow the path of God deviate from the path which leads them to God as a result of diversion and amusement. Instead of thinking of God, they amuse themselves. So, instead of thinking about the problems which have been created by technology and our work we want to amuse ourselves. And that amusement is supplied to us by means of technology. But by means of technology which derives from human technology. For example, in a work situation people are offered the diversion which must serve as compensation.

The media era is also the era of loneliness. That's a very important fact. We can also see that in the young. In 1953 you had the so called "rebels without a cause". Students who revolted in Stockholm. That was the first revolt of the young rebels without a cause. They had everything. They were happy. They lived in a nice society. They lacked nothing. And suddenly, on New Year's Eve, they took to the streets and destroyed everything. No one could understand it. But they needed something different from consumption and technology.

If people lose their motive for living two things can happen. It only seldom happens that they can accept that fact. In that case, they develop suicidal tendencies. Usually, either they try to find refuge in diversion. We've already discussed this. Or they become depressed and begin swallowing medicines. So if people become aware of their situation they react to it as usually happens in Western society: they become depressed and discouraged. So they just don't think about their situation and simply carry on. They drive faster and faster. Never mind where, as long as it's fast.

Because of our technology, we now have a world in which the situation of mankind has totally changed. What I mean by that is: mankind in the technological world is prepared to give up his independence in exchange for all kinds of facilities and in exchange for consumer products and a certain security. In short, in exchange for a package of welfare provisions offered to him by society. As I was thinking about that I couldn't help recalling the story in the Bible about Esau and the lentil broth.

Esau, who is hungry, is prepared to give up the blessings and promise of God in exchange for some lentil broth. In the same way, modern people are prepared to give up their independence in exchange for some technological lentils. The point is simply that Esau made an extremely unfavorable exchange and that the person who gives up his position of independence lets himself be badly duped too, by the technological society. It boils down to the fact that he gives up his independence in exchange for a number of lies. He doesn't realize that he is manipulated in his choice. That he is changed internally by advertisements, by the media and so on. And when you think that manipulator, the author of advertisements or propaganda is himself manipulated, then you cannot point to one culprit as being responsible. It is neither the advertiser nor his poor public. We are all responsible, to the same extent.

(In Ellul's library)

These are all books on Karl Marx. Marx, socialism, and so on.

Those are books which I use continually.

Those are mainly poetry books.

And those are my dictionaries and so on.

I always have my poetry books within arm's reach. I read a lot of poetry while I work.

Those are books on the sociology of technology.

And those are books on theology.

When I write a book, I always have a tape recorder handy and a record player which is always on. For virtually every book I select a certain record which I listen to all the time. That's very… A book is associated with certain music, and inspired by it.

Right from the start I have often been sharply criticized in the United States, for example, for allegedly being a Calvinist. And a Calvinist is pessimistic, and so on. But I'm not a Calvinist at all. They haven't understood anything of my theology, but it doesn't matter.

But what does matter is that pessimism in a society such as ours can only lead to suicide. That's why you must be optimistic. You must spend your holiday in Disneyland. Then you are a real optimist. With all that you see there you no longer have to think about anything else. In other words, those who accuse me of pessimism are in fact saying to me: You prevent people from being able to sleep peacefully. So if you let everything to take its course, never interfere, and you just go to sleep peacefully, all will end well.

I would certainly not want my words to be too pessimistic and too inaccessible. And I would like to explain that people are still people a bit — notice I say a bit — and they still have human needs; and they can still feel love and pity, and feelings of friendship.

The question now is whether people are prepared or not to realize that they are dominated by technology. And to realize that technology oppresses them, forces them to undertake certain obligations and conditions them. Their freedom begins when they become conscious of these things. For when we become conscious of that which determines our life we attain the highest degree of freedom.

I must make sure that I can analyze it just as I can analyze a stone or any other object, that I can analyze it and fathom it from all angles. As soon as I can break down this whole technological system into its smallest components my freedom begins. But I also know that, at the same time, I'm dominated by technology. So I don't say, "I'm so strong that technology has no hold on me". Of course technology has hold on me. I know that very well. Just take… a telephone, for example, which I use all the time. I'm continually benefiting from technology.

So we can ask ourselves whether there is really any sense in all this to be investigated. But the search for it cannot be a strictly intellectual activity. The search for sense implies that we must have a radical discussion of modern life. In order to rediscover a sense, we must discuss everything which has no sense. We are surrounded by objects which are, it is true, efficient but are absolutely pointless. A work of art, on the other hand, has sense in various ways or it calls up in me a feeling or an emotion whereby my life acquires sense. That is not the case with a technological product.

And on the other hand we have the obligation to rediscover certain fundamental truths which have disappeared because of technology. We can also call these truths values — important, actual values which ensure that people experience their lives as having sense. In other words, as soon as the moment arrives, when I think that the situation is really dangerous, I can't do anymore with purely technological means. Then I must employ all my human and intellectual capacities and all my relationships with others to create a counterbalance.

That means that when I think that a disaster threatens and that developments threaten to lead to a destiny for mankind, as I wrote concerning the development of technology, I, as a member of mankind, must resist and must refuse to accept that destiny. And at that moment we end up doing what mankind has always done at a moment when destiny threatens. Just think of all those Greek tragedies in which mankind stands up against the destiny and says: No, I want mankind to survive; and I want freedom to survive.

At such a moment, you must continue to cherish hope, but not the hope that you will achieve a quick victory and even less the hope that we face an easy struggle. We must be convinced that we will carry on fulfilling our role as people. In fact, it is not an insuperable situation. There is no destiny that we cannot overcome. You must simply have valid reasons for joining in the struggle. You need a strong conviction. You must really want people to remain, ultimately, people.

This struggle against the destiny of technology has been undertaken by us by means of small scale actions. We must continue with small groups of people who know one another. It will not be any big mass of people or any big unions or big political parties who will manage to stop this development.

What I have just said doesn't sound very efficient, of course. When we oppose things which are too efficient we mustn't try to be even more efficient. For that will not turn out to be the most efficient way.

But we must continue to hope that mankind will not die out and will go on passing on truths from generation to generation.

Hyped Media - Commercialized Environment

Cultural Bankruptcy in Hyper-Commercialized Media Environment

YounJu Kang Wrote the following article…

The current digital media environment is drastically different from that of the past. It is clear that media and technology have become an important medium and interactive communication tool for creating new forms of culture in our modern society. They have become an essential part of our life and various digital media users including artists, educators, and technologists have changed the trends of digital culture.

However, in the contemporary world, a diverse range of messages and creative ideas from independent people are being threatened by the centralization of media ownership such that we are facing a type of cultural bankruptcy in the hyper-commercialized media environment which is manipulated by a few big companies and agencies.

In this essay, I argue that while Internet and other digital media enable peoples to develop their creative mind and thinking, the hyper-commercialized media environment and the centralization of media ownership not only have limited people’s own creative ideas and experiences, but also have caused a type of cultural bankruptcy in modern society.

To support my argument, I will present several examples of the current media environments and personal experience, particularly in relation to music and music industries since music is one of the important mass cultural forms, representing current trends of peoples’ mind and thinking.

Historically, mass cultural forms, especially music have been characterized as an important vehicle for popular expression and communication, allowing us to exchange creative ideas, emotions, and feelings. In the past, popular music was a voice for independent artists and people, and music was a mirror of such issues as social justice as well as communicating democratic ideas and messages. It brought people together and unified them.

However, even though the rich legacy still exists today, now it is more likely to be a kind of property or commodity owned by 4-5 multinational companies. It is as though just star artists, singers, and their agencies virtually control most music markets in the music industry. For instance, what is taking place in the music industry which leads to the creation of mass cultural forms and music? How is it that major media companies can control all mass cultural forms and music? What are the real problems for artists and the common peoples?

There are five superpower media companies in the pop music industry: Sony Music, BMG, AOL Time Warner, Vivendi Universal, and EMI, which control almost 80% of all the music in the world. Each company owns various affiliated media companies. For example, BMG, which is the third largest media company in the world, basically owns BMG Classics, RCA Music Group, and ARISTA Music Groups among others. In the same manner, Sony Music includes Epic, Columbia, Sony Classical, Sony Nashville, Sony Wonder and so on.

The real problem is these companies control most promotions and commercial outlets, such as radio, TV, touring, and retail. The cross-marketing skills among the companies create powerful synergies to produce a combined commercial effect that is greater than the sum of their separate constituents. For example, AOL Time Warner is connected with their record labels, theme parks, TV networks, movie studios, and internet services.

The companies release their products throughout their own media channels in many different ways. The synergetic commercials generate powerful and effective promotions for their superstar artists who make multimillion dollars, but not for the majority of artists from independent labels. As a result, majority of media users continuously consume only few big commercialized products such as big hit songs, movies, books, and games; there are no sufficient channels to experience more diverse mass cultural forms and arts.

My personal experience can be one of the examples or evidences of these phenomena. While working for Sony Music as a Copyright and Royalty Coordinator, I learned that it is almost impossible for independent labels and unknown artists to make immediate record deals with major record companies and promote themselves effectively.

Even where artists are very creative and talented, it is not easy for those who are relatively new and unknown to make a lot of money via their recording deals. Indeed, sometimes these artists who have not a big hit may not get paid for as long as 2-3 years. Independent labels face difficulties when it comes to getting their music played on major radio and TV stations because of mainly the payola system, a common marketing tool in this hyper-commercialized society.

In general, big media companies put a lot of money into getting the music played and promoting it with the major TV and radio stations, which is why we hear the same music all the time, all over the place, on the different radio channels; certainly we don’t have many options to choose more diverse and creative arts forms when using the major media channels.

Moreover, the quality of their products from the hyper-commercialized media environment is often questionable. The people who control these companies are for the most part business people, not in the creative field; they don’t care much about the kind of arts or music, but focus heavily on being able to sell the music as a product. Martin Kirkup, who works for a major label, said that, “We started with the marketing, picking the songs and the pre-production and only then plugged in the artist”.

In today’s world, sometimes music and other media cultural forms are not seen as a voice and medium for the peoples and creative artists, but as a product to sell or as the property of the companies. The creative role and independence of the arts and cultures as a diverse range of ideas and messages are being threatened by the centralization of media ownership and play lists in addition to the increasing integration of popular music into the broader advertising and commercial aspects of the market, thus presenting us with cultural bankruptcy.

To counter these situations, I believe that media users should educate themselves on the media industry and their activities. Media users including artists and educators should also be more proactive in this hyper-commercialized media environment so that they can utilize current useful technologies like the Internet as a new promotion vehicle to expand their creative ideas and experiences for their future creations.

In particular, media users should be leaders who create a new media culture and exercise their influence over the mass media manipulated by major media companies. For a future discussion in relation to this essay, “affective economics” would be a good discussion topic since it shows how company’s marketing technique drives consumers’ decision-making, and appeals their unconscious and emotional purchasing motivations affected by T.V programs or other media.

Mind Control Of Robotic Limbs

Amazing technology: Mind-controlled robotic arm

Excellent Mind Control Documentary

Minds Gone Awry... Internet Effects And Affects... Brainwashing

Reviewing And Digesting What Mind Mind Control Is All About

Having done thus far with the Hub on Mind control, there are a few points that I think those who have done serious research to this subject have a better way of making clear what is the process of mind control that has taken place, say in the case of TV. It is very interesting How Dick Sutpen below dissects and deconstructs the techne involved in the way brainwashing is applied and propagated.

The Birth of Conversion/Brainwashing in Christian Revivalism in 1735. The Pavlovian explanation of the three brain phases. Born-again preachers: Step-by-Step, how they conduct a revival and the expected physiological results. The "voice roll" technique used by preachers, lawyers and hypnotists. New trance-inducing churches. The 6 steps to conversion. The
decognition process. Thought-stopping techniques.

The "sell it by zealot" technique. True believers and mass movements. Persuasion techniques: "Yes set," "Imbedded Commands," "Shock and Confusion," and the "Interspersal Technique." Subliminals. Vibrato and ELF waves. Inducing trance with vibrational sound. Even professional observers will be "possessed" at charismatic gatherings. The "only hope" technique to attend and not be converted. Non-detectable Neurophone programming through the skin. The medium for mass take-over.

Although I've been interviewed about the subject on many local and regional radio and TV talk shows, large-scale mass communication appears to be blocked, since it could result in suspicion or investigation of the very media presenting it or the sponsors that support the media. Some government agencies do not want this information generally known. Nor do the Born-Again Christian movement, cults, and many human-potential trainings.

Everything I will relate only exposes the surface of the problem. I don't know how the misuse of these techniques can be stopped. I don't think it is possible to legislate against that which often cannot be detected; and if those who legislate are using these techniques, there is little hope
of affecting laws to govern usage. I do know that the first step to initiate change is to generate interest. In this case, that will probably only result from an underground effort.

In talking about this subject, I am talking about my own business. I know it, and I know how effective it can be. I produce hypnosis and subliminal tapes and, in some of my seminars, I use conversion tactics to assist participants to become independent and self-sufficient. But, anytime
I use these techniques, I point out that I am using them, and those attending have a choice to participate or not. They also know what the desired result of participation will be.

So, to begin, I want to state the most basic of all facts about brainwashing: IN THE ENTIRE HISTORY OF MAN, NO ONE HAS EVER BEEN BRAINWASHED AND REALIZED, OR BELIEVED, THAT HE HAD BEEN BRAINWASHED. Those who have been brainwashed will usually passionately defend their manipulators, claiming they have simply been "shown the light" . . . or have been transformed in miraculous ways.

The Birth of Conversion

CONVERSION is a "nice" word for BRAINWASHING . . . and any study of brainwashing has to begin with a study of Christian revivalism in eighteenth century America. Apparently, Jonathan Edwards accidentally discovered the techniques during a religious crusade in 1735 in
Northampton, Massachusetts. By inducing guilt and acute apprehension and by increasing the tension, the "sinners" attending his revival meetings would break down and completely submit. Technically, what Edwards was doing was creating conditions that wipe the brain slate clean so that the mind accepts new programming. The problem was that the new input was negative. He would tell them, "You're a sinner! You're destined for hell!"

As a result, one person committed suicide and another attempted
suicide. And the neighbors of the suicidal converts related that they,
too, were affected so deeply that, although they had found "eternal
salvation," they were obsessed with a diabolical temptation to end their
own lives.

Once a preacher, cult leader,manipulator or authority figure creates the brain phase to wipe the brain-slate clean, his subjects are wide open. New input, in the form of suggestion, can be substituted for their previous ideas. Because Edwards didn't turn his message positive until the end of the revival, many accepted the negative suggestions and acted, or desired to act, upon them.

Charles J. Finney was another Christian revivalist who used the same techniques four years later in mass religious conversions in New York. The techniques are still being used today by Christian revivalists, cults, human-potential trainings, some business rallies, and the United States Armed Services . . . to name just a few.

Let me point out here that I don't think most revivalist preachers realize or know they are using brainwashing techniques. Edwards simply stumbled upon a technique that really worked, and others copied it and have continued to copy it for over two hundred years. And the more sophisticated our knowledge and technology become, the more effective the conversion. I
feel strongly that this is one of the major reasons for the increasing rise in Christian fundamentalism, especially the televised variety, while most of the orthodox religions are declining.

The Three Brain Phases

The Christians may have been the first to successfully formulate brainwashing, but we have to look to Pavlov, the Russian scientist, for a technical explanation. In the early 1900s, his work with animals opened the door to further investigations with humans. After the revolution in Russia, Lenin was quick to see the potential of applying Pavlov's research to his own ends.

Three distinct and progressive states of trans-marginal inhibition were identified by Pavlov. The first is the EQUIVALENT phase, in which the brain gives the same response to both strong and weak stimuli. The second is the PARADOXICAL phase, in which the brain responds more actively to weak stimuli than to strong. And the third is the ULTRA-PARADOXICAL phase, in
which conditioned responses and behavior patterns turn from positive to negative or from negative to positive.

With the progression through each phase, the degree of conversion becomes more effective and complete. The way to achieve conversion are many and varied, but the usual first step in religious or political brainwashing is to work on the emotions of an individual or group until they reach an abnormal level of anger, fear, excitement, or nervous tension.

The progressive result of this mental condition is to impair judgement and increase suggestibility. The more this condition can be maintained or intensified, the more it compounds. Once catharsis, or the first brain phase, is reached, the complete mental takeover becomes easier. Existing mental programming can be replaced with new patterns of thinking and
behavior.

Other often-used physiological weapons to modify normal brain functions are fasting, radical or high sugar diets, physical discomforts, regulation of breathing, mantra chanting in meditation, the disclosure of awesome mysteries, special lighting and sound effects, programmed response to incense, or intoxicating drugs.

The same results can be obtained in contemporary psychiatric treatment by electric shock treatments and even by purposely lowering a person's blood sugar level with insulin injections.

Before I talk about exactly how some of the techniques reapplied, I want to point out that hypnosis and conversion tactics are two distinctly different things--and that conversion techniques are far more powerful. However, the two are often mixed . . . with powerful results.

How Revivalist Preachers Work

If you'd like to see a revivalist preacher at work, there are probably several in your city. Go to the church or tent early and sit in the rear, about three-quarters of the way back. Most likely repetitive music will be played while the people come in for the service. A repetitive beat, ideally
ranging from 45 to 72 beats per minute (a rhythm close to the beat of the human heart), is very hypnotic and can generate an eyes-open altered state of consciousness in a very high percentage of people.

And, once you are in an alpha state, you are at least 25 times as suggestible as you would be in full beta consciousness. The music is probably the same for every service, or incorporates the same beat, and many of the people will go into an altered state almost immediately upon entering the sanctuary. Subconsciously, they recall their state of mind from previous services and respond according to the post-hypnotic programming.

Watch the people waiting for the service to begin. Many will exhibit external signs of trance--body relaxation and slightly dilated eyes. Often, they begin swaying back and forth with their hands in the air while sitting in their chairs. Next, the assistant pastor will probably come out. He
usually speaks with a pretty good "voice roll."

Voice Roll Technique

A "voice roll" is a patterned, paced style used by hypnotists when inducing a trance. It is also used by many lawyers, several of whom are highly trained hypnotists, when they desire to entrench a point firmly in the minds of the jurors. A voice roll can sound as if the speaker were
talking to the beat of a metronome or it may sound as though he were emphasizing every word in a monotonous, patterned style. The words will usually be delivered at the rate of 45 to 60 beats per minute, maximizing the hypnotic effect.

Now the assistant pastor begins the "build-up" process. He induces an altered state of consciousness and/or begins to generate the excitement and the expectations of the audience. Next, a group of young women in "sweet and pure" chiffon dresses might come out to sing a song. Gospel songs are great for building excitement and INVOLVEMENT. In the middle of the song, one of the girls might be "smitten by the spirit" and fall down or react as if possessed by the Holy Spirit. This very effectively increases the intensity in the room. At this point, hypnosis and conversion tactics are being mixed. And the result is the audience's attention span is now totally focused upon the communication while the environment becomes more exciting
or tense.

Right about this time, when an eyes-open mass-induced alpha mental state has been achieved, they will usually pass the collection plate or basket. In the background, a 45-beat-per-minute voice roll from the assistant preacher might exhort, "Give to God . . . Give to God . . . Give
to God . . ." And the audience does give. God may not get the money, but his already wealthy representative will.

Next, the fire-and-brimstone preacher will come out. He induces fear and increases the tension by talking about "the devil," "going to hell," or the forthcoming Armageddon.

In the last such rally I attended, the preacher talked about the blood that would soon be running out of every faucet in the land. He was also obsessed with a "bloody axe of God," which everyone had seen hanging above the pulpit the previous week. I have no doubt that everyone saw it--the power of suggestion given to hundreds of people in hypnosis assures that at least 10 to 25 percent would see whatever he suggested they see.

In most revivalist gatherings, "testifying" or "witnessing" usually follows the fear-based sermon. People from the audience come up on stage and relate their stories. "I was crippled and now I can walk!" "I had arthritis and now it's gone!" It is a psychological manipulation that works. After listening to numerous case histories of miraculous healing, the average guy in the audience with a minor problem is sure he can be healed. The room is charged with fear, guilt, intense excitement, and
expectations.

Now those who want to be healed are frequently lined up around the edge of the room, or they are told to come down to the front. The preacher might touch them on the head firmly and scream, "Be healed!" This releases the psychic energy and, for many, catharsis results. Catharsis is a purging of repressed emotions. Individuals might cry, fall down or even go into spasms. And if catharsis is effected, they stand a chance of being healed. In catharsis (one of the three brain phases mentioned earlier), the brain-slate is temporarily wiped clean and the new suggestion is accepted.

For some, the healing may be permanent. For many, it will last four days to a week, which is, incidentally, how long a hypnotic suggestion given to a somnambulistic subject will usually last. Even if the healing doesn't last, if they come back every week, the power of suggestion may
continually override the problem . . . or sometimes, sadly, it can mask a physical problem which could prove to be very detrimental to the individual in the long run.

I'm not saying that legitimate healing do not take place. They do. Maybe the individual was ready to let go of the negativity that caused the problem in the first place; maybe it was the work of God. Yet I contend that it can be explained with existing knowledge of brain/mind function.

The techniques and staging will vary from church to church. Many use "speaking in tongues" to generate catharsis in some while the spectacle creates intense excitement in the observers.

The use of hypnotic techniques by religions is sophisticated, and professionals are assuring that they become even more effective. A man in Los Angeles is designing, building, and reworking a lot of churches around the country. He tells ministers what they need and how to use it. This
man's track record indicates that the congregation and the monetary income will double if the minister follows his instructions. He admits that about 80 percent of his efforts are in the sound system and lighting.

Powerful sound and the proper use of lighting are of primary importance
in inducing an altered state of consciousness--I've been using them for
years in my own seminars. However, my participants are fully aware of the
process and what they can expect as a result of their participation.

Six Conversion Techniques

Cults and human-potential organizations are always looking for new converts. To attain them, they must also create a brain-phase. And they often need to do it within a short space of time--a weekend, or maybe even a day. The following are the six primary techniques used to generate the conversion.

The meeting or training takes place in an area where participants are cut off from the outside world. This may be any place: a private home, a remote or rural setting, or even a hotel ballroom where the participants are allowed only limited bathroom usage. In human-potential trainings, the controllers will give a lengthy talk about the importance of "keeping agreements" in life. The participants are told that if they don't keep agreements, their life will never work. It's a good idea to keep agreements, but the controllers are subverting a positive human value for selfish purposes.

-The participants vow to themselves and their trainer that they will keep their agreements. Anyone who does not will be intimidated into agreement or forced to leave. The next step is to agree to complete training, thus assuring a high percentage of conversions for the organizations. They will USUALLY have to agree not to take drugs, smoke, and sometimes not to eat . . . or they are given such short meal breaks that it creates tension. The real reason for the agreements is to alter internal chemistry, which generates anxiety and hopefully causes at least a slight malfunction of the nervous system, which in turn increases the conversion potential.

Before the gathering is complete, the agreements will be used to ensure that the new converts go out and find new participants. They are intimidated into agreeing to do so before they leave. Since the importance of keeping agreements is so high on their priority list, the converts will
twist the arms of everyone they know, attempting to talk them into attending a free introductory session offered at a future date by the organization. The new converts are zealots. In fact, the inside term for merchandising the largest and most successful human-potential training is,
"sell it by zealot!"

At least a million people are graduates and a good percentage have been left with a mental activation button that assures their future loyalty and assistance if the guru figure or organization calls. Think about the potential political implications of hundreds of thousands of zealots programmed to campaign for their guru.

Be wary of an organization of this type that offers follow-up sessions after the seminar. Follow-up sessions might be weekly meetings or inexpensive seminars given on a regular basis which the organization will attempt to talk you into taking--or any regularly scheduled event used to
maintain control. As the early Christian revivalists found, long-term control is dependent upon a good follow-up system.

Alright. Now, let's look at the second tip-off that indicates conversion tactics are being used. A schedule is maintained that causes physical and mental fatigue. This is primarily accomplished by long hours in which the participants are given no opportunity for relaxation or reflection.

The third tip-off: techniques used to increase the tension in the room or environment.

-Number four: Uncertainty. I could spend hours relating various techniques to increase tension and generate uncertainty. Basically, the participants are concerned about being "put on the spot" or encountered by the trainers, guilt feelings are played upon, participants are tempted to
verbally relate their innermost secrets to the other participants or forced to take part in activities that emphasize removing their masks. One of the most successful human-potential seminars forces the participants to stand on a stage in front of the entire audience while being verbally attacked by the trainers.

A public opinion poll, conducted a few years ago, showed that the number one most-fearful situation an individual could encounter is to speak to an audience. It ranked above window washing outside the 85th floor of an office building. So you can imagine the fear and tension this
situation generates within the participants. Many faint, but most cope with the stress by mentally going away. They literally go into an alpha state, which automatically makes them many times as suggestible as they normally are. And another loop of the downward spiral into conversion is
successfully effected.

-The fifth clue that conversion tactics are being used is the introduction of jargon--new terms that have meaning only to the "insiders" who participate. Vicious language is also frequently used, purposely, to make participants uncomfortable.

-The final tip-off is that there is no humor in the communications . .. At least until the participants are converted. Then, merry-making and humor are highly desirable as symbols of the new joy the participants have supposedly "found."

I'm not saying that good does not result from participation in such gatherings. It can and does. But I contend it is important for people to know what has happened and to be aware that continual involvement may not be in their best interest.

Over the years,I've conducted professional seminars to teach people to be hypnotists, trainers, and counselors. I've had many of those who conduct trainings and rallies come to me and say, "I'm here because I know that what I'm doing works, but I don't know why." After showing them how and why, many have gotten out of the business or have decided to approach it differently or in a much more loving and supportive manner.

Many of these trainers have become personal friends, and it scares us all to have experienced the power of one person with a microphone and a room full of people. Add a little charisma and you can count on a high percentage of conversions. The sad truth is that a high percentage of
people want to give away their power--they are true "believers"!

Cult gatherings or human-potential trainings are an ideal environment to observe first-hand what is technically called the "Stockholm Syndrome." This is a situation in which those who are intimidated, controlled, or made to suffer, begin to love, admire, and even sometimes sexually desire their controllers or captors.

But let me inject a word of warning here: If you think you can attend such gatherings and not be affected, you are probably wrong. A perfect example is the case of a woman who went to Haiti on a Guggenheim Fellowship to study Haitian Voodoo. In her report, she related how the music
eventually induced uncontrollable bodily movement and an altered state of consciousness.

Although she understood the process and thought herself above it, when she began to feel herself become vulnerable to the music, she attempted to fight it and turned away. Anger or resistance almost always assures conversion. A few moments later she was possessed by the
music and began dancing in a trance around the Voodoo meeting house. A brain phase had been induced by the music and excitement, and she awoke feeling reborn. The only hope of attending such gatherings without being affected is to be a Buddha and allow no positive or negative emotions to surface. Few people are capable of such detachment.

Before I go on,let's go back to the six tip-offs to conversion. I want to mention the United States Government and military boot camp. The Marine Corps talks about breaking men down before "rebuilding" them as new men--as marines! Well, that is exactly what they do, the same way a cult breaks its people down and rebuilds them as happy flower sellers on your local
street corner. Every one of the six conversion techniques are used in boot camp. Considering the needs of the military, I'm not making a judgement as to whether that is good or bad. IT IS A FACT that the men are effectively brainwashed. Those who won't submit must be discharged or spend much of their time in the brig.

Decognition Process

Once the initial conversion is effected, cults, armed services, and similar groups cannot have cynicism among their members. Members must respond to commands and do as they are told, otherwise they are dangerous to the organizational control. This is normally accomplished as a
three-step Decognition Process.

--Step One is ALERTNESS REDUCTION:

The controllers cause the nervous system to malfunction, making it difficult to distinguish between fantasy and this can be accomplished in several ways. POOR DIET is one;watch out for Brownies and Koolaid. The sugar throws the nervous system off. More subtle is the "SPIRITUAL DIET" used by many cults. They eat only vegetables and fruits; without the grounding of grains, nuts, seeds, dairy products, fish or meat, an individual becomes mentally "spacey." INADEQUATE SLEEP is another primary way to reduce alertness, especially when combined with long hours of work or intense physical activity. Also, being bombarded with intense and unique experiences achieves the same result.

--Step Two is PROGRAMMED CONFUSION: You are mentally assaulted while your
alertness is being reduced as in Step One. This is accomplished with a
deluge of new information, lectures, discussion groups, encounters or
one-to-one processing, which usually amounts to the controller bombarding
the individual with questions.During this phase of recognition, reality and illusion often merge and perverted logic is likely to be accepted.

StepThree is THOUGHT STOPPING:

Techniques are used to cause the mind to go "flat." These are altered-state-of-consciousness techniques that initially induce calmness by giving the mind something simple to deal with and focusing awareness. The continued use brings on a feeling of elation and eventually hallucination. The result is the reduction of thought and eventually, if used long enough, the cessation of all thought and withdrawal from everyone and everything except that which the controllers direct. The takeover is then complete. It is important to be aware that when members or participants are instructed to use "thought-stopping" techniques, they are told that they will benefit by so doing: they will become "better soldiers" or "find enlightenment."

...There are three primary techniques used for thought stopping.

...The first is MARCHING: the thump, thump, thump beat literally generates self-hypnosis
and thus great susceptibility to suggestion.

...The second thought stopping technique is MEDITATION. If you spend an hour to an hour and a half a day in meditation, after a few weeks, there is a great probability that you will not return to full beta consciousness. You will remain in a fixed state of alpha for as long as you continue to meditate. I'm not saying this is bad--if you do it yourself. It may be very beneficial. But it is a fact that you are causing your mind to go flat.

I've worked with meditators on an EEG machine and the results are conclusive: the more you meditate, the flatter your mind becomes until, eventually and especially if used to excess or in combination with recognition, all thought ceases. Some spiritual groups see this as
nirvana--which is bullshit. It is simply a predictable physiological result. And if heaven on earth is non-thinking and non-involvement, I really question why we are here.

...The third thought-stopping technique is CHANTING, and often chanting in meditation. "Speaking in tongues" could also be included in this category.

All three-stopping techniques produce an altered state of consciousness. This may be very good if YOU are controlling the process, for you also control the input. I personally use at least one self-hypnosis programming session every day and I know how beneficial it is for me. But
you need to know if you use these techniques to the degree of remaining continually in alpha that, although you'll be very mellow, you'll also be more suggestible.

True Believers & Mass Movements

Before ending this section on conversion, I want to talk about the people who are most susceptible to it and about Mass Movements. I am convinced that at least a third of the population is what Eric Hoffer calls "true believers." They are joiners and followers . . . people who want to give away their power. They look for answers, meaning, and enlightenment
outside themselves.

Hoffer, who wrote THE TRUE BELIEVER, a classic on mass movements, says, "True believers are not intent on bolstering and advancing a cherished self, but are those craving to be rid of unwanted self. They are followers, not because of a desire for self-advancement, but because it can satisfy their passion for self-renunciation!" Hoffer also says that true believers "are eternally incomplete and eternally insecure"!

I know this from my own experience. In my years of communicating concepts and conducting trainings, I have run into them again and again. All I can do is attempt to show them that the only thing to seek is the True Self within. Their personal answers are to be found there and there
alone.

I communicate that the basics of spirituality are self-responsibility and self-actualization. But most of the true believers just tell me that I'm not spiritual and go looking for someone who will give them the dogma and structure they desire.

Never underestimate the potential danger of these people. They can easily be molded into fanatics who will gladly work and die for their holy cause. It is a substitute for their lost faith in themselves and offers them as a substitute for individual hope. The Moral Majority is made up of true believers. All cults are composed of true believers. You'll find them in politics, churches, businesses, and social cause groups. They are the fanatics in these organizations.

Mass Movements will usually have a charismatic leader. The followers want to convert others to their way of living or impose a new way of life--if necessary, by legislating laws forcing others to their view, as evidenced by the activities of the Moral Majority. This means enforcement
by guns or punishment, for that is the bottomline in law enforcement.

A common hatred, enemy, or devil is essential to the success of a mass movement. The Born-Again Christians have Satan himself, but that isn't enough--they've added the occult, the New Age thinkers and, lately, all those who oppose their integration of church and politics, as evidenced in their political reelection campaigns against those who oppose their views.

In revolutions, the devil is usually the ruling power or aristocracy. Some human-potential movements are far too clever to ask their graduates to join anything, thus labeling themselves as a cult--but, if you look closely, you'll find that their devil is anyone and everyone who hasn't taken their training.

There are mass movements without devils but they seldom attain major status. The True Believers are mentally unbalanced or insecure people, or those without hope or friends. People don't look for allies when they love, but they do when they hate or become obsessed with a cause. And those who desire a new life and a new order feel the old ways must be eliminated
before the new order can be built.

Persuasion Techniques

Persuasion isn't technically brainwashing but it is the manipulation of the human mind by another individual, without the manipulated party being aware what caused his opinion shift. I only have time to very basically introduce you to a few of the thousands of techniques in use today, but the basis of persuasion is always to access your RIGHT BRAIN. The left half of
your brain is analytical and rational. The right side is creative and imaginative. That is overly simplified but it makes my point. So, the idea is to distract the left brain and keep it busy. Ideally, the persuader generates an eyes-open altered state of consciousness, causing you to shift
from beta awareness into alpha; this can be measured on an EEG machine.

First, let me give you an example of distracting the left brain. Politicians use these powerful techniques all the time; lawyers use many variations which, I've been told, they call "tightening the noose."

Assume for a moment that you are watching a politician give a speech.
First, he might generate what is called a "YES SET." These are statements that will cause listeners to agree; they might even unknowingly nod their heads in agreement. Next comes the TRUISMS. These are usually facts that could be debated but, once the politician has his audience agreeing, the odds are in the politician's favor that the audience won't stop to think
for themselves, thus continuing to agree.

Last comes the SUGGESTION. This is what the politician wants you to do and, since you have been agreeing all along, you could be persuaded to accept the suggestion. Now, if you'll
listen closely to my political speech, you'll find that the first three are the "yes set," the next three are truisms and the last is the suggestion.

"Ladies and gentlemen: are you angry about high food prices? Are you tired of astronomical gas prices? Are you sick of out-of-control inflation? Well, you know the Other Party allowed 18 percent inflation last year; you know crime has increased 50 percent nationwide in the last 12 months, and you know your paycheck hardly covers your expenses any more. Well, the
answer to resolving these problems is to elect me, John Jones, to the US Senate."

And I think you've heard all that before. But you might also watch for what are called Imbedded Commands. As an example: On key words, the speaker would make a gesture with his left hand, which research has shown is apt to access your right brain. Today's media-oriented politicians and spellbinders are often carefully trained by a whole new breed of specialist
who are using every trick in the book--both old and new--to manipulate you into accepting their candidate.

The concepts and techniques of Neuro-Linguistics are so heavily protected that I found out the hard way that to even talk about them publicly or in print results in threatened legal action. Yet
Neuro-Linguistic training is readily available to anyone willing to devote the time and pay the price. It is some of the most subtle and powerful manipulation I have yet been exposed to. A good friend who recently attended a two-week seminar on Neuro-Linguistics found that many of those she talked to during the breaks were government people.

Another technique that I'm just learning about is unbelievably slippery; it is called an INTERSPERSAL TECHNIQUE and the idea is to say one thing with words but plant a subconscious impression of something else in the minds of the listeners and/or watchers.

Let me give you an example: Assume you are watching a television commentator make the following statement:

SENATOR JOHNSON is assisting local authorities to clear up the stupid mistakes of companies contributing to the nuclear waste problems. It sounds like a statement of fact, but, if the speaker emphasizes the right word, and especially if he makes the proper hand gestures on the key words, you could be left with the subconscious impression that Senator Johnson is stupid. That was the subliminal goal of the statement and the speaker cannot be called to account for anything.

Persuasion techniques are also frequently used on a much smaller scale with just as much effectiveness. The insurance salesman knows his pitch is likely to be much more effective if he can get you to visualize something in your mind. This is right-brain communication. For instance, he might pause in his conversation, look slowly around your living room and say,
"Can you just imagine this beautiful home burning to the ground?" Of course you can! It is one of your unconscious fears and, when he forces you to visualize it, you are more likely to be manipulated into signing his insurance policy.

The Hare Krishnas, operating in every airport,use what I call SHOCK AND CONFUSION techniques to distract the left brain and communicate directly with the right brain. While waiting for a plane, I once watched one operate for over an hour. He had a technique of almost jumping in front of someone. Initially, his voice was loud then dropped as he made his pitch to take a book and contribute money to the cause.

Usually, when people are shocked, they immediately withdraw. In this case they were
shocked by the strange appearance, sudden materialization and loud voice of the Hare Krishna devotee. In other words, the people went into an alpha state for security because they didn't want to confront the reality before them.

In alpha, they were highly suggestible so they responded to the suggestion of taking the book; the moment they took the book, they felt guilty and responded to the second suggestion: give money. We are all conditioned that if someone gives us something, we have to give them something in return--in that case, it was money. While watching this hustler, I was close enough to notice that many of the people he stopped exhibited an outward sign of alpha--their eyes were actually dilated.

Subliminal Programming

Subliminals are hidden suggestions that only your subconscious perceives. They can be audio, hidden behind music, or visual, airbrushed into a picture, flashed on a screen so fast that you don't consciously see them, or cleverly incorporated into a picture or design.

Most audio subliminal reprogramming tapes offer verbal suggestions recorded at a low volume. I question the efficacy of this technique--if subliminals are not perceptible, they cannot be effective, and subliminals recorded below the audible threshold are therefore useless. The oldest audio subliminal technique uses a voice that follows the volume of the music so subliminals are impossible to detect without a parametric equalizer. But this technique is patented and, when I wanted to develop my own line of subliminal audio cassettes, negotiations with the patent holder proved to be unsatisfactory.

My attorney obtained copies of the patents which I gave to some talented Hollywood sound engineers, asking them to create a new technique. They found a way to psycho-acoustically modify and synthesize the suggestions so that they are projected in the same chord and
frequency as the music, thus giving them the effect of being part of the music. But we found that in using this technique, there is no way to reduce various frequencies to detect the subliminals. In other words, although the suggestions are being heard by the subconscious mind, they cannot be monitored with even the most sophisticated equipment.

If we were able to come up with this technique as easily as we did,I can only imagine how sophisticated the technology has become, with unlimited government or advertising funding. And I shudder to think about the propaganda and commercial manipulation that we are exposed to on a daily basis. There is simply no way to know what is behind the music you hear. It may even be possible to hide a second voice behind the voice to which you are listening.

The series by Wilson Bryan Key, Ph.D., on subliminals in advertising and political campaigns well documents the misuse in many areas, especially printed advertising in newspapers, magazines, and posters.

The big question about subliminals is: do they work? And I guarantee you they do. Not only from the response of those who have used my tapes, but from the results of such programs as the subliminals behind the music in department stores. Supposedly, the only message is instructions to not steal: one East Coast department store chain reported a 37 percent reduction in thefts in the first nine months of testing.

A 1984 article in the technical newsletter, "Brain-Mind Bulletin," states that as much as 99 percent of our cognitive activity may be "non-conscious," according to the director of the Laboratory for Cognitive Psychophysiology at the University of Illinois. The lengthy report ends
with the statement, "These findings support the use of subliminal approaches such as taped suggestions for weight loss and the therapeutic use of hypnosis and Neuro-Linguistic Programming."

Mass Misuse

I could relate many stories that support subliminal programming, but I'd rather use my time to make you aware of even more subtle uses of such programming.

I have personally experienced sitting in a Los Angeles auditorium with over ten thousand people who were gathered to listen to a current charismatic figure. Twenty minutes after entering the auditorium, I became aware that I was going in and out of an altered state. Those accompanying me, experienced the same thing.

Since it is our business, we were aware of what was happening, but those around us were not. By careful observation, what appeared to be spontaneous demonstrations were, in fact, artful
manipulations. The only way I could figure that the eyes-open trance had been induced was that a 6-to 7-cycle-per-second vibration was being piped into the room behind the air conditioner sound.

That particular vibration generates alpha, which would render the audience highly susceptible. Ten to 15 percent of the population is capable of a somnambulistic level of altered states of consciousness; for these people, the suggestions of the speaker, if non-threatening, could potentially be accepted as "commands."

Vibrato

This leads to the mention of VIBRATO. Vibrato is the tremulous effect imparted in some vocal or instrumental music, and the cycle-per-second range causes people to go into an altered state of consciousness. At one period of English history, singers whose voices contained pronounced vibrato were not allowed to perform publicly because listeners would go into an altered state and have fantasies, often sexual in nature.

People who attend operator enjoy listening to singers like MarioLanza are familiar with this altered state induced by the performers.

ELFs

Now, let's carry this awareness a little farther. There are also inaudible ELFs (extra-low frequency waves). These are electromagnetic in nature. One of the primary uses of ELFs is to communicate with our submarines.

Dr. Andrija Puharich, a highly respected researcher, in an attempt to warn US officials about Russian use of ELFs, set up an experiment. Volunteers were wired so their brain waves could be measured on an EEG. They were sealed in a metal room that could not be penetrated by a
normal signal.

Puharich then beamed ELF waves at the volunteers. ELFs go right through the earth and, of course, right through metal walls. Those inside couldn't know if the signal was or was not being sent. And Puharich watched the reactions on the technical equipment: 30 percent of those inside the room were taken over by the ELF signal in six to ten-seconds.

When I say "taken over," I mean that their behavior followed the changes anticipated at very precise frequencies. Waves below 6 cycles per second caused the subjects to become very emotionally upset, and even disrupted bodily functions. At 8.2 cycles, they felt very high . . . an
elevated feeling, as though they had been in masterful meditation, learned over a period of years. Eleven to 11.3 cycles induced waves of depressed agitation leading to riotous behavior.

The Neurophone

Dr. PatrickFlanagan is a personal friend of mine. In the early 1960s, as a teenager, Pat was listed as one of the top scientists in the world by "Life" magazine. Among his many inventions was a device he called the Neurophone--an electronic instrument that can successfully program suggestions directly through contact with the skin. When he attempted to patent the device, the government demanded that he prove it worked. When he did, the National Security Agency confiscated the neurophone. It took Pat two years of legal battle to get his invention back.

In using the device, you don't hear or see a thing; it is applied to the skin, which Pat claims is the source of special senses. The skin contains more sensors for heat, touch, pain, vibration, and electrical fields than any other part of the human anatomy.

In one of his recent tests, Pat conducted two identical seminars for a military audience--one seminar one night and one the next night, because the size of the room was not large enough to accommodate all of them at one time. When the first group proved to be very cool and unwilling to respond, Patrick spent the next day making a special tape to play at the second seminar.

The tape instructed the audience to be extremely warm and responsive and for their hands to become "tingly." The tape was played through the neurophone, which was connected to a wire he placed along the ceiling of the room.

There were no speakers, so no sound could be heard, yet the message was successfully transmitted from that wire directly into the brains of the audience. They were warm and receptive, their hands tingled and they responded, according to programming, in other ways that I cannot mention here.

The more we find out about how human beings work through today's highly advanced technological research, the more we learn to control human beings. And what probably scares me the most is that the medium for takeover is already in place! The television set in your living room and bedroom is doing a lot more than just entertaining you.

Before I continue, let me point out something else about an altered state of consciousness. When you go into an altered state, you transfer into right brain, which results in the internal release of the body's own opiates: enkephalins and Beta-endorphins, chemically almost identical to opium. In other words, it feels good . . . and you want to come back for more.

Recent tests by researcher Herbert Krugman showed that, while viewers were watching TV, right-brain activity outnumbered left-brain activity by a ratio of two to one. Put more simply, the viewers were in an altered state . . . in trance more often than not. They were getting their Beta-endorphin "fix."

To measure attention spans, psychophysiologist Thomas Mulholland of the Veterans Hospital in Bedford, Massachusetts, attached young viewers to an EEG machine that was wired to shut the TV set off whenever the children's brains produced a majority of alpha waves. Although the children were told to concentrate, only a few could keep the set on for more than 30 seconds!

Most viewers are already hypnotized. To deepen the trance is easy. One simple way is to place a blank, black frame every 32 frames in the film that is being projected. This creates a 45-beat-per-minute pulsation perceived only by the subconscious mind--the ideal pace to generate deep
hypnosis.

The commercials or suggestions presented following this alpha-inducing broadcast are much more likely to be accepted by the viewer. The high percentage of the viewing audience that has somnambulistic-depth ability could very well accept the suggestions as commands--as long as those commands did not ask the viewer to do something contrary to his morals, religion, or self-preservation.

The medium for takeover is here. By the age of 16, children have spent 10,000 to 15,000 hours watching television--that is more time than they spend n school! In the average home, the TV set is on for six hours and 44 minutes per day--an increase of nine minutes from last year and three times the average rate of increase during the 1970s.

It obviously isn't getting better . . . we are rapidly moving into an alpha-level world--very possibly the Orwellian world of "1984"--placid, glassy-eyed, and responding obediently to instructions.

A research project by Jacob Jacoby, a Purdue University psychologist, found that of 2,700 people tested, 90 percent misunderstood even such simple viewing fare as commercials and "Barnaby Jones." Only minutes after watching, the typical viewer missed 23 to 36 percent of the questions about what he or she had seen. Of course they did--they were going in and out of
trance! If you go into a deep trance, you must be instructed to remember--otherwise you automatically forget.

I have just touched the tip of the iceberg. When you start to combine subliminal messages behind the music, subliminal visuals projected on the screen, hypnotically produced visual effects, sustained musical beats at a trance-inducing pace . . . you have extremely effective brainwashing. Every hour that you spend watching the TV set you become more conditioned. And, in case you thought there was a law against any of these things, guess
again. There isn't! There are a lot of powerful people who obviously prefer things exactly the way they are. Maybe they have plans for?

Baby Bar-Code Registration

Vigilance Is Needed Against the Psychological forces

The last video posted above about Mind Control, ad the article by Sutphen above about "the Battle of Your mind", above, both have one theme in common-that there are various techniques applied on to the intended human targets, and all seem to function very well when the 'Zombify" the human subjects. The techniques have grown even more vast and sophisticated with the advent of nee technologies and the enabling techniques embedded in their core, that, in the end, the mind of the victim, is controlled, though those emerging techniques, technologies, music, food, audio, misinformation, suggestion, intimidation, fear, creation of doubt and self knowledge and self confidence.

This subject had been touched upon by Biko when he discussed how the implementation of religion of South African traditional societies, who were convinced, by the missionaries, of a wrathful god, and Hell. Colonization took place under these auspices as described above, particularly by Sutphen, wherein, in his article, he gives a detailed modus operandi that has been engendered by religion, by the armed forces, by TV to subdue and manipulate their adherents and in the end achieve their own ends and interests. This has been an ongoing technique that saw many nations enslaved, many people deluded by crass and very aggressive religious institutions, the army, so that, those they effect, end up being their automatons.

The leaders of the countries that exist today, are complicit in this charge for various reasons in many ways. Mind games is the order to the new order, using the available technological mechanism and their ability to suck in and create a 'herd mindset of believers and robots' who would give their life defending and extolling the virtues of their brainwashes.

Sutphen lists these techniques as:

"voice roll,' , 'trance-inducing" methods; Though-stopping techniques; "seek it to the zealot" methods; Exploitations and monitoring of "True believers and Mass Movements"; "Persuasion techniques; "Yes Set," mindset; "Imbedded commands"; "Shock and confusion"; : Interpersonal techniques"; "Subliminals"; "Vibrato"; and "ELF Waves". Many other more sophisticated and even more effective techniques are discovered and covered at legit in the last video posted above titled: "Excellent Mind Control Documentary".

Whether one chooses to believe these existing Mind Controlling techniques in many areas of human life and endeavor, there is some kernel of truth in them. I agree with Sutphen that these do work, affect and effect their intended subjects, and in the long run, give power and wealth to the users of these application, and exploits the victims to the hilt. These listed techniques above unsure that the people to whom they are applied to, never ever think or be the same again. This is dangerous, as Sutphen notes, because it becomes ever so much important that the victim get to know what has happened to them, than have them accept these effect and affects as valid.

The purpose of this Hub is to look into all these patterns and techniques and to ascertain if not to highlight what their outcomes are are to the societies at large, globally. This style of coercion has bee stated this way:

A coercive persuasion program is a behavioral change technology applied to cause the "learning" and "adoption" of a set of behaviors or an ideology under certain conditions. It is distinguished from other forms of benign social learning or peaceful persuasion by the conditions under which it is conducted and by the techniques of environmental and interpersonal manipulation employed to suppress particular behaviors and to train others. Over time, coercive persuasion, a psychological force akin in some ways to our legal concepts of undue influence, can be even MORE effective than pain, torture, drugs, and use of physical force and legal threats."(The Revelation)

With coercive persuasion you can change people's attitudes without their knowledge and volition. You can create new "attitudes" where they will do things willingly which they formerly may have detested, things which previously only torture, physical pain, or drugs could have coerced them to do. The advances in the extreme anxiety and emotional stress production technologies found in coercive persuasion supersede old style coercion that focuses on pain, torture, drugs, or threat in that these older systems do not change attitude so that subjects follow orders "willingly." Coercive persuasion changes both attitude AND behavior, not JUST behavior.

"He who controls the money supply controls that nation." If you're in the center of things and control when the market expands or contracts then you know ahead of time what to do financially. The money is there for the taking. Take control of the money system, buy out the politicians on both sides of the political fence, buy a controlling interest in the stock of the media companies, change the laws of the land to escape justice, control the schools and keep the populace dumb. The definition of communism is : A system in which political and economic power is concentrated in one party or ruling class. In America that ruling class is the Federal Reserve and those that control it. Democracy in America is an illusion, one that is perpetuated with mass genocide. Now that we have a world central banking system and an IMF there is no such animal as democracy. In reality it is a world communist state, a New World Order.

You are literally paying people with your taxes to steal from you and use the stolen money to sponsor wars which then kill your children.

So that, thus far, I contend, "Mind control" refers to all coercive psychological systems, such as brainwashing, thought reform, and coercive persuasion. Mind control is the shaping of a person's attitudes, beliefs, and personality without the person's knowledge or consent. Mind control employs deceptive and surreptitious manipulation, usually in a group setting, for the financial or political profit of the manipulator. Mind control works by gradually exerting increasing control over individuals through a variety of techniques, such as excessive repetition of routine activities, intense humiliation, or sleep deprivation.

I have to make a final note that awareness and knowledge of these techniques is better that just flowing with the 'brainwashing. To protect our basic human rights and dignity-cognitive independence and so forth, we have to begin to understand how mind control is applied and manifest in our midst-this will help, not only in understanding the technologies and their techniques, but also shine a light on all those areas and ways of 'brainwashing' used against our collectives, much better, and maybe we can begin to better deal with just being gullible and hapless automatons and robots in service of those who wish to make us their zombies in service of their interest and wealth.

Brainwashing Subterfuge...

History Just Repeated Itself: In the USA Y214

Mind Control as a technique is what we have just witnessed in the most recently past 2014 American Mid-Term Elections. The use of deep fiscal pockets and jamming the media with commercials so crass that in the end have the desired effect of moving their intended subjects into action. This ploy has been used very effectively by the officials running for Office in the Nation's Capital-On Capitol Hill. The wail through which this was in in many guises, but all are finely tuned to effect and affect men's attitude and put them into intended action

I am echoing the Ellulian perspective in deconstructing the recent victory of the Republicans, who swept into power of the Senate, and were already in Charge of the House of Representatives.. What they did was to use Obama, Obama's not being liked, explored and exploited the falling "likability" of Obama in the polls; to be able to resuscitate their failed attempt at reversing the ominously termed so-called "Obama Care-that their coming into power, the are going to repeal this Law of the land.

So far, they have succeed in blacking and derailing many of the policies, both domestically and partly internationally. They then turned around and employed the media to convince their polity that Obama was bad news and was bringing the American Brand down. They created the blockades and gridlocks, and then, when the Americans, many of whom dislike Obama, we fed what they knew, and hoped to hear, their machine went into action, and the result was what we have just witnessed: the ceding of the Senate and control of the house by the Majority or the Majority-Republicans.

In this case, what we are now seeing is that enough majority in the gerrymandered states, those states that are conservatives of all stripes, and disliked Obama, those who belonged to the TeaBagger Party, and many of the Whites of the South And throughout America who disliked Obama,amide sure they returned the Republican flopped flock(Republicans) into controlling all the Power in the USA government,

What they managed to achieve was to sell their blocking Obama at all turns as the fulcrum of their attaining power and immobilizing Obama in the process, who has only two years to rule. In the mix one must throw in racism, which manifested itself in the vote for the lowly ranked Republicans in the national polls, inserting them into total peer, thus handicapping and incarcerating Obama, metaphorically speaking or otherwise. This has managed to give them power to make sure that any policies of Obama, henceforth, are rendered null and void. They managed to do that whilst the houses were divided between the Republicans and the Democrats. Now, with their ilk and cabals on the helm, what we are witnessing is the indirect message sent by the White Electorate that they will not tolerate another or any African American President into the White House, Ever!

By pandering to the past stereotypes of Obama's heritage-Slavery-the American racist were sending a message that they are still in power, and that they do not recognize all the achievements and valiant efforts of Obama who they have blocked at every turn-whenever he tried to jump-start the economy; try to pass a Jobs Bill; refuse to work with him on immigration; tried more than 50 times to repeal his Affordable Care Act-which they insidiously dubbed "Obama Care"; criticized him and projected in a bad light in many ways, consistently and up to the latest elections. The elections were not about Obama, nor was Obama running for any office. The elcitionwas about nominating members of the Senate, and this was to be case, but Obama was the main topic,in every negative sense-as if he was running for some office. Which he was not.

All this and then some, was parlayed and relayed through evey orifice of the media outlet in the Universe, that, the Republican voters, got a sense that they "Are Getting Their Country Back", as they have demonstrated throughout the Years. The present Republican operatives now injected into power, are the vey people who are serving the interests of the Billionaires and making the poor suffer more. They are and have been busy initiating budgets cuts of the poor's Foodstamps, education, housing, jobs and so forth of the poor. This is clear. That is why I say then, it is true also that Obama is being maligned and put down because of his ancestry(Slavery), not because of all the lies they say about him, blocked him on, but on the spin the managed to put into their narrative this time that was akin to welcomed indoctrination: Mind Control Through the Media Technique.

Controled Ways Of Seeing, Ways Of Receiving

So long as Man Mind has existed, from the crude forms of mass mobilization to contemporary Meida technological mind control, it has always been the desire and aim of those who are rich, and have time to fine-tune and fine-chissel their distorted and concocted strategy of mass control to set and determine the final outcome, social arrangements and reality. Going back into history, one can see various patterns of mass mobilization, and how they are to be put into action, has been the bane of social human evolution and development. As man acquired crude tools to today's most sophisticated gadgetry, to tame and cope with the environment, this means that their preoccupation was to get mass response and mass action into action they have pre-determined as to what that will be or is-how it was gonna go.

What makes today, in the present here-and-now that we all exist in, is that man has reworked those tools to what we see as the Web today. There was a huge evolution from machinery, automation and dependency and refining of techne of these burgeoning technologies over the centuries. This has been addressed thoroughly by McLuhan, Postman Ong, Ellul, etc., and many other Media Ecologists of note.. That, above within the Hub above, I have already cited some above, and will continue to do so as this Hub grows, ecasue they give us a historical narrative as to how and why we got to the present Technological Society. In addition, they delineate all the missteps-effects and affects- that went along with the discovery and usage of these technologies on Man and Societies.

In the times of the Technological Society we live in(This has been dealt with definitvely by Ellul), we are alreday a mediarized and techized group of mass enviroment in in Ecology that is steadily being pre-determined for us; designed for us; propagted in plain sight, zeroing on us by targeting us in our environments, tastes, and so forth. This can be found in many instituions of many societies today, the pemeation and incrusion of technology into our day-to-day lives that we need to use this Hub as an interrogation into that phenomena of Mind Control Throuh The Use Of Techique. We have just acknowledged that we live in a technological Society, so that we should constatnly be looking at the ways and menas that are deployed to move us en-masse and as a mass collective through the designs and desires of those who control and make available and propagate their own narratives and spin through these new merging.emerging techmological gizmos, and so forth.

That is why I bring on the experts as this fast evolving Technicized society and world we live in morphs and evolves. The are those who set the theoretical basis, and today there are those who are giving form and shape an understanding of the present-day techologies and their gizmos. This is important, becasue these technologies change very fast, now, and we need to keep up with it as it dizzyingly splurges extended withinin the Viral Soup.

Below I have taken an article By Nicholas West to give thee sense and breadth of how deep these techniques go and are used for and where.

Ten Popular Mind Control Techniques Used Today

The more one researches mind control, the more one will come to the conclusion that there is a coordinated script that has been in place for a very long time with the goal to turn the human race into non-thinking automatons. For as long as man has pursued power over the masses, mind control has been orchestrated by those who study human behavior in order to bend large populations to the will of a small “elite” group. Today, we have entered a perilous phase where mind control has taken on a physical, scientific dimension that threatens to become a permanent state if we do not become aware of the tools at the disposal of the technocratic dictatorship unfolding on a worldwide scale.

Modern mind control is both technological and psychological. Tests show that simply by exposing the methods of mind control, the effects can be reduced or eliminated, at least for mind control advertising and propaganda. More difficult to counter are the physical intrusions, which the military-industrial complex continues to develop and improve upon.

1. Education — This is the most obvious, yet still remains the most insidious. It has always been a would-be dictator’s ultimate fantasy to “educate” naturally impressionable children, thus it has been a central component to Communist and Fascist tyrannies throughout history. No one has been more instrumental in exposing the agenda of modern education than Charlotte Iserbyt — one can begin research into this area by downloading a free PDF of her book, The Deliberate Dumbing Down of America, which lays bare the role of Globalist foundations in shaping a future intended to produce servile drones lorded over by a fully educated, aware elite class.

2. Advertising and Propaganda – Edward Bernays has been cited as the inventor of the consumerist culture that was designed primarily to target people’s self-image (or lack thereof) in order to turn a want into a need. This was initially envisioned for products such as cigarettes, for example. However, Bernays also noted in his 1928 book, Propaganda, that “propaganda is the executive arm of the invisible government.” This can be seen most clearly in the modern police state and the growing citizen snitch culture, wrapped up in the pseudo-patriotic War on Terror. The increasing consolidation of media has enabled the entire corporate structure to merge with government, which now utilizes the concept of propaganda placement. Media; print, movies, television, and cable news can now work seamlessly to integrate an overall message which seems to have the ring of truth because it comes from so many sources, simultaneously. When one becomes attuned to identifying the main “message,” one will see this imprinting everywhere. And this is not even to mention subliminal messaging.

3. Predictive Programming – Many still deny that predictive programming is real. I would invite anyone to examine the range of documentation put together by Alan Watt and come to any other conclusion. Predictive programming has its origins in predominantly elitist Hollywood, where the big screen can offer a big vision of where society is headed. Just look back at the books and movies which you thought were far-fetched, or “science fiction” and take a close look around at society today. For a detailed breakdown of specific examples, Vigilant Citizen is a great resource that will probably make you look at “entertainment” in a completely different light.

4. Sports, Politics, Religion – Some might take offense at seeing religion, or even politics, put alongside sports as a method of mind control. The central theme is the same throughout: divide and conquer. The techniques are quite simple: short circuit the natural tendency of people to cooperate for their survival, and teach them to form teams bent on domination and winning. Sports has always had a role as a key distraction that corrals tribal tendencies into a non-important event, which in modern America has reached ridiculous proportions where protests will break out over a sport celebrity leaving their city, but essential human issues such as liberty are giggled away as inconsequential. Political discourse is strictly in a left-right paradigm of easily controlled opposition, while religion is the backdrop of nearly every war throughout history.

5. Food, Water, and Air – Additives, toxins, and other food poisons literally alter brain chemistry to create docility and apathy. Fluoride in drinking water has been proven to lower IQ; Aspartame and MSG are excitotoxins which excite brain cells until they die; and easy access to the fast food that contains these poisons generally has created a population that lacks focus and motivation for any type of active lifestyle. Most of the modern world is perfectly groomed for passive receptiveness — and acceptance — of the dictatorial elite. And if you choose to diligently watch your diet, they are fully prepared to spray the population from the above.

6. Drugs — This can be any addictive substance, but the mission of mind controllers is to be sure you are addicted to something. One major arm of the modern mind control agenda is psychiatry, which aims to define all people by their disorders, as opposed to their human potential. This was foreshadowed in books such as Brave New World. Today, it has been taken to even further extremes as a medical tyranny has taken hold where nearly everyone has some sort of disorder — particularly those who question authority. The use of nerve drugs in the military has led to record numbers of suicides. Worst of all, the modern drug state now has over 25% of U.S. children on mind-numbing medication.

7. Military testing — The military has a long history as the testing ground for mind control. The military mind is perhaps the most malleable, as those who pursue life in the military generally resonate to the structures of hierarchy, control, and the need for unchallenged obedience to a mission. For the increasing number of military personal questioning their indoctrination, a recent story highlighted DARPA’s plans for transcranial mind control helmets that will keep them focused.

8. Electromagnetic spectrum — An electromagnetic soup envelops us all, charged by modern devices of convenience which have been shown to have a direct impact on brain function. In a tacit admission of what is possible, one researcher has been working with a “god helmet” to induce visions by altering the electromagnetic field of the brain. Our modern soup has us passively bathed by potentially mind-altering waves, while a wide range of possibilities such as cell phone towers is now available to the would-be mind controller for more direct intervention.

9. Television, Computer, and “flicker rate”– It’s bad enough that what is “programmed” on your TV (accessed via remote “control”) is engineered; it is all made easier by literally lulling you to sleep, making it a psycho-social weapon. Flicker rate tests show that alpha brain waves are altered, producing a type of hypnosis — which doesn’t portend well for the latest revelation that lights can transmit coded Internet data by “flickering faster than the eye can see.” The computer’s flicker rate is less, but through video games, social networks, and a basic structure which overloads the brain with information, the rapid pace of modern communication induces an ADHD state. A study of video games revealed that extended play can result in lower blood flow to the brain, sapping emotional control. Furthermore, role-playing games of lifelike war and police state scenarios serve to desensitize a connection to reality. One look at the WikiLeaks video Collateral Murder should be familiar to anyone who has seen a game like Call of Duty.

10. Nanobots – From science fiction horror, directly to the modern brain; the nanobots are on the way. Direct brain modification already has been packaged as “neuroengineering.” A Wired article from early 2009 highlighted that direct brain manipulation via fiber optics is a bit messy, but once installed “it could make someone happy with the press of a button.” Nanobots take the process to an automated level, rewiring the brain molecule by molecule. Worse, these mini droids can self-replicate, forcing one to wonder how this genie would ever get back in the bottle once unleashed. Expected date of arrival? Early 2020s.

A concerted effort is underway to manage and predict human behavior so that the social scientists and the dictatorial elite can control the masses and protect themselves from the fallout of a fully awake free humanity. Only by waking up to their attempts to put us to sleep do we stand a chance of preserving our free will.


History... Connected: The Deliberate Dumbing Down of America w/ Charlotte Iserbyt

Remote Neural Monitoring

Remote Neural Monitoring : A Technology Used For Controlling the Human Brain

We learn from MindTech Sweden that:

HAVE you ever thought about something you never shared with anyone, and have been horror-struck at the mere thought of someone coming to know about your little secret? If you have, then you probably have all the more reason to be paranoid now thanks to new and improved security systems being developed around the world to deal with terrorism that inadvertently end up impinging on one’s privacy.

Some of the countries involved in such programmes include USA, UK, Spain, Germany and France. Recently, the National Security Agency (NSA) of the US has developed a very efficient method of controlling the human brain. This technology is called Remote Neural Monitoring (RNM) and is expected to revolutionise crime detection and investigation.

Remote Neural Monitoring(RNM)

What Is It?

RNM works remotely to control the brain in order to read and detect any criminal thought taking place inside the mind of a possible perpetrator. Research studies have shown that the human brain thinks at a rate of about 5000 bits per second and does not have the capacity to compete with supercomputers performing via satellites, implants and biotelemetry. The human brain has a distinctive set of bioelectric resonance system. For the RNM system, supercomputers are being used and, thus, with its help, supercomputers can send messages through an implanted person’s nervous system in order to influence their performance in a desired way.

RNM has been developed after about 50 years of neuro-electromagnetic involuntary human experimentations. According to many scientists, within a few years it is expected that DNA microchips will be implanted in the human brain which would make it inherently controllable. With RNM, it will be possible to read and control a person’s emotional thought processes along with the subconscious and dreams. At present, around the world, supercomputers are monitoring millions of people simultaneously with the speed of 20 billion bits per second especially in countries like USA, Japan, Israel and many European countries.

RNM has a set of certain programs functioning at different levels, like the signals intelligence system which uses electromagnetic frequencies (EMF), to stimulate the brain for RNM and the electronic brain link (EBL). The EMF Brain Stimulation system has been designed as radiation intelligence which means receiving information from inadvertently originated electromagnetic waves in the environment. However, it is not related to radioactivity or nuclear detonation. The recording machines in the signals intelligence system have electronic equipment that investigate electrical activity in humans from a distance. This computer-generated brain mapping can constantly monitor all electrical activities in the brain. The recording aid system decodes individual brain maps for security purposes.

Brain Light

What Does It Do?

For purposes of electronic evaluation, electrical activity in the speech centre of the brain can be translated in to the subject’s verbal thoughts. RNM can send encoded signals to the auditory cortex of the brain directly bypassing the ear. This encoding helps in detecting audio communication. It can also perform electrical mapping of the brain’s activity from the visual centre of the brain, which it does by bypassing the eyes and optic nerves, thus projecting images from the subject’s brain onto a video monitor. With this visual and audio memory, both can be visualised and analysed. This system can, remotely and non-invasively, detect information by digitally decoding the evoked potentials in 30-50Hz, 5 millwatt electromagnetic emissions from the brain. The nerves produce a shifting electrical pattern with a shifting magnetic flux which then puts on a constant amount of electromagnetic waves. There are spikes and patterns which are called evoked potentials in the electromagnetic emission from the brain. The interesting part about this is that the entire exercise is carried out without any physical contact with the subject.

The EMF emissions from the brain can be decoded into current thoughts, images and sounds in the subject’s brain. It sends complicated codes and electromagnetic pulse signals to activate evoked potentials inside the brain, thus generating sounds and visual images in the neural circuits. With its speech, auditory and visual communication systems, RNM allows for a complete audio-visual brain to brain link or a brain-to-computer link.

Of course, the mechanism needs to decode the resonance frequency of each specific site to modulate the insertion of information in that specific location of the brain. RNM can also detect hearing via electromagnetic microwaves, and it also features the transmission of specific commands into the subconscious, producing visual disturbances, visual hallucinations and injection of words and numbers in to the brain through electromagnetic radiation waves. Also, it manipulates emotions and thoughts and reads thoughts remotely, causes pain to any nerve of the body, allows for remote manipulation of behaviour, controls sleep patterns through which control over communication is made easy. This can be used for crime investigation and security management.

Use Of Microwave Radiations

Concerns

With all the given benefits of RNM for tracking the illicit and treacherous activities, there are many concerns and risks being pointed out by human rights activists and other scientists. The agencies of human rights around the world have criticised RNM as a violation of basic human rights because it violates privacy and the dignity of thoughts and activities of life. Several countries have protested against it and refer to it as an attack on their human and civil rights. The scientists protesting against the use of RNM believe that people who have been implanted involuntarily become biological robots and guinea pigs for RNM activities in the guise of security. This is an important biological concern related to microchip implantation, which is a hidden technology using microwave radiations for the control of the mind.

Scientists believe that like leukemia and the cancerous risks posed by mobile phones which also emit microwaves, RNM can also pose similar threats to a subject’s overall health as the heating effect of tissues with the speed of light is a known effect of high powered microwave and electromagnetic pulse weapons.

Thus, RNM remains a controversial technology which is being used in many countries for security maintenance and surveillance.

So, This Is The Brave New World?...

Mqn's Mind Control Techniques

As I have already stated above that man has been working assudiously hard over the past centuries to refine their techniques of controlling the mind of man. And some of the cited material here sounds like they came off the SciFi shelves and umbelievable at first glance. Just googling the whole SciFi genre on articles, videos, lecturs, blogs and so forth, there is more than enough information that suggests this is not mere parattle and elongated talk just to stretch the Hub. It is the real world we live in today. The news cycle is just that, re-cycled news from whatever source. But the monitoring and controlling of the mind issues, as part of the news cycle, it might be thrown in as a news tit-bit-news novelty, when in fact it is what I have cited from the article by MindTech Sweden as the present-ism we now exist in nowadays-repetition of known information over and over again.

As I have quoted from Dobbs at the beginning of the Hub, wherein he states: ".. Believes that humanity itself has become a technological extension": "homeopathic retrieval."We no longer read the manual before powering on; we demand intuitive interfaces that appear up and running right away, while often masking important security settings. Studies show we want complexity, perceiving devices with more capabilities.

He believes that under the present "electric conditions," the "Second Nature body (technological Extension) is over-stimulated to the point of constant awareness. and maintains "nobody sleeps" because because nobody has a real body. According to Dobbs, Second Nature(we'll begin calling it what he says it is - Technological Extension) - oral and mechanical technological extension of the human being, which he sees as an artifact of the First Nature embodied condition.

It is this oscilation from nature to technique that is exploited by those who wish to control humanity in order to make them obey" the new technologies and their emergent techniques and protocol- that one has to put trust and opertional reality fully onto the technologial sphere that obeying is partly being enslaved to these techniques and gizmos.

The article by MindTech above is now an update about how far has man proceed in refining and fine-tuning his technique to work on Man's Mind Control programs and objectives. Since the Masters of Communications Theory and Media Studies sttae that our minds are holographical and conform to certain types of being synchronized, it is therefore one of the weak links in our being that is thoroughly exploited by these Mind Control experts above described by MindTech, that we need to take seriously and pay attenion to as our technologies progress and develop.

In these times and days of the Technological Socieites that we now live in, we need to explore and wxploit all amterial that pertaians to the techniques and technologies that are used, manipulated, applied and imposed upon us that we need to make sure we understand, study and master their modus operandi for us to survive the Tech-onslaught we are facing today in the environments and places of our abode.

Controlling Man's Faculties

Mind Control

Walter Bowart on what MK-Ultra victims taught him:

“Look at the DSM-IV is strongly influenced by the insurance companies and people having no experience in the richness of the human mind and spirit. That’s one of the things that the MK-Ultra victims taught me. Over and over I heard the phrase, “They didn’t mess with my mind; they messed with my soul.” I’ve begun to think in spiritual terms of what has gone on here. This is a horrible thing. [It is] just like the Inquisition, but more sophisticated and less visible. There’s no blood on the streets, but that makes it even more insidious. And of course the technology is now available to everyone…”

Mind control (also known as brainwashing, coercive persuasion, mind abuse, thought control, or thought reform) refers to a process in which a group or individual “systematically uses unethically manipulative methods to persuade others to conform to the wishes of the manipulator(s), often to the detriment of the person being manipulated”. The term has been applied to any tactic, psychological or otherwise, which can be seen as subverting an individual’s sense of control over their own thinking, behavior, emotions or decision making. Theories of brainwashing and of mind control were originally developed to explain how totalitarian regimes appeared to succeed in systematically indoctrinating prisoners of war through propaganda and torture techniques. These theories were later expanded and modified, by psychologists including Margaret Singer, to explain a wider range of phenomena, especially conversions to new religious movements (NRMs). A third-generation theory proposed by Ben Zablocki focused on the utilization of mind control to retain members of NRMs and cults to convert them to a new religion. The suggestion that NRMs use mind control techniques has resulted in scientific and legal controversy (Wikipedia).

brain-programming – “Signals Intelligence implemented and kept this technology secret in the same manner as other electronic warfare programs of the U.S. government. The NSA monitors available information about this technology and withholds scientific research from the public. There are also international intelligence agreements to keep this technology secret. The NSA has proprietary electronic equipment that analyzes electrical activity in humans from a distance. NSA computer-generated brain mapping can continuously monitor all of the electrical activity in the brain continuously. The NSA records and decodes individual brain maps (of hundreds of thousands of persons) for national security purposes. EMF Brain Stimulation is also secretly used by the military for bring-to-computer links. (In military fighter aircraft, for example.) For electronic surveillance purposes electrical activity in the speech center of the brain can be translated into the subject’s verbal thoughts. RNM can send encoded signals to the brain’s auditory cortex thus allowing audio communications direct to the brain (bypassing the ears). NSA operatives can use this to covertly debilitate subjects by simulating auditory hallucinations characteristic of paranoid schizophrenia. Without any contact with the subject, Remote Neural Monitoring can map out electrical activity from the visual cortex of a subject’s brain and show images from the subject’s brain on a video monitor. NSA operatives see what the surveillance subject’s eyes are seeing. Visual memory can also be seen. RNM can send images direct to the visual cortex, bypassing the eyes and optic nerves. NSA operatives can use this to surreptitiously put images in a surveillance subject’s brain while they are in R.E.M. sleep for brain-programming purposes.” (Domestic Surveillance and Mind Control Technology?)

depatterning technique – “Linda MacDonald was a victim of Dr. Ewen Cameron’s unethical, destructive mind control experiments between May 1 and September 12, 1963. Dr. Cameron used a “treatment” which involved intensive application of three brainwashing techniques: drug disinhibition, prolonged sleep treatment, and prolonged psychological isolation. These were combined with ECT treatments. The amount of electricity introduced into Linda’s brain exceeded by 76.5 times the maximum amount recommended in the ECT Guidelines of the American Psychiatric Association. Dr. Cameron proved that doctors skilled in the right procedures can erase a subject’s memory. His depatterning technique resulted in permanent and complete amnesia. To this day, Linda MacDonald is unable to remember anything from her birth to 1963. As recorded by her nurses in her chart, Linda was reduced to a vegetable state by depatterning. She was completely disoriented. She didn’t know her name, age, or where she was. She didn’t recognize her children. She couldn’t read, drive, cook, or use a toilet. Not only did she not know her husband, she didn’t even know what a husband was.” (‘On This Day’ 1953: U.S. Begins Project MK-ULTRA Mind Control Experiments)

subconscious mind – “The essence of their control tactics is of splitting the mind at a young age. This entails a process of trauma, torture, degradation and humiliation of the subject. The process is different for each individual, but in essence they go to your subconscious mind and find out what the most personal parts of you are. Then they essentially use this against you to break you down and rip your mind apart. What happens is this: An individual who possesses special mental abilities is selected at a very young age. (Very often they are from military families or from multigenerational Satanic ritual abuse families-EL) Then they are subjected to various stages of terror and horror to begin to separate them from their own minds. It is a process of progressive dissociation and compartmentalization of the mind and personality. They control your mind through various complicated hypnosis techniques and commands until they create the perfect Manchurian Candidate.(See The Greenbaum Speech by D.C. Hammond) They program you to do something, then erase the memory. Basically they program your mind as if it were a computer. Once they install the magic word, all they have to do is say it and you’re under their control. This happens from an early age so it is easier to control them if they are conditioned and dissociated into several personalities. Another method of control is that they send in special people in your lives, handlers and controllers who pose as friends, teachers, “deprogrammers”, roommates, lovers, etc. who are actually operatives for the mind control projects. Some are sleeper operatives who don’t even know they are being used to a certain extent. It makes it hard to trust anyone at this point…For those who want to get out of the influence of the programs of mind control, you must have a strong fighting instinct to do what is right regardless of what others are doing. Your only cage is the one you build for yourself. You must connect with your highest self to break the evil that is all around us, and not succumb to doing evil just because everyone else is doing it. Retain your fundamental sense of right and wrong. It all goes back to the basic conflict basic good and evil. It is like the dark forces in power of the planet at this time are trying to cheat their way into heaven or higher dimensions.” – Andy Pero (Interview with Andy Pero, Montauk superman programming victim).

satanic cults – “The government ties to the cults are the politicians that I believe have realized and are very aware that people in the cults, especially in the satanic cults where they are born and have multiple personality systems from the abuse in the family, are certainly prime candidates because of their dissociative abilities and inability to stay present in a unified, whole way with their minds to even know what’s going on. I believe that through the politicians and through the military – the bases were used with a lot of the equipment for the mind control and certainly used as a way to cover up these experiments by saying they were military projects. There is a base in California, Point Magoo Naval Base on the coast there, it was real close to my house where myself and my children reported. That base was until recently armed with a man with a gun in the tower. You want to ask people what – in my recovery I wanted to ask people, “why would you think that a military base here in California on the coast would need to have men with submachine guns standing up in the guard tower?” I believe that the military was used as a branch of the government in order to house these projects in a way they could be kept secret from the public and yet here the public is paying taxes and actually funding these research projects in ways that they have no idea where their money is going. People are only beginning to demand to know about these secret projects through the Freedom of Information Act. I think the government ties are very strong. There are certain individuals within the government who have certainly been a part of this New World Order plan. From what I saw with the presidents all being involved with their Masonic connections, and certainly some of them with higher Masonic connections than others. The mind control technology is hidden at the level of the 33 degree Masons. I believe this branches out to a lot of top hierarchy of a lot of organizations and not just the government – but also into the major corporations of the world where a lot of the corporate heads have been manipulated into this system. Where there is talent, money, power and control the secrecy has worked its way in.” – Susan Ford (Brice Taylor interview at CKLN – Part 1 & 2).

fascist dictatorship – “…We are accused of crimes that we have not committed, denied our Constitutional right to due process of law, and subjected to slander campaigns that are as outrageous as they are illegal. What the Intel community is concerned most about here, is that if the American public learns that they have been secretly brain fingerprinted by the National Security Agency, it will prove that the United States Federal Government is controlled by a shadow government based on a fascist dictatorship, which masquerades as a democratic republic. The outrageous lies which the FBI continues to promulgate in regard to this author are not only vicious, but also intended to obscure the Bureau’s egregious violations of both my Family’s and my person’s civil liberties. And as stated in the past, the FBI continues to use its coercive tactics (blackmail) in which to hold this author’s Family hostage, while forcing them to surrender their inherent protections under the United States Bill Of Rights. The FBI’s outrageous lies are only equalled by their egregious disregard for the Constitutional rule of law in this country. There is no lie which these agents will not promulgate, regardless of how despicable, and there is no crime (including torture and murder) which they will not commit, provided that they believe that they can do so with plausible deniability. Abject violations of the U.S. Constitution, which they continue to perpetrate without any oversight from the Department Of Justice or The United States Congress. What follows is the cache version of a Webpage which documented the computer to brain interface which the NSA has and continues to subject this author to. And like many other Webpages which have documented this technology as it applies to some government agency, this Webpage has now also been removed…” – James F. Marino (FASCISM — ’9-11′ — MIND CONTROL The Mother Of All Black Operations – Intel Continues To Have Websites Documenting NSA Computer To Brain Interface Removed From The Internet).

sound frequencies – “…O’Brien indicated that what compelled the pair to come forward with their story was a quest to find help for Kelly, who was also a victim of the mind control program. They explained that Kelly had been subjected to a more modernized form of mind control called “harmonic technologies.” Phillips described the technique as using sound frequencies to scar the brain and “re-route the person’s ability to think.” This fragments the victim’s mind in ways similar to earlier, more trauma-based methods. The technique is so invasive, they said, that Kelly has yet to make a complete recovery from her abuse due to extensive damage to her brain stem…TRANCE Formation of America is the documented autobiography of a victim of government mind control. Cathy O’Brien is the only vocal and recovered survivor of the Central Intelligence Agency’s MK-Ultra Project Monarch mind control operation. Chiseled deep into the white stone of the CIA’s Langley, Virginia headquarters is a partial verse lifted from the Holy Bible and writings of Saint John…”and the truth shall make you free.” This statement, like the agency, is total reality. The building that it is engraved upon houses the world’s most successful manufacturer of lies to facilitate psychological warfare. Through the courageous efforts of Mark Phillips (internationally recognized expert in mind control and deprogramming), Cathy was rescued from certain death and then began the long reconstructive journey back to “wholeness.” Cathy’s words strike deep in the heart of the beast and reveal the cruel, murderous world of mind control in all of its ugly facets, exposing many famous people, particularly in the high-flying worlds of politics and music. Cathy’s recall is so well articulated that even the most skeptical minds will be forced to recognize that MK-Ultra Monarch Mind Control is not a theory, but an ugly reality…” (Government Mind Control…The Cathy O’Brien Story)

our different identities - “…Luis Enjarocasetio (sp) an attempted assassin of Ferdinand Marcos in the Phillipines. He was arrested by the Phillipine National Bureau of Investigation, the equivalent of the FBI. They called in, unlike in the USA where nobody believes this could happen, those guys called in a hypnotist and began to deprogram this guy. They found four different identities when he was in custody. He had 40 hypnotic sessions from April 3 to June 25, 1967. He displayed four distinct personalities. He was put into a trance and given an empty pistol. In the first personality he would follow whoever was talking with the pistol, pulling the trigger over and over. In the second personality he would aim only at the picture of Marcos and pull the trigger over and over. In the third personality he would end up falling off the table to the floor and remain motionless. The report said, in the last state, a “pathetic sight takes place – the subject turns the pistol to his own temple and squeezes the trigger as many times as his name is repeated.” (History of Mind Control By Walter Bowart)

Mind Control

Social Media May Destroy Empathy

The Topic of this Hub is "Who(says) What(to) Whom(in) What Channel/Stream(with) What Effect..." can be framed thusly, given todays modus operandi of the merging and emerging technologies,in the following maner: Who Is Relaying Or Communicating What, With Whom, Through Which/What Medium, And What are their Effects and Affects On the Users. I hold it that the new technologies are indeed affecting us in many ways.The way smartphones, i-Pads, Kindle or e-Book and the means of communicaton, this has affected our interaction with one another, the languages we uses on face-to-face commuictons has become a new wayof Intenret Speak; I am saying this to point out that our new technologies and their techniques are affecting and effecting us in malitfarious ways.

I would like to use a piece that was srtiten about this subject along with the article's original photos he used in order to ilustrate this point I am making that our new techologies and their techniques are adversely altering our consioussness, cognition and make us defer matters that the brain dealt with to these technonological gizmos/mediums. The Following article and photos were posted and writen by Morris M, on the Technology Website.

1. There’s a lot of research out there to suggest today’s youth are way less empathetic than youth 30 years ago—precisely 40 percent less, according to the study cited in that link back there. Students today are less likely to feel for others, to show concern for others, and are significantly worse at prescriptive talking—the ability to perceive other people’s thoughts, feelings, and motivations.

No one knows for sure why this is. It could be a wider societal problem, or down to the cultural rise of aggressive individualism, but some think the blame lies firmly at the door of social media.Think about it: We’ve all watched videos of someone getting hurt or humiliated (usually both), before tweeting them on to all six of our followers. We’ve all laughed at that douchebag who got his painful comeuppance on TV, or that overweight person wheeling themselves around Walmart.

Does that sound like empathetic behavior to you? No, it sounds callous, and scientists are suggesting that that may be down to social media forcibly slowing our compassion responses. Now, the research into this is far from conclusive, but it does make you wonder: If this is what a decade of social media can do, what will the effects be in the future? Judging by this list, the entire Internet will be full of miserable, angry idiots shouting their opinions at one another and sadistically reveling in the misfortune of others. So no change there, then.

It Spreads Extremism

It’s More Addictive Than Heroin

2. Internet Use Disorder (IUD) is a not-yet-official mental health disorder, whereby sufferers find themselves addicted to the Internet. It sounds like the sort of hilarious excuse 14-year-olds make up when their mom asks why they spend all day online, but there’s a lot of research out there that suggests it’s both very real and deeply unpleasant. Sufferers show symptoms of withdrawal when unable to get online, while those that do seem to undergo a process in their brains that’s near-identical to that experienced by cocaine and heroin addicts. That’s right: Using the Internet every single day apparently effects your brain very similarly to shooting up behind a dumpster.

3. Put simply, social media is one of the greatest recruitment tools extremists have. In 2011, the UK government declared it had “transformed the extent to which terrorist organisations and their sympathizers can radicalize people in this country.” A year later, the BBC investigated Al-Qaeda’s Twitter strategy (yep, they totally have one) and found that the terrorist organisation’s presence was “limited, rather sophisticated and increasing.” By setting up accounts in the name of wanted terrorists, they were reaching a wider audience and exerting greater influence than ever—up to and including recruitment. But it’s not just Islamic extremists who are benefiting from social media. Norwegian scumbag Anders Breivik is known to have been radicalized by far-right websites and forums, while the Simon Wiesenthal Center estimates Twitter helped spur a 30 percent growth in web-based hate and terror forums last year. That ain’t a figure to be proud of.

It Allows Companies To Influence Us

4. “Astroturfing” is when companies set up thousands of fake “grassroots” personalities to swamp message boards with a specific opinion in the hopes that you will notice the sheer number of comments arguing that Snooki should be president (or whatever) and be swayed by them. It’s used by everyone from tobacco companies to the US Air Force—and the terrifying thing is, it’s working. A Canadian study got 278 students to answer a questionnaire about climate change and how they felt about it. They were then randomly assigned to view either a real climate science page, or an “astroturf” one set up to discredit the idea. What they found was that students who visited the fake pages and encountered the fake commenters were more likely to be less certain about climate change than before, even when they thought the websites were lying. That’s deeply troubling: These students were specifically affected by the astroturf sites, and astroturf sites are, by definition, big money sites intent on sabotaging honest debate. And companies are using them to acquire illegitimate influence all the time.

It’s Rewiring Our Brains

5. It’s pretty much undeniable that the Internet is changing the way we think and do things. But could it go so far as to actually rewire our brains? Well, in 2011, a study came out suggesting it might be doing exactly that.By scanning the brains of 125 students in London, researchers noticed a direct link between the number of Facebook friends the students had and the amount of grey matter in certain regions of their brains. Since these regions are thought to play a part in memory, social interaction, and possibly even autism, this is kinda important. Now, the study can’t tell us for certain whether social media is causing this rewiring or whether people with these different brain structures are simply more likely to flock to Facebook. But there is plenty of evidence that the Internet is affecting the way we behave, so who knows what else it might be doing.

It Might Make You Dumber

6. In 2009, the journal Science published an overview of studies about the effect of new media on our cognitive abilities. They found that while the Internet can increase “visual literacy skills,” that increase appears to be offset with decreases in other areas, such as critical thinking, inductive problem solving, imagination, and “abstract vocabulary.” In other words, we may be getting better at some stuff, but we’re becoming a lot dumber in other areas. And the areas we’re becoming dumber in might be more important: Critical thinking and imagination are pretty vital human traits. If we end up trading them in for super-duper “visual literacy skills,” it won’t exactly be the trade of a lifetime.

Facebook Also Makes You Racist

7. We all know that the Internet is a breeding ground for racism; anyone who thinks otherwise can try spending an hour or so surfing YouTube comments and report back. But most of us assume that it’s just jerkwads being their usual jerky selves and that most non-jerks will ignore them. Sadly, this may not be true. A recent study looked at the links between social media use and racism and found that people who spend a lot of time on Facebook are more likely to be accepting of prejudice. Researchers set up a fake profile for a fictitious white guy named Jack Brown, then asked participants to rate how much they agreed with his statements. One statement claimed that whites were superior to blacks, another that whites are victimized by society, while a final one gave examples of anti-black prejudice “Jack” had witnessed. Overwhelmingly, those participants who were frequent Facebook users expressed strong support for the “superiority” statement, i.e., the most racist of the lot. Now, this could simply mean that racists are more likely to frequently use Facebook than us non-racists, but either way it’s a pretty grim result.

We Get Twitter Rage

8. Think back to the last Tweet you saw that really caused a reaction in you. Chances are it was something that pissed you off: a liberal howling for more gun control, or a conservative snarling about abortion doctors, or whatever. Well, according to researchers, that’s because social media is basically powered by anger. Chinese researchers studied over 70 million posts on Sina Weibo (China’s version of Twitter) to see how different emotions spread across the network. They found that anger utterly trounces every other emotion for getting retweeted—leaving joy, disgust, and sadness trailing in its wake. Now, the study obviously only looked at Chinese users, but a quick non-scientific glance at the sort of topics trending on Twitter suggests it applies over here too. In short, social media is steadily making us less happy and more angry. But that’s not all it’s doing.

Facebook Makes You Miserable

9. Facebook is the craze that refuses to die; the flash-in-the-pan website we’ve all ridiculed for years but can’t bring ourselves to quit. And according to science, it’s making us all miserable.A joint American/Belgian study monitored participants’ Facebook usage for two weeks while simultaneously keeping tabs on their mood. They found that frequent users reported lower life-satisfaction both at the end of the fortnight and after individual visits to the site. In other words, a single visit to Facebook was roughly the equivalent of watching a puppy get punched for four hours—but the bad news doesn’t stop there. A separate German investigation discovered that the primary emotion felt by young people on Facebook is envy—as in, proper green-eyed, bile-spitting, rage-inducing envy. The theory goes that most of us inflate our achievements and happiness on our profiles, but somehow miss the logical assumption that everyone else is doing it too.

Emai[Textingl Is Addictive (Just Like Gambling)

Email is one of the most useful tools to come out of the Internet. Aside from probably saving a kazillion trees, it’s allowed businesses fast and effective means of mass-communication and alerted the whole world to the tragic plight of Nigerian princes. It’s also turned billions of us into unwitting addicts. The trouble is, email follows something called the “variable interval reinforcement schedule,” which is the same process that drives gambling addiction. In both cases, you perform an action (check your email or put a coin in the machine) in the hopes of receiving a reward (an interesting email or a whole lotta money). But that reward only comes at unpredictable times—causing you to perform the first action more and more frequently. It’s one of the strongest habit-training methods known to man, and nearly everyone who owns a computer has been subjected to it for years.

Media Cosmopolitan..

Techne(Technique) In A Mediarized And Technicized Society

Morris M, as cited above, broke down, in a simple way, how the present technologies and how their techniques affect and effect us. In my prefaced remarks before I cited the article by Morris M, I was attempting to elaborate the point that we are affected and effected by the new merging and emerging technological gizmos and their embedded techniques. Usually, when I want to make my oint much more concrete, and in such instances, I defer to the experts I call Media Ecologists, and One of my favorites, amongst the many, is Jacques Ellul..

"Ours is a progressively technical civilization": By this ellul means that the ever expanding and irreversible rle of techniques extended to all domains of life. "it is a civilization committed to the quest for continually improved means to carelessly examined ends. Indeed, technique transforms ends into means. What was once prized in its own right now becomes worthwhile only if it helps achieve something else. And, conversely, technique turns means into ends. "Know-how" takes the ultimate value.

"Only the naive can really believe that the world-wide movement toward centralism results from the machinations of eveil statesmen. ... The intellectual discipline of economics itself becomes 'technicized'. Technical economic ananlysis is subjected substituted for the older political economy included in which was a major concern with the moral structure of economic activity. Thus, 'doctrine' is converted into 'procedure'. In this sphere as in others, the technicians form a closed fraternity with their own esoteric vocabulary. Moreover, they are concerned only with what 'is', as distinct from what 'ought to be'.

"Politics in turn becomes an arena for contention among rival techniques. The technician sees the nation differently fro the political man: to the'technician', the nation is nothing more than another sphere in which to apply the instruments he has developed. to him, the State is not the expression of the will of the people nor a divine creation, nor a creature of class conflict. It is an enterprise providing services that must be made ro function "efficiently".

"He judges States in terms of thir capacit to utilize techniques 'effectively', not in trams of their relative justice. Political doctrine revolves around what is 'usefu'l rather than what is 'good'. Purposes dropout of sight and efficiency becomes the central concern As the political form best suited to the massive and unprincipled use of technique, dictatorship gains power: either they too use some version of "effective technique"-"centralized control" and "propaganda-or they will fall behind.

"Restraints on the rule of technique become increasingly tenuous. Public opinion provides no control because it too is largely orientated toward "performance" and technique is is regarded asthe prime instrument of "performance", whether in the economy or in politics, in art or in sports.

"Not understanding what the rule of technique is doing to him and to his world, modern man is beset by anxiety and a feeling of insecurity. He tries to adapt to changes he cannot comprehend. the conflict of propaganda takes the place of the debate of ideas. techique smothers the ideas that pt its rule into question and filters out for for public discussion only those ideas that are in substatnital accord with the values created by a technical civilization. social criticism is negated becasue there is only slight access to the techical means required to reach large mumbers of people.

"In ellul's conception, then, "life is not happy in a civilization dominated by 'technique. Even the outward show of happiness is boght at the price of total acquiescence. The technological society requires men to be content with what they are required to 'like'; for those for those who are not content, it provides distractions-escape into absorption with technically dominated media of popular culture and communication. And the process is a natural one; every part of a technical civilization responds to the social needs generated by 'technique' itself. Progress then consists in progressive de-humanization=a busy, pointless, and, in the end, suicidal submission to technique"

Real Media Today...

Technique: Concretely And Definitive Techne-Strictly speaking

Amn-Made Electic Media/Technological Environments

McLuhan writes:

"A technique is a way through which we can manipulate the rough natural environment. Technology is a family of 'techniques. Technology puts technique's products on the same level of the natural resources. This process modify the relationship between human activity and the environment that people inhabit. Indeed, a medium could be seen as the environment created by a technology which is used by a community.

"There are different phases in the construction of a new human environment; discovery of creation of the environment, modification for needs and ends; sccupation by communities. the traditional ecology of print communication has been modified by electricity, so technology, as well as a different format, could modify activities or create new activities. The forms of human agency have a very close relatiohip wth th structural properties of the environment in which they are developed.

"When we face a new media landscape, we have to ask ourselves which are the demands of the technology, emenands of the individuals, demands of the environment. The demands of the individuals are, obviously, selfish. The demands of the technology could be dangerous for the environment. The environment's are most useful to examine. They involve the sustainability and the equilibrium of the environment. The only occasion in which we can ignore the environment's demand is when we wamt tp destroy the environment itself.

"However, we have channeled tje matural forces.like electricity and muclear energy, into the human world of artifact whih is no more separated from nature. Electricity (...) determines the present stage of technical development

"We changed and denaturalized nature for our own world ends, so that the human world or artifice on one hand, and nature on the other, remained two distinctly separate entities. Today we have begun to "creat," as it were, that is, to unchain natural processes of our won with would never have happened witout us, and instead of carefully surrounding the human artifice with defenses against nature's elementary forces, keeping them as far as possible outside the man-made world, we have channeled these forces, along with their elementary power, into the world itself." (McLuhan/Arendt)

So, we put back nature in our artifice.The electric technology gives animation to our communication system, so they become environments-Media Environments.

We therefore pick up this point below that K Merton makes more poignant about Ellul's definitive thesis of what the whole 'technical civilization's technique' is all about.

"The essential point, according to Ellul, is that 'technique' produces al this without plan; no one wills it or arranges that to be so. Our technical civilization does not result rom a Machiabellian scheme. It is a response to the "laws of development" of technique. Expand on this thesis, Ellul reopens the great debate over the social, political, economic, and philosophical meaning to technique in the 'modern age'.

John Wilkinson writes: Professor Ellul, unlikemost of the surviving leaders of the French Resistance, still functions as a vice of conscience for France which seems to feel itself in danger of being overwhelmed.

"Technique, must be differentiated from several 'techniques' wich are its elements. It is more than a generalized mechanicl technique: It is, in fact,nothhing less than the organized ensemble of all individual techniques which have been use to scute any end.

"Harold Laswell succintly put it this way:

"The ensemble of practices by which one uses available resources to achieve values.

"Technique, as the universal and autonomous technical fact, is revealed as the 'technological society' itself in which man is but a single tightly integrated and articulated component" So that, Ellul sees the 'technological society' as a way in which 'autonoumous technology is in process of taking over the traditional values of every society without exception, subverting and suppressing these values to produce at las a monolithic world culture in which all non technological difference and variety is mear appearance.

The Past And The Future Presentism

The Present Was Our Future In The Past

I went in-detph about the description and making more condrete the more easy to understand and utilizable term, 'technique' in regards to the modern-day technology. So that, Mind Control Through Technique, the latter part of the topic of this Hub, involves a ways and means that we need to really put into its proper perspective, enabling us to better understand and come to clear terms as to what it is that we call 'technique', that is, understand in an imformed manner 'technique's affects and effects on us today.

I cited the article and its pictures by Morris M to break down the jargon by Ellul and McLuhan above. At this point and time, we are using all these media and mediums, and they do affect us. If controlling one's mind means being robotic or zombie-like, I concede that point. But these new technological gizmos facilitate for the originators to control our mind using technique - al la Ellul, above). This is a huge paradigmatic shift from the analogic techical times, to the present-day digi-stream.

That is why I love Rushkoff's take and explanation of the affects and effects of present-day. That is why when we read from some of the things that Rushkoff is talking about about contemporary technology, we learn that"

"The future arrived a little while ago-maybe with Y2K, maybe with September 11. Now it's here. And we are stuck with "a diminishment of everything that isn't happening right now -and the onslaught of everything that supposedly is. In my book, "present Shock" is simply describing how we have lost our capacity to absorb traditional narrative. In it I explain what we have used to replace it. there was a time, when everything had narrative structure, even TV ads. Captive audiences sat through commercials that introduced a protagonist, presented a problem, then pitched a product to solve it.

The little story eneded well, at least from the advertiser's point of view. But now viewers may be more angry than bored with such intrusions. They know that "someone you don't trust is attempting to make you anxious," soth they ditch the ad before it's over."

When Mr.

moves on to what he calls digiphrenia — digitally provoked mental chaos — he writes about present shock’s capacity to be a great leveler. Now that a single Facebook post can have as much impact as 30 years’ worth of scholarship, how do we analog creatures navigate the digital landscape? How do we shield ourselves from distraction, or gravitate to what really matters?
This section of Mr. Rushkoff’s veers into chronobiology, a burgeoning science that has not yet achieved peak popular impact. Dr. Oz may speak of it on television, but the correlation between time and physiology is ripe for more exploration.

Among the intuitive ideas turned tangible by “Present Shock” is “filter failure,” the writer and teacher Clay Shirky’s improved term for what used to be called “information overload.” Mr. Rushkoff’s translation: “Whatever is vibrating on the iPhone just isn’t as valuable as the eye contact you are making right now.”

DLD NYC 14 - Present Shock (Douglas Rushkoff)

There are many Media Therorist or what I call, Media Ecologists of note, and some I have cited above. I found Jean Baudrillard who frames his theoretical expertise in how he first ciritiued McLuhan, but in the end, the formulas of McLuhan became the guiding principles of his own ideas and thoughts. I thought I would cull from a reaearch piece written by Douglas Kellner, wherein he writes:

"During the 1980s, Jean Baudrillard has been promoted in certain circles as the new McLuhan, as the most advanced theorist of the media and society in the so-called postmodern era. His theory of a new, postmodern society rests on a key assumption that the media, simulations, and what he calls "cyberblitz" constitute a new realm of experience and a new stage of history and type of society.

To a large extent, Baudrillard's work consists in rethinking radical social theory and politics in the light of developments of the consumer, media, information, and technological society. Baudrillard's earlier works focus on the construction of the consumer society and how it provides a new world of values, meaning, and activity, and thus inhabit the terrain of Marxism and political economy.

From the mid-1970s on, however, reflections on political economy and the consumer society disappear almost completely from his texts, and henceforth simulations and simulacra, media and information, science and new technologies, and implosion and hyperreality become the constituents of a new postmodern world which -- in his theorizing -- obliterate all the boundaries, categories, and values of the previous forms of industrial society while establishing new forms of social organization, thought, and experience.

Among Baudrillard's most provocative theses are his reflections on the role of the media in constituting the postmodern world. Indeed, he provides paradigmatic models of the media as all-powerful and autonomous social forces which produce a wide range of effects. To explicate the development and contours of his positions on the media, I shall follow his reflections from the late 1960s to the present, and sort out what I consider to be his contributions and limitations. I shall also be concerned to delineate the political implications of his media theory and to point to alternative theoretical and political perspectives on the media.

Baudrillard's Postmodern Media Theory

In 1967, Baudrillard wrote a review of Marshall McLuhan's _Understanding Media_ in which he claimed that McLuhan's dictum that the "medium is the message" is "the very formula of alienation in a technical society," and he criticized McLuhan for naturalizing that alienation. At this time, he shared the neo-Marxian critique of McLuhan as a technological reductionist and determinist. By the 1970s and 1980s, however, McLuhan's formula eventually became the guiding principle of his own thought.

Baudrillard begins developing his theory of the media in an article "Requiem for the Media" in _Toward a Critique of the Political Economy of the Sign_ (1972). The title is somewhat ironic for Baudrillard is really only beginning to develop a social theory in which the media will play crucial roles in constituting a new postmodernity.

Thus Baudrillard is really writing a requiem here for a 'Marxist theory of the media' arguing: "McLuhan has said, with his usual Canadian-Texan brutalness, that Marx, the spiritual contemporary of the steam engine and railroads, was already obsolete in his lifetime with the appearance of the telegraph. In his candid fashion, he is saying that Marx, in his materialist analysis of production, had virtually circumscribed productive forces as a privileged domain from which language, signs and communication in general found themselves excluded" (CPES, p. 164).

Baudrillard's critique of Marx here begins a radical interrogation of and eventual break with Marxism which would culminate in _The Mirror of Production_ (1973). Baudrillard begins distancing himself from Marxism in "Requiem for the Media," and in particular attacks Marx's alleged economic reductionism, or "productivism," and the alleged inability of the Marxian theory to conceptualize language, signs, and communication (Habermas at the time was developing a parallel position within Critical Theory).

As an example of the failure of Marxian categories to provide an adequate theory of the media, Baudrillard criticizes the German activist and writer Hans Magnus Enzensberger's media theory and his attempts to develop a socialist strategy for the media. Baudrillard dismisses this effort as a typical Marxian attempt to liberate productive forces from the fetters of productive relations that fails to see that in their very form the mass media of communication "are anti-mediatory and intransitive.

They fabricate non communication -- this is what characterizes them, if one agrees to define communication as an exchange, as a reciprocal space of a speech and a response, and thus of a responsibility (not a psychological or moral responsibility, but a personal, mutual correlation in exchange) .... they are what always prevents response, making all processes of exchange impossible (except in the various forms of response simulation, themselves integrated in the transmission process, thus leaving the unilateral nature of the communication intact). This is the real abstraction of the media. And the system of social control and power is rooted in it" (CPES, pp. 169-170).

It is curious that Baudrillard, interpreted by many of his followers as an avant-garde, postmodern media theorist, manifests in this passage both technophobia and a nostalgia for face-to-face conversation which he privileges (as authentic communication) over debased and abstract media communication. Such a position creates a binary dichotomy between "good" face-to-face communication and "bad" media communication, and thus occludes the fact that interpersonal communication can be just as manipulative, distorted, reified, and son on, as media communication (as Ionesco and Habermas, among others, were aware), while ruling out in advance the possibility of "responsible" or "emancipatory" media communication -- a point that I shall return to in conclusion.

In another study in the _Critique of the Political Economy of the Sign_, Baudrillard noted how the "TV Object" was becoming the center of the household and was serving an essential "proof function" that the owner was a genuine member of the consumer society (CPRES, pp. 53ff.). The accelerating role of the media in contemporary society is for Baudrillard equivalent to THE FALL into the postmodern society of simulations from the modern universe of production.

Modernity for Baudrillard is thus the era of production characterized by the rise of industrial capitalism and the hegemony of the bourgeoisie while postmodern society is an era of simulation dominated by signs, codes, and models. Modernity thus centered on the production of things -commodities and products -- while postmodernity is characterized by radical semiurgy, by a proliferation of signs.

Furthermore, following McLuhan, Baudrillard interprets modernity as a process of explosion of commodification, mechanization, technology, and market relations, while postmodern society is the site of an implosion of all boundaries, regions, and distinctions between high and low culture, appearence and reality, and just about every other binary opposition maintained by traditional philosophy and social theory. Furthermore, while modernity could be characterized as a process of increasing differentiation of spheres of life (Max Weber as interpreted by Habermas), postmodernity could be interpreted as a process of de-differentiation and attendent implosion.

The rise of the broadcast media, especially television, is an important constituent of postmodernity for Baudrillard, along with the rapid dissemination of signs and simulacra in every realm of social and everyday life. By the late 1970s, Baudrillard interprets the media as key simulation machines which reproduce images, signs, and codes which constitute an autonomous realm of (hyper)reality and which come to play a key role in everyday life and the obliteration of the social.

Baudrillard's analyses of simulations and hyperreality probably constitute his most important contributions to social theory and media critique. During an era when movie actors simulate politics and charlatans simulate TV-religion the category of simulation provides an essential instrument of radical social critique, while the concept of hyperreality is also an extremely useful instrument of social analysis for a media, cybernetic, and information society.

Baudrillard's analyses point to a significant reversal of the relation between representation and reality. Previously, the media were believed to mirror, reflect, or represent reality, whereas now the media are coming to constitute a (hyper)reality, a new media reality -- "more real than real" -- where "the real" is subordinate to representation leading to an ultimate dissolving of the real.

In addition, in "The Implosion of Meaning in the Media," Baudrillard claims that the proliferation of signs and information in the media obliterates meaning through neutralizing and dissolving all content -- a process which leads both to a collapse of meaning and the destruction of distinctions between media and reality. In a society supposedly saturated with media messages, information and meaning "implode," collapsing into meaningless "noise," pure effect without content or meaning.

Thus, for Baudrillard: "information is directly destructive of meaning and signification, or neutralizes it. The loss of meaning is directly linked to the dissolving and dissuasive action of information, the media, and the mass media.... Information devours its own contents; it devours communication and the social.... information dissolves meaning and the social into a sort of nebulous state leading not at all to a surfeit of innovation but to the very contrary, to total entropy" (SSM, pp. 96-100).

Baudrillard uses here a model of the media as a black hole of signs and information which absorb all contents into cybernetic noise which no longer communicates meaningful messages in a process of implosion where all content implodes into form. We thus see here how Baudrillard eventually adopts McLuhan's media theory as his own, claiming that: "the medium is the message signifies not only the end of the message, but also the end of the medium.

There are no longer media in the literal sense of the term (I am talking above all about the electronic mass media) -- that is to say, a power mediating between one reality and another, between one state of the real and another -- neither in content nor in form. Strictly speaking this is what implosion signifies: the absorption of one pole into another, the short-circuit between poles of every differential system of meaning, the effacement of terms and of distinct oppositions, and thus that of the medium and the real.

Hence the impossibility of any mediation, of any dialectical intervention between the two or from one to the other, circularity of all media effects. Hence the impossibility of a sense (meaning), in the literal sense of a unilateral vector which leads from one pole to another. This critical -- but original -- situation must be thought through to the very end; it is the only one we are left with. It is useless to dream of a revolution through content or through form, since the medium and the real are now in a single nebulous state whose truth is undecipherable" (SSM, pp. 102-103).

In effect, Baudrillard is suggesting that the very project of developing a radical theory of the media is impossible because there really are no "media" in the sense of institutions and cultural machines mediating between dominant political and economic powers and the population below. He claims that the media and "reality" implode such that it is impossible to distinguish between media representations and the "reality" which they supposedly represent.

Baudrillard also suggests that the media intensify massification by producing mass audiences and massification of ideas and experience. On the other hand, he claims that the masses absorb all media content, neutralize, or even resist, meaning, and demand and obtain more spectacle and entertainment, thus further eroding the boundary between media and "the real." In this sense, the media implode into the masses to an extent that it is unknowable what effects the media have on the masses and how the masses process the media.

Consequently, on this view, the media pander to the masses, reproducing their taste, their interest in spectacle and entertainment, their fantasies and way of life, producing an implosion between mass consciousness and media phantasmagoria. In this way, Baudrillard shortcircuits the manipulation theory which sees media manipulation imposed from above producing mass consciousness, yet he seems to share the contempt for the masses in standard manipulation theory claiming that they want nothing more than spectacle, diversion, entertainment and escape, and are incapable of, or uninterested in, producing meaning.

In any case, since the media and the masses liquidate meaning, it is meaningless to carry out ideological critiques of media messages since the "medium is the message" in the sense that media communication has no significant referents except its own images and noise which ceaselessly refer back and forth to other media images and spectacles. In _On Seduction_ (1979), Baudrillard utilizes McLuhan's distinction between "hot" and "cool" media to describe the ways that media devour information and exterminate meaning.

According to Baudrillard, the media take "hot" events like sports, wars, political turmoil, catastrophes, etc. and transform them into "cool" media events, which he interprets as altogether another kind of event and experience. Concerning the difference between a televised and attended sports event, Baudrillard writes: "Do not believe that it is a matter of the same game: one is hot, the other is cool -- one is a contest where affect, challenge, mise en scene, and spectacle are present, whereas the other is tactile, modulated (visions in flash-back, replays, close-ups or overhead views, various angles, etc.): a televised sports event is above all a televised event, just as _Holocaust_ or the Vietnam war are televised events of which one can hardly make distinctions" (SED, p. 217).

For Baudrillard, eventually, all the dominant media become "cool," erasing McLuhan's (problematical) distinction between hot and cool media. That is, for Baudrillard all the media of information and communication neutralize meaning and involve the audience in a flat, one-dimensional media experience which he defines in terms of a passive absorption of images, or a resistance of meaning, rather than the active processing or production of meaning.

The electronic media therefore on this account have nothing to do with myth, image, history, or the construction of meaning (or ideology). Television is interpreted instead as a media "which suggests nothing, which magnetises, which is only a screen, or is rather a miniaturized terminal which in fact is found immediately in your head -- you are the screen and the television is watching you. Television transistorizes all neurons and operates as a magnetic tape -- a tape not an image" (SED, p. 220).

Baudrillard, McLuhan and the Ecstasy of Communication

We see here how Baudrillard out-McLuhans McLuhan in interpreting television, and all other media, simply as technological forms, as machines which produce primarily technological effects in which content and messages, or social uses, are deemed irrelevant and unimportant. We also see how, like McLuhan, he anthropomorphizes the media ("the television is watching you"), a form of technological mysticism (or to be more nasty, mystification) as extreme as McLuhan. Like McLuhan, Baudrillard also globalizes media effects making the media demiurges of a new type of society and new type of experience.

Baudrillard also practices McLuhan's method of probes and mosaic constellations of images and concepts which take on an experimental and provisional nature. Consequently, whereas he sets forth theoretically articulated theses about the media in "Requiem," in his studies of simulations and later writings he tends to cluster images, concepts, and descriptive analyses, within which media often play a key role, rather than systematically articulating a well-defined theoretical position, thus adopting a key McLuhanite literary strategy.

Yet we might contrast here McLuhan's ecumenical Catholicism with Baudrillard's somewhat puritanical Protestantism. McLuhan fantasized a new type of global community and even a new universal (media) consciousness and experience through the dissemination of a global media system, the global village. McLuhan also believed that the media could overcome alienation produced by the abstract rationality of book culture which was being replaced by a new synaesthesia and harmonizing of the mind and body, the senses and technologies.

Baudrillard by contrast sees the media as external demigods, or idols of the mind -- to continue the Protestant metaphor --, which seduce and fascinate the subject and which enter subjectivity to produce a reified consciousness and privatized and fragmented life-style (Sartre's seriality). Thus while McLuhan ascribes a generally benign social destiny to the media, for Baudrillard the function of TV and mass media is to prevent response, to isolate and privatize individuals, and to trap them into a universe of simulacra where it is impossible to distinguish between the spectacle and the real, and where individuals come to prefer spectacle over "reality" (which both loses interest for the masses and its privileged status in philosophy and social theory).

The mass media are thus instruments for Baudrillard of a "cold seduction" whose narcissistic charm consists of a manipulative self-seduction in which we enjoy the play of lights, shadows, dots, and events in our own mind as we change channels or media and plug into the variety of networks -- media, computer, information -- that surround us and that allow us to become modulators and controllers of an overwhelming panoply of sights, sounds, information, and events. In this sense, media have a chilling effect (which is why Baudrillard allows McLuhan's "cool" to become downright "cold") which freeze individuals into functioning as terminals of media and communication networks who become involved as part and parcel of the very apparatus of communication. The subject, then, becomes transformed into an object as part of a nexus of information and communication networks.

The interiorization of media transmissions within the screen of our mind obliterates, he claims, the distinction between public and private, interior and exterior space -- both of which are replaced by media space. Here Baudrillard inverts McLuhan's thesis concerning the media as extensions of the human, as exteriorizations of human powers, and argues instead that humans internalize media and thus becomes terminals within media systems -- a new theoretical anti-humanism that might amuse Louis Althusser. The eye and the brain, on this model, replaces both the other sense organs and the hand as key instruments of human practice, as information processing replaces human practice and techne and poesis alike.

In "The Ecstasy of Communication" Baudrillard describes the media as instruments of obscenity, transparency, and ecstasy -- in special sense of these terms. He claims that in the postmodern mediascape, the domestic scene -- or the private sphere per se -- with its rules, rituals, and privacy is exteriorized, or made explicit and transparent, "in a sort of obscenity where the most intimate processes of our life become the virtual feeding ground of the media (the Loud family in the United States, the innumerable slices of peasant or patriarchal life on French television).

Inversely, the entire universe comes to unfold arbitrarily on your domestic screen (all the useless information that comes to you from the entire world, like a microscopic pornography of the universe, useless, excessive, just like the sexual close-up in a porno film): all this explodes the scene formerly preserved by the minimal separation of public and private, the scene that was played out in a restricted space" (p. 130).

In addition, the spectacles of the consumer society and the dramas of the public sphere are also being replaced by media events that replace public life and scenes with a screen that shows us everything instantaneously and without scruple or hesitation: "Obscenity begins precisely when there is no more spectacle, no more scene, when all becomes transparence and immediate visibility, when everything is exposed to the harsh and inexorable light of information and communication" (p. 130).

The ecstasy of communication: everything is explicit, ecstatic (out of or beyond itself), and obscene in its transparency, detail, and visibility: "It is no longer the traditional obscenity of what is hidden, repressed, forbidden or obscure; on the contrary, it is the obscenity of the visible, of the all-too-visible, of the more-visible-than-visible. It is the obscenity of what no longer has any secret, of what dissolves completely in information and communication" (p. 131).

One thinks here of such 1987 media obscenity concerning the trials and tribulations of Gary Hart and Donna Rice, of Jim Bakker and Jimmy Swaggart, of Ron and Nancy Reagans' cancer operations and astrology games, or the dirty business deals of his associates, and the dirty political deals of Iran/Contra -- all of which have been exposed to the glaring scrutiny of the media in which what used to be private, hidden, and invisible suddenly becomes (almost) fully explicit and visible.

In the ecstasy of communication everything becomes transparent, and there are no more secrets, scenes, privacy, depth or hidden meaning. Instead a promiscuity of information and communication unfolds in which the media circulate and disseminate a teeming network of cool, seductive and fascinating sights and sounds to be played on one's own screen and terminal.

With the disappearence of exciting scenes (in the home, in the public sphere), passion evaporates in personal and social relations, yet a new fascination emerges ("the scene excites us, the obscene fascinates us") with the very universe of media and communication. In this universe we enter a new form of subjectivity where we become saturated with information, images, events, and ecstasies. Without defense or distance, we become "a pure screen, a switching center for all the networks of influence" (p. 133). In the media society, the era of interiority, subjectivity, meaning, privacy, and the inner life is over; a new era of obscenity, fascination, vertigo, instantaneity, transparency and overexposure begins: Welcome to the postmodern world!

In his more recent 1980 writings which I have not examined here -- and which tend to recycle (i.e. simulate) his earlier positions -- Baudrillard continues to call attention to McLuhan as the great media theorist of our epoch and continues to subscribe to the postions that I explicated above, though occasionally he notes that one should even go further than he has so far in denying that the media are producers of meaning, or that media content or apparatus is important.

Media Ecology, Part Deaux

The Present-Day Media/Medium Are The Message

I like some of the ideas that are expounded upon by Baudrillard, but I have always paid more serious and closer atention to McLuhan. As the article points out above, Baudrillard was highly critical of McLuhan, so I readily and completely defer to McLuhan to better understand the present-day media and it's gizmos. Here are some Key Concepts from McLuhan:

1. The Medium Is The Message:

"Societies have always been shaped more by the nature of the media by which men communicate than by the content of the communication."

2. Media Ecology In A Nutshell:

"Media, by altering the environment, invoke in us unique ratios of sense alters the way we think and act-they way we perceive the world."

3. Understand The Media:

"In our own world as we become more aware of the effects of technology on psychic formation and manifestation, we are losing all confidence in our right to assign guilt. Ancient prehistoric societies regard violent crime as pathetic. The killer is regarded as we do a cancer victim. “How terrible it must be to feel like that,” they say."

4. Understaning Emerging Technologiecal Media:

Arnold Toynbee is innocent of any understanding of media as they have shaped history’ but he is full of examples that the student of media can use. At one moment he can seriously suggest that adult education, such as the Workers Educa- tional Association in Britain, is a useful counterforce to the popular press. Toynbee considers that although all of the oriental societies have in our time accepted the industrial technology and its political consequences: “On the cultural plane, how- ever, there is no uniform corresponding tendency.”

Viral Stream Over Mind Matter...

Globally Apartheidized Internet Distribution And Usage - Highlighted..

Africa is also underdeveloped by having less access to the Viral Stream/Connection..
Africa is also underdeveloped by having less access to the Viral Stream/Connection..

The Media And Mind Control: Understanding The Viral Soup

One of the most frustrating connudroms and confusing issues is the lack of understanding and using the media. The present-day Social Media, for instance, dictates how it should and can be used. We are merely playing catch-up in most cases with the new and evolving gizmos and the embedded techniques. Many, in my country of South Africa, have not really gotten around Understanding the media, and bring their own biases from the analog phase of our apartheidized mind-sets and existence.

So that, those who opposed Apartheid, and became Marxists, used the Marxist jargon and perspectives to try and solve and resolve our present social miasma. It is very discouraging, particularly since the world is gathered in the social media, to really work on or design from something original to ourselves. Many people do not read, in addition, we are a poor copy of our former masters, mentally, physically, spiritually and technologically.

We have jumped into and within this media without a thorough understanding of what we are dealing with here. We romanticize this media as something that makes us modern and advanced, whilst our people are spiralling deep into poverty and ignorance, whilst we wax political or otherwise; showing off our acquuired arrogant and ignorant selves in trying to ape Western cultural imperialism and financial bullyism. 'We are imitating everybody else, except the best of ourselves'(Clarke)

Our schools and forms of ecuational institutions are controlled and dictated to by Europeans(Local) and foreign academics. Many institutions in Mzantsi are contrlld and shaped by Wester Public relations Officers. They are the ones that set the agenda, technically and theoretically-even otherwise. Those of us who are born in South Africa, are just being wowed by these Spin Doctors to our detriment. During Apartheid, it ws very difficult for Africans here in south Africa to travel freely and en masse to Western Countries.

Now, since 1976 onwards, with the advent of Apartheid TV, to contemporary media as we see it today, many of us are enamored and bamboozled by the magic of these emerging gizmos and their techniques. In so much so, we imibe what they have to offer uncritically and without any of us trying to make it work for us. Instead, we use the present day techologies and Media to increase user-usege and profit the magnates that own and control this splurging detadata and all it has to offer. McLuhan somewhat captures our essence above:

"In our own world as we become more aware of the effects of technology on psychic formation and manifestation, we are losing all confidence in our right to assign guilt. Ancient prehistoric societies regard violent crime as pathetic. The killer is regarded as we do a cancer victim. “How terrible it must be to feel like that,” they say."

We have discarded the premises and protocols of our cultures and customs, and have opted to ape the present day technologies and their techniques, because we think in doing so, we are really modernized and upscale/Trending toward intellectual acuity and astuteness. Yet, our present culture, is infact adaptable and having more affinity to the present day technologies.

Our oral history and tradition is well-suited to be utilzed using the present-day media and its technologies, plus techniques. We instead, choose to overloook that fact and dub our cultures as backward and irrelevant. This is borne from the fact that we really do not understand the media-let alone misunderstaning ourselves.

The best of ourselves has been relgated to the invisible background, and this has left us ithe technological no-man's land. So much for our dysfunctional modernized and decrepit selves.One more thing is the state of internet access for the whole of Africa below..

The Underdeveloment Of The Internet In Africa, Today

The photo above is a clear indication how far we still have to go. Even if this Internet flow is present in the spotted wy shown above, it is also blocked and censored in various ways. Ad to that the exhorbitant prices to ve paid for the acees to the Web, and the gizmos to connect to it. Confounding all that, is lack of jobs, money and educaton for many Africans within the Continent.

Although I might critique the Africans of Mzantsi concerning their not Understaing The Media, I am also cognizant of the reality of the limited access that we have to dal with. this is so disturbing and very retrogressive, and we are not only trailing behind the West, we are far from some serious Intercontinetnal connectivivity and interaction. this is something that benefits the leaders of our down-trodden countries, and the poor are the total losers in all thsi farce.

Poverty and wars are making thigs more difficult, and ingorance compounds everything; greed and opportunisism of the African elite class makes for the worst that Africa gets in terms of things like the Internet. Whither Africa in the 21st Century?.. We are just as Baffled/Blackened(literally and figurativley) much more than everyone else. We have media vultures and potentates who are raking in millions from our not being on the Web as a Continent, and the very few places where it can be gotten(that is the Web) we are fleeced to the marrow. As as the writing of this article, as displayed by the photo above, were really going nowhere fast, here in the Continent of Africa and South Africa

The Natives Of Contemporary Technology: Babies..

Technology As Pedagogy

Ayisha Kalim wrote the following article:

Pedagogy in 21st Century! The Digital Era.

Pedagogy means the art and science of teaching. Therefore it addresses all types of skills, methods,strategies and models being exploited to deliver the education process to the students and educational stakeholders at large.
Fortunately, due to influx of technology boom and switching from analog technology into digital technology has brought the whole world at our finger tips with exponential level efficiency and speed. This digital experience is part of our daily routine now and we keep utilizing it according to our needs, requirements and understanding. Digital natives (generation who grew up with technology continues to evolve it today) while a Digital immigrant is an individual born before the existence of digital technology and adopted it to some extent in later life.
This huge change in technology has great impact on human life in the fields of education, business, economy, research, health, and entrepreneurship too. In education particularly technology demands creativity, innovation and higher order thinking skills to integrate in classroom teaching/learning process. Therefore, the traditional methodology of teaching is no more valid and reliable to lay our trust upon for future training of our children's education.

Contemporary pedagogical skills integration is not just confined to classroom teaching rather must focus on broader scale and influence the learner's life in global perspective to turn them into future leaders as technologists, educationists, doctors, business executives, entrepreneurs, social scientists, researchers and global citizens above all.
Learner centered teaching practices require three dimensional activities to be planned, modified and implemented in educational institutions, homes and life patters. Such programs and models must be thought provoking for our educational management consultants, educational stakeholders, higher education institutions and school managers/principals especially to reflect on their skills now.
We need to join hands together to face this global challenge now by invigorating our pedagogical skills in accordance with the 21st century skills to address the needs of digital age learner. Creating new culture in schools, colleges and universities with market driven and opportunity driven teaching and research platforms. Supervise and facilitate our businesses to provide new dimensions of experience to fresh employees in order to transform them into optimum performers. Social entrepreneurs primarily must provide new opportunities of growth and development to contemporary learner for a better tomorrow.
Pedagogy in 21st Century, the digital age is all about being global, being creative thinker and being an innovator to reach solutions of our problems through reflection and practice.

Techno Human Beings

This is the Shape And Modus Operandi In Modern Technological Societies Of Man And Gadgetry-powered by the Web(Wi-Fi) live and exist
This is the Shape And Modus Operandi In Modern Technological Societies Of Man And Gadgetry-powered by the Web(Wi-Fi) live and exist

Affects and Effects Of Technology On Man And His Culture-In Brief..

The impact on humans by technology is important for various reasons. I will just outline some of them below in a precis format.

We are fully dependent on technology today; It is true that technology helpes us everywhere; As McLuhan had pobserved; The world has changed into a global village; birtually everywhere, there are various applications of technologies in our dailylives and existence; Technologies have become inseparable today from human life

We do have the good and bad effects of technologies; It is worth noitng that technology has a staying power in our lives and it is leaving a discernable impact on our lives; In the same breath and tone, technologies are making us, its users to be its slaves; we are also dehumanized and dehumanizing each other through using and employing technology and its embedded techniques.

We use technology in Medicine, Health, eduation, Industries, Houses, Cars, Schools, Sports, food shopping and clothing malls and shops; we use it in our churches; also it can seen and found on our highways and by ways; in the rural and big city areas, in our day-to-day lives whilst interacting with one another. What I am saying is that we are in the presence and constatnly using technologies, today, that we have truly become a virtual tecchnological society.

The has cuased us to develop and have a total dependency on technology in every sphere of life here on Planet Earth. Yet, technology hs had good effects on us. It has managed to improve and made our transportation more faster and efficient; it has upgraded and made our commuication with one another much more faster; We are now able to and are in a position to continually share much informaition faster; also, it has assisted and enabled us to use it for the human body and ailments. We are also able to see much bigge and faster agricultural growth, and so on..

There are the bad effects of Technology; When technologies solve one problem, the cause and create other problems; technology has robotized man and made him more mechanical and depended on being like that; It has had an addictive pls on children by glueing them to their games; It has also made readily and accessible, Porno, and Child porno, easily abvailable online;we have also seen and are witnessing increasing health problems; Technology has also made possible the increase of Lethal weapons of war and mass killings.

Technologies have broken down our cognition, and ability to reain important information in our brains; We have become soloely and seriously dependent on it for data storage which we easily did in our brains, now ca no more do so. It has made us lazy, although some gadgets on the sport side, still a bit exhorbitant are offering alternatives, but we have subesequently become lazi and sit down most of the time, unles one is involved in the Wii, or Karaoke and such like gadgets like training equipment and so forth. Otherwise,many of us are now prone to diseases.

Many people are arguing the unethical nature of the the technology, and the religious people say that technology has made man to be less God-fearing, and many other unsavory comments have been made against technologies. But in the overal scheme of things, technologies should be subservient to man, and should serve human pruprposes. But, our reality and the world as it is now, that is simply a utopia. Human nature will explore and use it for good and bad ends. That is one thing I can tell from observing the technologies in the past 30 years as of the writing of this Hub, and beyond


Alan Watt - Mind Control Techniques - July 6, 2014 Blurb

Mind Control Techniques And Institutions

I would like to explore a few points that I found on the web written by Nicholas West who states:

The more one researches mind control, the more one will come to the conclusion that there is a coordinated script that has been in place for a very long time with the goal to turn the human race into non-thinking automatons. For as long as man has pursued power over the masses, mind control has been orchestrated by those who study human behavior in order to bend large populations to the will of a small "elite" group.

Today, we have entered a perilous phase where mind control has taken on a physical, scientific dimension that threatens to become a permanent state if we do not become aware of the tools at the disposal of the technocratic dictatorship unfolding on a worldwide scale.

Modern mind control is both technological and psychological. Tests show that simply by exposing the methods of mind control, the effects can be reduced or eliminated, at least for mind control advertising and propaganda. More difficult to counter are the physical intrusions, which the military-industrial complex continues to develop and improve upon.

1. Education -- This is the most obvious, yet still remains the most insidious. It has always been a would-be dictator's ultimate fantasy to "educate" naturally impressionable children, thus it has been a central component to Communist and Fascist tyrannies throughout history. No one has been more instrumental in exposing the agenda of modern education than Charlotte Iserbyt -- one can begin research into this area by downloading a free PDF of her book, The Deliberate Dumbing Down of America, which lays bare the role of Globalist foundations in shaping a future intended to produce servile drones lorded over by a fully educated, aware elite class.

2. Advertising and Propaganda -- Edward Bernays has been cited as the inventor of the consumerist culture that was designed primarily to target people's self-image (or lack thereof) in order to turn a want into a need. This was initially envisioned for products such as cigarettes, for example. However, Bernays also noted in his 1928 book, Propaganda, that "propaganda is the executive arm of the invisible government." This can be seen most clearly in the modern police state and the growing citizen snitch culture, wrapped up in the pseudo-patriotic War on Terror. The increasing consolidation of media has enabled the entire corporate structure to merge with government, which now utilizes the concept of propaganda placement. Media; print, movies, television, and cable news can now work seamlessly to integrate an overall message which seems to have the ring of truth because it comes from so many sources, simultaneously. When one becomes attuned to identifying the main "message," one will see this imprinting everywhere. And this is not even to mention subliminal messaging.

3. Predictive Programming -- Many still deny that predictive programming is real. I would invite anyone to examine the range of documentation put together by Alan Watt and come to any other conclusion. Predictive programming has its origins in predominantly elitist Hollywood, where the big screen can offer a big vision of where society is headed. Just look back at the books and movies which you thought were far-fetched, or "science fiction" and take a close look around at society today. For a detailed breakdown of specific examples, Vigilant Citizen is a great resource that will probably make you look at "entertainment" in a completely different light.

4. Sports, Politics, Religion -- Some might take offense at seeing religion, or even politics, put alongside sports as a method of mind control. The central theme is the same throughout: divide and conquer. The techniques are quite simple: short circuit the natural tendency of people to cooperate for their survival, and teach them to form teams bent on domination and winning. Sports has always had a role as a key distraction that corrals tribal tendencies into a non-important event, which in modern America has reached ridiculous proportions where protests will break out over a sport celebrity leaving their city, but essential human issues such as liberty are giggled away as inconsequential. Political discourse is strictly in a left-right paradigm of easily controlled opposition, while religion is the backdrop of nearly every war throughout history.

5. Food, Water, and Air -- Additives, toxins, and other food poisons literally alter brain chemistry to create docility and apathy. Fluoride in drinking water has been proven to lower IQ; Aspartame and MSG are excitotoxins which excite brain cells until they die; and easy access to the fast food that contains these poisons generally has created a population that lacks focus and motivation for any type of active lifestyle. Most of the modern world is perfectly groomed for passive receptiveness -- and acceptance -- of the dictatorial elite. And if you choose to diligently watch your diet, they are fully prepared to spray the population from the above.

6. Drugs -- This can be any addictive substance, but the mission of mind controllers is to be sure you are addicted to something. One major arm of the modern mind control agenda is psychiatry, which aims to define all people by their disorders, as opposed to their human potential. This was foreshadowed in books such as Brave New World. Today, it has been taken to even further extremes as a medical tyranny has taken hold where nearly everyone has some sort of disorder -- particularly those who question authority. The use of nerve drugs in the military has led to record numbers of suicides. Worst of all, the modern drug state now has over 25% of U.S. children on mind-numbing medication.

7. Military testing -- The military has a long history as the testing ground for mind control. The military mind is perhaps the most malleable, as those who pursue life in the military generally resonate to the structures of hierarchy, control, and the need for unchallenged obedience to a mission. For the increasing number of military personal questioning their indoctrination, a recent story highlighted DARPA's plans for transcranial mind control helmets that will keep them focused.

8. Electromagnetic spectrum -- An electromagnetic soup envelops us all, charged by modern devices of convenience which have been shown to have a direct impact on brain function.

In a tacit admission of what is possible, one researcher has been working with a "god helmet" to induce visions by altering the electromagnetic field of the brain.

Our modern soup has us passively bathed by potentially mind-altering waves, while a wide range of possibilities such as cell phone towers is now available to the would-be mind controller for more direct intervention.

9. Television, Computer, and "flicker rate"-- It's bad enough that what is "programmed" on your TV (accessed via remote "control") is engineered; it is all made easier by literally lulling you to sleep, making it a psycho-social weapon. Flicker rate tests show that alpha brain waves are altered, producing a type of hypnosis -- which doesn't portend well for the latest revelation that lights can transmit coded Internet data by "flickering faster than the eye can see." The computer's flicker rate is less, but through video games, social networks, and a basic structure which overloads the brain with information, the rapid pace of modern communication induces an ADHD state. A study of video games revealed that extended play can result in lower blood flow to the brain, sapping emotional control. Furthermore, role-playing games of lifelike war and police state scenarios serve to desensitize a connection to reality. One look at the WikiLeaks video Collateral Murder should be familiar to anyone who has seen a game like Call of Duty.

10. Nanobots -- From science fiction horror, directly to the modern brain; the nanobots are on the way. Direct brain modification already has been packaged as "neuroengineering." A Wired article from early 2009 highlighted that direct brain manipulation via fiber optics is a bit messy, but once installed "it could make someone happy with the press of a button." Nanobots take the process to an automated level, rewiring the brain molecule by molecule. Worse, these mini droids can self-replicate, forcing one to wonder how this genie would ever get back in the bottle once unleashed. Expected date of arrival? Early 2020s.

A concerted effort is underway to manage and predict human behavior so that the social scientists and the dictatorial elite can control the masses and protect themselves from the fallout of a fully awake free humanity. Only by waking up to their attempts to put us to sleep do we stand a chance of preserving our free will.

Subliminal Advertising: How Imbedded Images of Phalluses and Death Masks Help Sell Products

The Sponsors On Viral Stream...

Media, politics and pop-culture. Programming the Nation takes an encompassing look at the history of subliminal messaging in America. According to many authorities, since the late 1950s subliminal content has been tested and delivered through all forms of mass-media including Hollywood filmmakers Alfred Hitchcock and William Friedkin. Even our modern military has been accused of these practices in the "war on terror"; against soldiers and civilians both abroad and at home.

With eye-opening footage, revealng interviews, humorous anecdotes, and an array of visual effects, the film categorically explores the alleged usage of subliminals in advertising, music, film, television, anti-theft devices, political propaganda, military psychological operations, and advanced weapons development. Director Jeff Warrick makes it his personal mission to determine if these manipulative tactics have succeeded in "programming the nation?" Or, if subliminal messaging belongs in the category of what many consider urban legend.

We learn from Nicholas West that thee is what he refers to as:

Future Methods Of Mind Control

The mission of a small "elite" group to control the masses is nothing new. It has always been a tool implemented in the form of propaganda used to alter perception and thus steer the direction of large populations. The Modern Methods Of Mind Control are in many ways merely higher-tech extensions of what always has been predictably successful: religion, sports, politics, education, etc.

With the advent of television, a whole new world was opened up for would-be controllers, as news media was easily corporatized and made uniform enough to translate core messages, while encouraging passivity, and also presenting the illusion of choice. Simultaneously, choice has been reduced in fundamental areas such as finance, education and health with reams of legislation and "incentives" to ensure compliance.

Today, however, we have entered a perilous phase where mind control has taken on a physical, scientific dimension that includes a sophisticated full-spectrum assault on the mind in the form of chemicals in the food, air, and water, as well as electromagnetic interference and the ubiquitous Big Pharma cocktail that not only pollutes the user directly, but runs off into the rest of the unknowing population. Combined with control over education and media, it's no wonder why true rebellion struggles to take hold.
Nevertheless, despite the above assaults, people are rebelling -- globally. This indicates a tentative awakening that is troubling if you are in the vast minority of those who knowingly attempt to enslave the planet. So what does tomorrow bring?

The mind control of the future forgoes all pretense at indirectly altering perception through media and politics, as that continues to be exposed for what it truly is. It does away with the clumsy and sporadic effectiveness of mind-altering drugs and environmental toxins, as companies like Monsanto are not only reviled, but are seen as the epitome of true evil on earth.
The mind control of the future goes straight into direct programming of the digital mind, and this is exactly what the technotronic elite are discussing right now. There are 7 likely ways this could be achieved if we don't learn about their agenda in time to continue resisting their anti-human ends.

Digital Brainy Mind

Scientists may one day be able to use electronic copies of human brains to explore the nature of the mind. But is it ethical to make that e-mind suffer and die if one can resurrect it at will and delete any memory of the suffering? Successfully emula
Scientists may one day be able to use electronic copies of human brains to explore the nature of the mind. But is it ethical to make that e-mind suffer and die if one can resurrect it at will and delete any memory of the suffering? Successfully emula

Surveillance and Gadgets -- Surveillance alone can change the way we think and act. These two facets together are more powerful still. They have now been successfully intertwined into a de facto brain-computer interface. If we look at just two inventions -- the television and video game consoles -- we see a massive impact upon the way people of all ages view the world through their gadgets. In order to take people to the next level of mind control, there has to be a consumer relation to it, as well as creating something that appears intrinsically necessary to relate to the outside world. Enter the Internet and the "smart" devices wired into it. The Internet is every form of surveillance and gadget wrapped up into one. Now, even that is heading to the next level. It has been shown that this type of tech can rewire the brain.

We are beginning to witness heavy investment by the twin behemoths, Google and Microsoft, in "augmented reality." It is stutter-stepping to be sure based on privacy concerns, but the concept of merging reality with virtual reality has been introduced and will not likely go away. Mind-controlled computers, tablets, phones, video games and more are already here. The direct experience with mind/perception alteration preps the individual for this type of direct manipulation in other areas of their lives. Remember, this is a two-way street -- data received and data transmitted. Combine this with the fact that every two-way action is recorded by tech companies, then fed into government databases, and we see the foundation being erected of a pyramid with a much clearer all-seeing eye than in tyrannies of even the recent past.

Mind-controlled Robots and Drones -- This is already in the mainstream news, but how about the merging of man and machine? This is what the transhumanist dream actually is, but DARPA is naturally looking to be sure it gets to the battlefield first. The Royal Society, an elite UK think-tank which will be mentioned later, has published a report that indicates an interest in using brain mapping technology to keep soldiers alert, as well as "operate weaponry remotely through mind-machine interfaces." (source)

With an increasing amount of robots and drones already on the battlefield and in civilian space, this opens up the possibility of "thought-controlled" drones. The following video from a PopSci article shows where this is heading. After this, the question becomes whether or not autonomous drones will be able to link in reverse to anyone they wish.

Real Unreality

Mind Over Mechanics

Magnetic Manipulation -- Transcranial pulsed ultrasound was made famous by The God Helmet. This is being tested in the military and begins to form the crucial bridge between "buying into it" and being subjected to it. Weapons are already being developed (and possibly used) that use transcranial pulse ultra sound to soldiers to increase altertness and minimize pesky emotions like fear or compassion. It turns human beings into thoughtless drones to be controlled from a distance. On the battlefield, enemies can be subjected to the opposite -- lethargy, nausea, lack of impulse control, and a whole range of behavior that has no bearing upon one's will to act otherwise. Here is a frightening description from Wired reporter Jack Hitt as his brain is magnetically manipulated to have a "religious experience."
...selected electromagnetic fields begin gently thrumming my brain's temporal lobes. The fields are no more intense than what you'd get as by-product from an ordinary blow-dryer, but what's coming is anything but ordinary. My lobes are about to be bathed with precise wavelength patterns that are supposed to affect my mind in a stunning way, artificially inducing the sensation that I am seeing God. (Source)
It's unlikely that only benign visions are planned for battlefield Earth. Here is a link to a .mil page discussing remote control of brain activity using ultrasound: http://science.dodlive.mil/2010/09/01/remote-control-of-brain-activity-using-ultrasound/
Every single aspect of human sensation, perception, emotion, and behavior is regulated by brain activity. Thus, having the ability to stimulate brain function is a powerful technology.
Indeed.

Implants and Ingestibles -- RFID is one technology being touted as a wonder for finding lost items -- like kids and dogs and products -- but has also broken through into the field of medicine. Most people might want to know, for instance, if their body was registering signs of an impending upheaval at the chemical level, before it ever had time to take hold and manifest as a full-blown physical event. This plays a major role in selling the mind-body-computer connection to nearly every age. It, too, is a form of surveillance, but one that is even more salable, as there is a finer edge to this sword than straight snooping.

The area of mind control, aside from the obvious behavioral changes, becomes probable with RFID implants and ingestible RFID. VeriMed's human implant has been approved by the FDA and has been used as an ID system by the Israeli military. At the moment, this technology is being sold as an interior sensor network, but there is much more that can be done, as has been shown in animal testing. Once again, the battlefield is where it is likely to appear first in the area of neurorobotics, funded by DARPA of course, as seen in the video below:

Government Creeated To Control The Masses

Rfid Brain Chip & Solders of the Future

One might believe this method to be a bit lower on the scale of possibility for the general public, simply because there must be a certain level of acceptance. However, with the rise of nanotechnology which can insert itself across the blood-brain barrier, it is not out of the question that the invasion could come by stealth through food or vaccines. Nanoparticles have been admitted in food, clothing and appliances. Mad scientists have no idea what type of Pandora's Box they are opening. Their only job is to open the doors and let the guinea pigs offer the results. Scientists openly have admitted to wanting to rewire the brain through DNA modification ... to help us, though.

Genetic and Neuroengineering -- To some, genetics form the basis of all behavior. Most would agree that it plays a role, even if a limited one that is subservient to the human will to determine behavior beyond being merely a de facto automaton. That isn't stopping geneticists from attempting to determine traits, then alter or eradicate certain ones. The logical extension of this testing gets into the area of behavioral predictive programming, not only through all of the data that has been compiled on you through surveillance of your every move and expression of your every thought, but right down into the very fiber of your being. Ed Boyden from MIT's Neuroengineering and Neuromedia Lab, explains:
If we take seriously the idea that our minds are implemented in the circuits of our brains, then it becomes a top priority to understand how to engineer brains for the better. (Source)
Such as: Rewiring DNA Circuitry Could Help Treat Asthma and other supposedly benign efforts to eradicate afflictions and disorders. The concept of genetic circuitry is being pursued to rewire human cells to sense disease and treat it.
Stanford researchers led by Christina Smolke have developed engineered DNA-based “devices” that can sense disease states in cultured human cells and fine-tune their own functions in response to a cell’s internal signals, such as kill themselves or become susceptible to drugs.
These autonomous biological tools are called “sensor-actuator” devices because they sense what’s happening in a cell and act upon what they detect. (Source)
Those who are involved in this area of study must call into question perfectly benign initiatives, "The study was funded by the Caltech Joseph Jacobs Institute for Molecular Engineering for Medicine, the National Institutes of Health, the U.S. Department of Defense, the Alfred P. Sloan Foundation and the Bill and Melinda Gates Foundation."

Neuroscience -- The Economist noted in 2002 that this was the future of mind control; well, now we're here. This is a huge area of research and it shows by how much is being invested, and how many federal agencies are involved. Obama's BRAIN Project is heavily invested in the notion that the human brain is the final frontier. It is a comprehensive $100 million dollar 10-year plan that is already bearing some fruit. It is being announced by The Atlantic Wire that The 'Google Earth' of 3D Brain Maps is Here:
Meet "Big Brain," the first high-res, 3D digital model of the human brain. It's the result of a huge, 10-year project built from individual scans of 7,400 slices of a single human brain. The project will help scientists learn more about our minds.
(...)
Guided by previously taken MRI images and relationships between neighboring sections, they then aligned the sections to create a continuous 3-D object representing about a terabyte of data.
An overview video from the research team behind the project gives a good view of just how close this baby can get. At the highest zoom, the map can't show individual cells. But it's detailed enough to learn about the different layers of cells in the brain. A typical MRI scan has a maximum resolution of about a millimeter. By comparison, Big Brain zooms in to 20 micrometers...

Is Government And Governance What We Think It Is

Ultra high Resolution 3D Human Brain Model (BigBrain) in Atelier3D Viewer

Once again, the promise is to solve the mysteries of diseases such as Alzheimer's, but yet again there is DARPA to ensure that there always is underlying negative research being conducted. Memory erasure has been sought to eliminate postraumatic stress disorder, for example, which serves as a reminder of the horrors of war on both sides of a conflict. Multi-tour soldiers are more suicidal and homicidal than ever before and should prompt people to question the motivations for putting human beings in such a horrible state ... not seeking to erase the consequences. This type of rewiring fundamentally alters what it means to be a human being capable of compassion, empathy, and free will. And, in fact, some scientists are fortunately raising the serious ethical concerns of military mind control, as documented by Jonathan Moreno.
The military, scientists and ethicists are increasingly wondering how neuroscience technology changes the battlefield. The staggering possibilities are further along than many think. There is already development on automated drones that are programmed to make their own decisions about who to kill within the rules of war. Other ideas that are closer-than-you-think to becoming a military reality: Tanks controlled from half a world away, memory erasures that could prevent PTSD, and "brain fingerprinting" that could be used to extract secrets from enemies.
All of those questions will have to be answered sooner than later, Moreno says, along with a host of others. Should soldiers have the right to refuse "experimental" brain implants? Will the military want to use some of this technology before science deems it safe?
"There's a tremendous tension about this," he says. "There's a great feeling of responsibility that we push this stuff out so we're ahead of our adversaries." (Source)
And we never should forget that what is developed on the battlefield is sure to trickle down into the rest of society.

Direct Upload/Hack: Between the Internet of Things and recent revelations that reporter Michael Hastings' car could theoretically have been hacked, the concept of a direct mind upload to the Internet/Cloud should be seen as more than troubling. If all of these lesser systems are open to surveillance and hacking, whether domestically or abroad, it would stand to reason that the mind, too, will be subject to security leaks, blunders, and deliberate alteration. Neurogadget.com reported the following:
Researchers at the Usenix Security conference have demonstrated a zero-day vulnerability in your brain. They achieved as much as a 40% success rate among a group of willing volunteers. The “hack” works by measuring the brain’s response to images flashed before your eyes, from which the researchers can determine things like your home location, date of birth, and even your credit card PIN. (Source)
With the advent of quantum computing, some believe that encryption will guarantee the state of one's mind, as it were. But given what we know now about corporate-government overlap and cooperation, will you be comfortable putting your mind literally in the Cloud? Remember, every new level of computation promises the guarantee of more safety and privacy, while every revelation points to a vast reduction of both. The merging of man and machine into the matrix could become a permanent nightmare from which it is impossible to awaken.

Nevertheless, it's immortality they are after, as Ray Kurzweil, Director of Engineering at Google, explains:
In his 2005 book The Singularity Is Near, Kurzweil predicted that ongoing achievements in biotechnology would mean that by the middle of the century, “humans will develop the means to instantly create new portions of ourselves, either biological or nonbiologicial,” so that people can have “a biological body at one time and not at another, then have it again, then change it.”
He also said there will soon be “software-based humans” who will “live out on the Web, projecting bodies whenever they need or want them, including holographically projected bodies, foglet-projected bodies and physical bodies comprising nanobot swarms.” (Source)

Believe Half Of What You See, And None Of What You Hear

Ray Kurzweil — Immortality By 2045 / Global Future 2045 Congress '2013

I'll close with some potentially good news brought to us from long-time investigative reporter and author, Jon Rappoport. It is his assertion that the above-mentioned technologies are ultimately doomed to failure.
Why? It’s simple. The scientists don’t know what they’re doing. They have no clear objectives, and the notion of building an accurate picture of a few trillion neurons in action is as far from reality as a flea painting the ceiling of the Sistine Chapel.
The utopian technocrats, who’ve been predicting that, by the middle of this century, they will create an artificial brain that outstrips the one inside the skull, are suddenly on vacation. They’re mumbling and backing away.
It’s the old put up or shut up. They’re shutting up. They’ve got nothing.
I guess paradise is postponed. Oh well, it was fun while it lasted. (Source)
Jon goes on to suggest that the reductionist approach to the human brain is nothing more than wishful thinking (pardon the pun) for controllers.
The mind is not a material object at all. The mind is not the brain. (Source)
In fact, the human brain is infinitely complex and cannot be so easily pinned down, predicted, and manipulated. That is, if we won't permit it to be.
Of course, the real cure is finding a way to attain our actual size, which is without boundaries. Then and only then do we begin to see our lives. Then we see the skies beyond the cartoon sky. Then we see the great adventure. Then we feel the cosmic boredom of the soul disintegrate. Then we feel Freedom, not freedom. Then we shrug off these fools and operators who are trying to enthrall us with their yak-yak-yak sewing machines of false knowledge. -- Jon Rappoport

The Future Of Mind Control

Mind Control Today By The Technotronic Elite

The Hub above, Media's Control Of Mind Control Through technique set out to vet out this existential problem. The addition, above, of the whole article and its videos by Nicholas West, was for the purposes of expanding on the subject, upgrading the updated information and techniques now being used, and finally to keep the reader abreast with that is taking place beyond their purview. This is important for by now we know the methods that have been used heretofore to control the minds of the masses. In the deposition, above, by West, we begin to clearly discern the parameters of the whole patterns of techniques and gizmos.

Upon reading Wests article, one is struck by the malingering and lingering Wars that are happening all over the Globe; these might not only be chemical weapons and advanced weaponry, of which much deadly damage is done by these. It is the misery and suffering that ordinary citizens have been subjected, forced to flee to unknown lands and left or forgotten in some piece of useless piece of land to just live and die there. Children and the elderly are suffering greatly, and many men and women have become victims of the ongoing wars in Syria, Ukraine, and many imprisoned throughout the world in Argentina, China, United States, and if one were to arrive on earth today from elsewhere, they'd be surprised by the state of War that is engulfing the whole globe, all over the world.

These are part of the plans that allow the powerful nations to test their armory, their mind control schemes, and advance their causes at the expense of the terrorized masses globally. West gives us information as to what is used to control and redirect our brains, the methods used, and the machinery employed in these dastardly deeds. He does, however, give the reader a sense of how some of these technological advances are used for the good of man. He quickly points out, too, to those uses that are detrimental to the lives and existence of many hapless masses, and carrying out their researches for other future plans discussed by West Above.

The poisoned water and the environment, the diseases that are spawn from; the drugs used to cause sterility,, vaccinations that cause early death and spoil teeth, and other horrible and evil uses planted in the ingested food and drinks, are the real cause for concern, and knowing about them, despite their being hidden in plain. From military use of all these ideas, we learn from West, these trickling down to us ordinary users, in many ways. The Drugging of the Masses in America by the , the creation and perpetuation of diseases in Africa and the so-called Third, is what this article helps us to better understand, and to know who is doing what, where,, when, why and towards which end? are the many questions asked, and West helps us redress and address many of these shenanigans by what West calls "Technotronic Elite", should be study even much more fully now.

This should be acknowledged, thus far in this Hub, there is a constant means and effort to control the minds of the masses, and this has been going on for milleniums. What we should not forget, when we come across articles like the one above by West and its videos, is that the same if not improved efforts towards mainatin this state of existence, the Mad scientists insevice of the tecnotonical potentates, has not slowed down, nor abated. What usually happens, as West note, when they become bedazzled and bamboozled, they withdraw and ponder and resort to other projects. We, the users and used, need to begin to pay attention, very closely to these going-ons, applications and manipulation of our lives, minds, brains and bodies, vigilantly and consistently.

Mind Control Of The Masses Is Both From The Past And In the Present Future

What's Happenin'? - Murmurs From The Masses

What is being said, by Whom, Where, How, Why and Under What Circumstances, and also to What End? This Hub has made me look at what I have written thus far and ask those sequences of questions-(framing) words in order to take/look-at the other(Unseen/Unknown) side of this fixture. Today we interact with and use media gizmos like they are part of ourselves. Many people have posted here on the Web that they cannot envision a world without their gadgets and the Internet and its-everything. It is also the language that has been spawned by these technologies that many people want to constantly be involved in.

It is also true that these gizmos affect our thinking, ways of life, existence and self-affirmation that without them, in a short-time-span of their use amongst so many people, have been capable of embedding themselves into the lives of its users-many people confess that they cannot live without their gizmos and the Internet. These are the effects and affects I can discern without consulting an expert to tell me it is like that.

We are individuals with hard-core bases of users doing the same thing, about different things-but one thing in same with all — starring at our phones and poking them all the time, and mostly impervious and oblivious to our surroundings.Our behavior has changed. We live with and inside or within our phones and gadgets. The world is no more nor around us whilst we are bing sucked in the virtual stream ever so deeply, and our gadgets being the transport in this morass and Viral soup.

How we used to walk listening to our Walkman's has changed to staring and listening to our iPods and iPhones[smart-phones]. Also one observes ourselves how we interact with one another in public by burying our faces onto our screens, playing game, reading and sending texts, and checking out the social media and the like.

The body sway and motion is different, and people are 'walling-off' the world around them, in order now to accommodate their gizmos and be in and with their gizmos-to join-in on the virally splurging flow-constant chatter, that in the end, change has happened to modern-day technological-man. We are personification and materialized technological Man formed and shaped by our own gizmos and need to receive information instantly and constantly. This is a perfect playing ground for the Technocratic Elite who muzzle up these dialogues and realities.

What is being said, by whom, where, what, how and to what effect is dependent on the present day users and their gizmos-and what they would be doing at certain Internet moment or time. The Web has facilitated for the morphing and merging of these into/inter-communication means, that the dissemination of information and interaction has turned out to be what is produced/determined and dictated to the user by and through the viral flow, speed and data-glut, Human repsonsivity and reaction and hum-drum life pre-technological gadgets and their techniques, has been replaced by these overwhelming and very efficient technological gadgets and their embedded techniques-meaning, then, ways of response to all this technological "Mumbo-Jumbo" is what has changed.

Multi-tasking converging and interlocking communication exchanges and their enabling media with embedded techniques, has created a new way of communicating and Media use, perception, interacting, morphing and multiple interconnectivity and merging technical abilities that has totally changed man, his environment, way of thinking and acting, that. It is this change that I am question, then, as to who is speaking and saying what, how, when, why and to affect and for what kind of outcome? I as so, in order to begin to vet what and how is being said in a way that we understand and also that we are all on one page, somewhat, so's to be able to wrestle and wrap our minds and brains to all these many issues which need our attention-Pronto!

Media Control through technique has been expanded upon within this Hub, and these media overlaps are what is shaping and conditioning our use of the Internet and its attendant features, and fixtures. These machines do what they were designed for: give us efficiency and an illusion of communicating and being together as one "Global Village"(a la McLuhan) on the Web. Many, who are the main honchos in the Public Relations Offices have other ideas, and it is these creators in this Hub that have been subjected to close scrutiny and bundled in a sequence, showcasing them, also, as some efforts at mass control for the benefit of the technocrats-same team, and same scheme. Ad Nauseam

Learning how and why we communicate the way we are doing now is important towards understanding the New Technological Media, their usage, effects and affects,and these are of prime importance for our understanding and knowledge of modern-day technologies and its embedded efficient techniques.

Paulo Freire Maxim

Learning about why things are the way they are is important for the poor. Education becomes a very important tactic towards ameliorating this problem, Eric Fromm says:

"An Educational practice like that is a kind of historic-sociocultural and political psychoanalysis…"

This is what dogmatic, authoritarian, sectarian mechanist fail to perceive, and nearly always reject as "idealism." If the great popular masses are without a more critical understanding of how society functions," writes Freire. "it is not because they are naturally incapable of it-to my view-but on account of the precarious conditions which they live and survive, where they are forbidden to know. Thus, the way out is not ideological propaganda and political "sloganizing," as mechanist say it is, but the critical effort through which men and women take themselves in hand and become agents of curiosity, become investigators, become subjects in an ongoing process of quest for the revelation of the "why" of things and facts.

"Hence," Freire adds, "in the area of adult literacy, for example, I have long found myself insisting on what I call a "reading of the world and reading of the word." Not a reading of the word alone, nor a reading only of the world, but both together, in dialectical solidarity. It is precisely a "reading of the world" that enables its subject or agent to decipher, more and more critically, the "limit situation" or situations beyond which they find only "untested feasibility."

"It is in this sense that I insist once more on the imperative need of the progressive educator to familiarize herself or himself with the syntax and semantics of the popular groups-to understand how those persons do their reading of the world, to perceive that "craftiness" of theirs so indispensable to the culture of resistance that is in the process of formation, without which they cannot defend themselves from the violence to which they are subjected."

In order for us to better understand the role and use of education in cases like the majority of the poor have been subjected to, it is worthwhile to look at the State and Technique in a Technological Society. Ellul writes:

"The state plays a role of prime importance with respect to techniques. We have noted that until recently, different techniques were unrelated to one another. This unrelatedness was true of state techniques because they were localized and their domains were not contiguous; it held for private techniques because they were the result of highly uncoordinated activity which, while fruitful, was also anarchical and was dominated, moreover, by specialization.

"The basic effect of state action on techniques is to co-ordinate the whole complex, The State possesses the power of unification, since it is the planning power par excellence in society. In this it plays its true role, that of co-ordinating, adjusting, and equilibrating social forces. It has played this tole with respect to techniques for half a century or more, by bringing hitherto unrelated techniques into contact with one another, for example, economic and propaganda techniques.

"It relates them by establishing organisms responsible for this function, as , for example, the simple organs of liaison between ministries. It integrates the whole complex of techniques into a plan. Planning itself is the result of well-applied techniques, and only the state is in a position to establish plans which are valid on the national level. We are, at present, beginning to see plans on continental scale, not only the s-called five-year plans, but the Marshall Plan and plans for assisting underdeveloped countries.

It is only in the framework of planning that such operations are arranged and find their exact place. The state appears less as the brain which orders them organically and more as the relational apparatus which enables the seaparate techniques to confront one another and to coordinate their movements. We find concrete evidence of this again and again; in the coordination of rail and automobile traffic, the coordination of the production of the medical profession and social security, the coordination of foreign and colonial commerce, and of all commerce with finance, and so forth."

Dr Yosef Ben Jochannan ~ Black Man Wake Up!!!

For Teachers And Students

Amos N. Wilson | Issues of Identity Crisis in the Black Community, Myth or Reality?

Nowadays, When Face-To-Face Conversations And Interactions Have Become Obsolete....

More by this Author


Comments

No comments yet.

    Sign in or sign up and post using a HubPages Network account.

    0 of 8192 characters used
    Post Comment

    No HTML is allowed in comments, but URLs will be hyperlinked. Comments are not for promoting your articles or other sites.


    Click to Rate This Article
    working